Atlas Copco FD

Atlas Copco
Service Air Compressor and Dryer

Final Drawing
Shipyard: Yantai CIMC Raffles Offshore Ltd.

Hull No.: H536
Project: 2200T Wind Installation vessel
Classification: CCS
Atlas Copco Contact Information

Contact: Minorca Zhang
Tel.: +86 139 9846 1630
Email: [email protected]
6HUYLFH$LU&RPSUHVVRU
&RPSUHVVRU0RGHO
0RGHO 0$6*$
4XDQWLW\ 7KUHH˄˅XQLWV
7\SH )UHVKZDWHUFRROHGRLOLQMHFWHGVFUHZFRPSUHVVRU
2ULJLQDOFRXQW\ %HOJLXP
0DNHU $WODV&RSFR
*HQHUDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
&RPSUHVVHG0HGLXP $LU
$PELHQW7HPS ć
:HLJKW NJ
&DQRS\'LPHQVLRQ PPîPPîPP
&HUWLILFDWHIRUFRPSUHVVRU &&6FHUWLILFDWHDQGPDNHU¶VFHUWLILFDWH
3HUIRUPDQFH'DWD
&DSDFLW\ PK f
1RUPDOPRWRUSRZHU N:
0D[ZRUNLQJSUHVVXUH EDU
3RZHU 93K+]
&RROLQJZDWHUIORZ OPLQ
2LOFDSDFLW\ O
6WDUWLQJPHWKRG <'
6FRSHRI6XSSO\
; $LULQWDNHILOWHU
; /RDG8QORDGYDOYH
; 2LOLQMHFWHGVFUHZHOHPHQW
; &KHFNYDOYH
; $LURLOVHSDUDWRUZLWKVDIHW\YDOYH
; 2LOVHSDUDWRUHOHPHQW
; ZDWHUDIWHUFRROHU
; :DWHUVHSDUDWRU
; (OHFWURQLFGUDLQ
; 0DULQHGULYHPRWRU
; 2LOILOWHU
; 2LOVWRSYDOYH
; 9LEUDWLRQGDPSHUVIRUPRWRU
; 6ROHQRLGYDOYH
; 3UHVVXUHWUDQVGXFHUIRURXWOHWDLU
; 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUIRURXWOHWDLU
; 7URSLFDOWKHUPRVWDW
; 6WDUWHUER[
; $PPHWHU
; 0RWRUVSDFHKHDWHU

&RQWUROV\VWHP
0$6*$VFUHZDLUFRPSUHVVRULVHTXLSSHGZLWKWKH³(OHNWURQLNRQ´ZKLFKKDVIROORZLQJ
IXQFWLRQV
&RPSUHVVRUFRQWURO
g 6WDUWVWRS
g /RDGXQORDG
g (PHUJHQF\VWRS
g 5HVHWWHVW
&RPSUHVVRUVWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQV
g 9ROWDJHRQ
g $XWRPDWLFRSHUDWLRQ
g &RPSUHVVRUORDGHG
g &RPSUHVVRUXQORDGHG
g &RPSUHVVRUPD[LPXPZRUNLQJSUHVVXUH
1XPHULFDOUHDGRXWV
g 'HOLYHU\DLUSUHVVXUH
g 'HOLYHU\DLUWHPSHUDWXUH
6HUYLFHLQGLFDWLRQV
g $LUILOWHU
g 2LOILOWHU
g 2LOOLIHWLPH
g 6HQVRUHUURU

&RPSUHVVRUVDIHW\VKXWGRZQLQGLFDWLRQV
g +LJKDLURXWOHWWHPSHUDWXUH
g 0RWRURYHUORDG
g (PHUJHQF\VWRS
+RXUPHWHUV
g 7RWDOUXQQLQJKRXUV
g 7RWDOORDGHGKRXUV
2XWSXWVLJQDOVDVIROORZV
g 5XQQLQJLQGLFDWLRQVLJQDORXWSXW
g &RPPRQVKXWGRZQDODUPVLJQDORXWSXW
5HPDUN
9HQGRUSURYLGHFRXQWHUIODQJH
6SDUHSDUWVIRURQH\HDURSHUDWLRQ
$LUILOWHUHOHPHQWSFV
2LOILOWHUSFV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
requirements of the List of Prohibited Substances

All materials supplied are in compliance with the
256 2250
5
COOLING AIR OUTLET 314
312 311 70 F2 OF COMPRESSOR 17 1080
ELECTRICAL CABLE
5 125 670 163 67 82 150 PASSAGE Ø65
49
F5
P2 A
150 80
141
F1 D
100
Q150
COMPRESSED AIR
COOLING AIR OUTLET G 2 1/2"
330
INLET OF CUBICLE P1 COOLING AIR
643
C1
OUTLET OF CUBICLE
P3
D3 178
186 91 340 225 W2 / D2
L
1952
170(2x)
1850
W1 / D1 E2
1750
E1
1665
Motor Lifting Eye

(2x) B
1469
883
1133
H
COOLING AIR INLET
104 745
OF COMPRESSOR
684
46(2x)
A B
201
145
120
73(4x)
14(4x)
150
200(2x) 695(2x) 200(2x) 580(2x) 120 50(3x) 60(2x) 225
1070 01
2235
DIN Flanges A
DIN flanges are available as optional kit C
WATER COOLED
0607217003 ( 1 : 1 )
AIR COOLED
(P57)
A(1:2)
(G1 1/2")
696 1013*
2x
Motor Lifting Eye
93
197
(48)
D
427
270
27(2x)
DIN Flanges Manual drain
WATER COOLED
F4
AIR COOLED
DIN flanges are available as optional kit EWD WSD G 1/8" F
293
42
931
0551000225 ( 1: 1 ) (ISO 7-R 2 1/2)(2x) Automatic drain F3
EWD WSD tube P8
W
427(2x)
427
307
B(1:2)
78
1x 1x
57(2x)
299(2x) 370(2x) 295(2x) 305(2x)
890(2x) 895(2x) OSCi outlet

(Option) E
DIN Flanges
WATER COOLED
AIR COOLED
DIN flanges are available as optional kit
0551000195 ( 1:1 ) (ISO 7-R 1 1/2)(2x) Ambient sensor
Drain UD+/DD filter

tube P8(option)
2x
F
Baseframe detail DIN Flanges DIN Flanges
DIN flanges are available as optional kit
VIEW FROM "A" P15 (4x) DIN flanges are available as optional kit
846 COMPRESSOR MOUNTING
HOLES
50(*)
590 1000 0633331100 ( 1 : 2 )

22,5
WATER COOLED
0633330800 ( 1 : 2 ) (11)
WATER COOLED
AIR COOLED
AIR COOLED
163
(10) (3)
(P185)
(212)
50(*)
(3)
(P150) (P18)(4x)
(P18)(4x)
261
50(*)
1035
(P88)
211
Options
50(*)
(P145) All options are shown in dotted lines G

copied, used for manufacturing or communicated to any other person or company.
This document is our property and shall not without our permission be altered,
Tolerances, if not indicated, according to:
* DOOR FULLY OPEN ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLASS

136
Name Confidentiality Class

1x 1x DIMENS DRWG MAS/MAS+ GA55-90 FS acc. to 1102 K
2x Material
Not Applicable Internal
Treatment
(13) (P110) Not Applicable INV
50(*) 50(*) (P122)
50(*)
Compare
(18) Scale Family Drawing owner
CONFIDENTIAL:
1:10
Drawn by INEvak Blank nr. Replaces - API

Drawing format Blank wt. Fini wt.
01 Base frame modified 30/12/2015 (*) Minimum area to be supported is surrounding 50 mm for all 9820978595 -.08 STATUS A0
- Kg N/A Designation Sheet 1 / 1
Ed
Posi-
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3 D model Edition 3D Approved Internal
Des checked. Prod checked. Approved. Date
22/12/2015 9820978595
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAIN POWER SUPPLY

A
INDEX INSTALLED OPTIONAL COMPONENTS VOLTAGE : ........... V
SHEET DISCRIPTION Potential free contacts (ES100)
01 INDEX K04' : aux. relay load/unload FREQ : ...... Hz 3 PH
02 POWER CIRCUIT MAIN MOTOR K21: aux. contact compressor running for ES100
03 POWER CIRCUIT FAN Motor thermistors and anti-condensation heater
04 POWER CIRCUIT DRYER

R1,K34 : Drive motor thermistor protection, shutdown MAX FUSE [A] IEC ONLY
R2,K35 : Drive motor thermistor protection, warning
05 SUPPLY CONTROL CIRCUIT IEC : Class gL/gG
R96 : anti condensation heaters B
06 CONTROL CIRCUIT I02: digital and analog input expansion module ....... A
07 CONTROL CIRCUIT Y2 : Solenoid valve for modulating control
08 REGULATOR MK5S SWIPE Y51 : water shut-off valve (W-cooled only)
REGULATOR MK5S TOUCH (OPTIONAL) Watercooled compressor
SETTING
09
10 EXPANSION MODULE I02 TT51: Temp. sensor cooling water IN (watercooled )

TT52: Temp. sensor cooling water OUT (watercooled )
F21 ... A
11 INPUT CONNECTION 2X27
Energy recovery
I02: digital and analog input expansion module
F15 ... A C
TT53: Temp. sensor energy recovery IN
TT54: Temp. sensor energy recovery OUT
15 INPUT CONNECTION 3X35 DD/PD filterkit
16 OPTIONAL CONTACTS PDS11: Delta P-switch for integrated DD filter
17 LEGEND PDS12: Delta P-switch for integrated PD filter
18 LEGEND S10: Main disconnecting switch
19 LEGEND Freeze protection : See service diagram 9820 3558 00

NOTES PSR
20 D
K25 : Phase sequence relay
Monitoring
PDT01: Pressure Diff. transducer Delta P air inlet
PDT02: Pressure Diff. transducer Delta P oil filter
MOTORDATA
PDT03: Pressure Diff. transducer Delta P oil separator
I02: digital and analog input expansion module
M1 kW HP SF :
M2 kW HP SF : E
DRYERDATA
A1 kW HP
F
Confidentiality Class
Name DIAGRAM SERVICE MAS GA55-90 (2012) 1102 K/
Material Not Applicable Internal
Treatment Not Applicable ACDE

Scale 1:1 Family Not Applicable A3 Compare Drawing owner
Drawn by Blank nr. Not Applicable Replaces API G
ap
pr
Version Drwg
XT
02 Contacts of K35 & K34 is changed to NO 20-08-2019 Not Applicable Not Applicable Blank wt. Designation Sheet 01 (20)
Kg Fini wt. Kg
EE
STATUS 02 N/A 0
IN
Note
Posi-
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D Model Ed.Version 3D Approved Internal
9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
POWER CIRCUIT MAIN MOTOR
[E]
[L]
OPTION
[F]
[A]
F
[B]
[B]
CUSTOMER'S INSTALLATION ALL VOLTAGES (50 AND 60 HZ)

G
Designation Sheet 02 (20)
ACDE Name DIAGRAM SERVICE MAS GA55-90 (2012) STATUS Ed. Date Prev. Page 01 Next Page 03 A3
Drawing owner
API Approved Internal 02 20-08-2019
Drawn by Date
ATLASCOPCO\INEEXTpat
22/01/2019 4:26:53 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
POWER CIRCUIT FAN
F
[B]
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:47 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
POWER CIRCUIT DRYER
DRYER (A1) VARIANTS

A
DRYER 400V 50Hz / 460V 60Hz/ 380V 60Hz DRYER 690V 50/60Hz / 500V 50Hz / 575V 60Hz
[C]
[C]
FAN FAN
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:39 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY CONTROL CIRCUIT
[H]
B
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:33 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTROL CIRCUIT
[M] [I]
[P]
FF ONLY
D
OPTION
OPTION
AC
E
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:25 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTROL CIRCUIT
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION D
OPTION
E
[G]
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:20 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
REGULATOR MK5S SWIPE
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:13 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
REGULATOR MK5S TOUCH (OPTIONAL)
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22-01-2019 08:56:07 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EXPANSION MODULE I02
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:26:01 9820650023
1
GND
ACDE
API
Drawing owner
T01
Name
2
GND
T02
3
DIAGRAM SERVICE
GND
T03
4
GND
P01
5
V+
MAS GA55-90 (2012)

DI-SUPPLY
6
DI02
STATUS
MOTOR PROTECTIONS
Approved Internal
DI01
Ed.
02
EMERGENCY STOP
[I]
Date
7
20-08-2019 DI04
FAULT ELECTRONIC DRAIN
Drawn by
Prev. Page
10
DI03
REMOTE START/PR. STOP
8
Date
SUPPLY
Next Page 12
24VAC
22/01/2019 4:25:56
A3
SUPPLY
24VAC
Designation
9
9820650023
10
Sheet 11
(20)
INPUT CONNECTIONS 2X27
F
B
D
A
E
C
G
1
ACDE
GND
API
Drawing owner
OPTION
Name
T04
2
GND
OPTION
T05
3
DIAGRAM SERVICE
GND
4
P02
V+
5
DI-SUPPLY
MAS GA55-90 (2012)

DI06
REMOTE LOAD/UNLOAD
(CLOSED=LOAD)
DI05
6
REMOTE PRESS. SENSING

(LINK=REMOTE)
STATUS
DI08
Approved Internal
OPTION DELTA P PD FILTER
Ed.
02
Date
7
OPTION DI07
20-08-2019
Drawn by DELTA P DD FILTER
Prev. Page
DI10
11
REMOTE PRESS.SET SELECTION

(OPEN = PRESSURE SET 1)
(CLOSED = PRESSURE SET 2)
8
DI09
Date
NOT USED
Next Page 13
22/01/2019 4:25:48
A3
Designation
9
9820650023
10
Sheet 12
(20)
F
B
D
A
E
C
G
1
ACDE
API
Drawing owner
GND
Name
2
GND
DI02
DI01
3
DIAGRAM SERVICE
THERMISTOR WARNING
DI04
DI03
4
DI06
DI05
DI08
5
DI07
MAS GA55-90 (2012)

DI-SUPPLY
DI-SUPPLY
6
STATUS
DI10
Approved Internal
Ed.
02
DI09
Date
7
DI12
20-08-2019
Drawn by
DI11
Prev. Page
12
DI14
8
Date
DI13
Next Page 14
22/01/2019 4:25:39
A3
DI16
Designation
9
DI15
9820650023
10
Sheet 13
(20)
F
B
D
A
E
C
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AI-OUT (V+)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
AI01
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
V+
V+
V+
V+
V+
B
F
OPTION OPTION OPTION
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:25:33 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
T09
T10
T11
B
F
OPTION OPTION
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by
Date
22/01/2019 4:25:27 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
OPTIONAL CONTACTS
REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP [I] OPTION ES100 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS

(Min 250VAC 4A AC15) (250VAC 6A AC15) (250VAC 10A AC11)
D
CONTROL CIRCUIT
GENERAL SHUTDOWN
COMPRESSOR RUNNING
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OPERATION
GENERAL WARNING
COMPRESSOR LOADED/UNLOADED
REGULATOR
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:25:21 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LEGEND
LOCATION TAGNAME SHEET DESCRIPTION FUNCTION A
CANOPY M1 02 MAIN MOTOR ALL VOLTAGES (50 AND 60HZ)

CONTROL PANEL S10 02 MAIN DISCONNECTING SWITCH OPTION
CONTROL PANEL F21 02 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY COMPRESSOR MOTOR
CUSTOMER S0 02 MAIN SWITCH CUSTOMER INSTALLATION
CUSTOMER F0' 02 MAIN PROTECTION CUSTOMER INSTALLATION
CANOPY M2 03 FAN MOTOR COMPR. COOLING 380..575V Y-CONN.
B
CONTROL PANEL F15 03 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY FAN MOTOR
CONTROL PANEL F12 03 FUSE FAN MOTOR PROTECTION
CONTROL PANEL X152 04 CONNECTOR
DRYER X240 04 CONNECTOR
DRYER PSR90 04 PRESSURE SWITCH FAN C
DRYER PSHH90 04 PRESSURE SWITCH

DRYER X210 04 CONNECTOR DRYER
DRYER X220 04 CONNECTOR DRYER
DRYER F22 04 OVERLOAD RELAY DRYER
DRYER F32 04 FUSE DRYER
D
DRYER T4 04 TRANSFORMER DRYER CIRCUIT
DRYER M4 04 REFRIGERANT FAN MOTOR
E
DRYER M3 04 REFRIGERANT FANMOTOR
DRYER K12 04 CONTACTOR FAN MOTOR
DRYER K11 04 CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR MOTOR
CONTROL PANEL F6 05 FUSE CONTROL CIRCUIT 24V INTEGRATED IN TRANSFORMER
CONTROL PANEL K25 05 PHASE SEQUENCE RELAY ROTATION SENSE PROTECTION F
CONTROL PANEL T1 05 TRANSFORMER CONTROL CIRCUIT

CONTROL PANEL F4 05 FUSE CONTROL CIRCUIT 115V
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:25:15 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LOCATION TAGNAME SHEET DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL F3 05 FUSE PSR PROTECTION A
CONTROL PANEL F2 05 FUSE TRANS. PROTECTION
CONTROL PANEL F1 05 FUSE TRANS. PROTECTION
CANOPY Y1 06 SOLENOID VALVE LOAD/UNLOAD
CANOPY Y2 06 SOLENOID VALVE MODULATING CONTROL
CANOPY B2 06 ELECTRONIC WATER DRAIN DRYER(FULL FEATURE ONLY)
CANOPY B1 06 ELECTRONIC WATER DRAIN COOLER
B
CONTROL PANEL M5 06 CUBICLE COOLING FAN
CONTROL PANEL X102b 06 CONNECTOR STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL TSHH11 06 TEMPERATURE SWITCH
CONTROL PANEL X136b 06 CONNECTOR
CONTROL PANEL X136a 06 CONNECTOR
CONTROL PANEL S3 06 EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON
CONTROL PANEL X106 06 CONNECTOR C
CONTROL PANEL K5 06 CONTACTOR OVERLOAD FANMOTOR
CONTROL PANEL X102a 06 CONNECTOR STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL X104a 06 CONNECTOR
CONTROL PANEL 2X30 06 CONNECTOR ELEKTRONIKON MK5S D
CONTROL PANEL K15 06 CONTACTOR FAN MOTOR

CONTROL PANEL K22 06 CONTACTOR STAR CONNECTION
CONTROL PANEL K21 06 CONTACTOR LINE CONNECTION
CONTROL PANEL K23 06 CONTACTOR DELTA CONNECTION
CONTROL PANEL K04' 06 AUXILIARY RELAY ES100
CANOPY Y51 07 SOLENOID VALVE WATER SHUT OFF E
CONTROL PANEL K34 07 THERMISTOR RELAY MOTOR TEMP. SHUTDOWN

CONTROL PANEL K35 07 THERMISTOR RELAY MOTOR TEMP. WARNING
MOTOR R96 07 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER 1 MAINMOTOR
MOTOR R1 07 THERMISTOR HEATER1 THERMISTOR SHUTDOWN
MOTOR R2 07 THERMISTOR HEATER2 THERMISTOR WARNING
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:25:10 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LOCATION TAGNAME SHEET DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL E1 08 REGULATOR ELEKTRONIKON Mk5 SWIPE A
CONTROL PANEL 2X24 08 CONNECTOR IO OUT
CONTROL PANEL E1 09 REGULATOR ELEKTRONIKON MK5S TOUCH
CONTROL PANEL 2X24 09 CONNECTOR IO OUT
CONTROL PANEL 3X23 10 CONNECTOR RJ11 - I/O IN
CONTROL PANEL E2 10 EXPANSION MODULE IO2
CANOPY PT20 11 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DELIVERY AIR
B
CANOPY TT01 11 TEMPERATURE SENSOR AMBIENT
CANOPY TT90 11 TEMPERATURE SENSOR LAT DRYER (FULL FEATURE)
CANOPY TT11 11 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ELEMENT OUTLET
CONTROL PANEL 2X27 11 CONNECTOR ELEKTRONIKON MK5S
CUSTOMER S1' 11 CONTACT REMOTE START/ PROG.STOP
CANOPY TT52 12 TEMPERATURE SENSOR COOLING WATER OUT C
CANOPY TT51 12 TEMPERATURE SENSOR COOLING WATER IN

CANOPY PDS12 12 PRESSURE DIFF. SWITCH PD FILTER
CANOPY PDS11 12 PRESSURE DIFF. SWITCH DD FILTER
CONTROL PANEL 2X28 12 CONNECTOR ELEKTRONIKON MK5S
CUSTOMER S6' 12 PRESSURE SET REMOTE (FOR CUSTOMER CONN.)
CUSTOMER S4' 12 CONTACT REMOTE LOAD/UNLOAD 123
D
CUSTOMER S' 12 REMOTE PRESSURE SENSING CUSTOMER CONN.
CONTROL PANEL 3X33 13 CONNECTOR EXPANSION MODULE IO2
CANOPY PDT03 14 PRESS. DIFF. TRANSDUCER DELTA P OIL SEPERATOR
CANOPY PDT02 14 PRESS. DIFF. TRANSDUCER DELTA P OIL FILTER
CANOPY PDT01 14 PRESS. DIFF. TRANSDUCER DELTA P AIR INLET
E
CANOPY TT54 15 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ENERGY RECOVERY WATER OUT
CANOPY TT53 15 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ENERGY RECOVERY WATER IN
CONTROL PANEL 2X31 16 CONNECTOR OUTPUTS REGULATOR
CUSTOMER S3' 16 REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON
F
G
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:25:03 9820650023
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTES : A
[A] Maximum fuses with regard to short circuit protection Pressure transducer pin configuration
of starter. cable section might impose fuses of 1 : Supply V+
smaller value. 2 : Ground
3: Signal
[B] Power supply to be connected for :
4 : Sealed with dummy
1. CLOCKwise rotation of fanmotor
2. COUNTER CLOCKwise rotation of comp. motor
Rotation to be observed while facing the drive end
shaft of the motors. Pressure difference transducer
B
1 : Supply V+
[C] Check rotation of fan motor (suction). 2 : Ground
[E] Tightening torque of bolts: 3 : Signal
For contactors
metric thread size M6 7Nm (5lbft)
For terminals Marking of connectors and terminals
metric thread size M6 3Nm (2lbft) Terminal #1 = Terminal with end plate C
metric thread size M8 6Nm (4lbft) 2
3
1
[F] For field wiring : use copper wire only,size AWG14
conductors with insulation 60-75°C
[G] F.P.E. field provided equipment 115V 17VA
end plate
[H] To connect correct transfo-voltage see on transfo 2X27, 2X28, 3X33, 3X34, 3X35
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
[I] Optional remote emergency stop :
Replace bridge by NC contacts of remote emergency stop D
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
[L] supply connection in function contactors size

Coding Key :
contactor size 1X0 X105-Therm
X105-Y51
S00 Terminal block X150 X104A-K15 X104-K04'
S0 Terminal block X151 X104A-Dryer X104-Y2
S2 Terminal block E
S3 Cu
X106
S6 Cu
S10 Supply with 6 cables on K21-K23
[M] Optional phase sequence relay replace by NO-contact of

PSR
45 1 49 45 15 12 2 5 2 1 13 2
[O] In case of full feature, bridge is replaced by drain fault
contact F
43 42
[P] In case of Thermistor option, bridge is replaced by NO
contact from K34.

Coding key
X105-Supply
X105
X104
X104-Supply
G
ACDE Name DIAGRAM SERVICE MAS GA55-90 (2012) STATUS Ed. Date Prev. Page 19 Next Page A3
Drawing owner
Drawn by Date
22/01/2019 4:24:56 9820650023
$WODV&RSFR+HDWOHVV$LU'U\HU
&'

7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ

7HFKQLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQ
7\SH +HDWOHVV$GVRUSWLRQ7\SH$LU'U\HU

2ULJLQDO&RXQWU\ $WODV&RSFR

0DNHUFHUWLILFDWH 0DQXIDFWXUH&HUWLILFDWH

2ULJLQDOFRXQWU\ %HOJLXP

4XDQWLW\ VHWV

3(5)250$1&('$7$

0D[HIIHFWLYHZRUNLQJSUHVVXUH EDU
1RUPDOHIIHFWLYHZRUNLQJSUHVVXUH EDU
3UHVVXUHGHZSRLQW &
&DSDFLW\ PϢK
3RZHUVXSSO\ 93K+]
3UHVVXUHGURSRYHUGU\HU EDU
7LPHWRKDOIDF\FOH K
5HJHQHUDWLQJWLPH VHF
3UHVVXULVDWLRQWLPH VHF
$YHUDJHSXUJHFRQVXPSWLRQ
3RZHUFRQVXPSWLRQ NZ
1RLVHOHYHO G%

'(6,*1'$7$81,7

'HVLFFDQWW\SH $FWLYDWHG$OXPLQD
'LPHQVLRQRIDLULQDQGRXWOHW ´
'LPHQVLRQV DSSUR[ /[:[+ PP hh
1HWPDVV DSSUR[ .J
,QOHWILOWHULQOHWRXWOHW 8'''S

6FRSHRIVXSSO\

*HQHUDO'HVFULSWLRQ
7KH &' DGVRUSWLRQ GU\HU LV D WZLQ WRZHU SXUJH KHDWOHVV DQG SXUJH FRROHG GHVLFFDQW
GU\HU ZKLFK UHPRYHV PRLVWHU IURP FRPSUHVVHG DLU E\ DGVRUSWLRQ 7KH &' GU\HU LV
FRPSOHWHO\ ZLUHG DQG HTXLSSHG ZLWK DOO LQWHUFRQQHFWLQJ SLSH ZRUN DQG ILWWLQJV $OO
HTXLSPHQW DV OLVWHG LV PRXQWHG RQ D VLQJOH FRPPRQ IUDPH FRPSOHWHO\ ZLUHG DQG
UHDG\WRRSHUDWH

&'DGVRUSWLRQGU\HUFRPSURPLVHV

$EDVHIUDPH
7ZRYHVVHOV
3HUYHVVHODEHGRIUHJHQHUDWLYHW\SHGHVLFFDQW
,QWHUFRQQHFWLQJSLSHV
3LORWDLUILOWHUWRJXDUDQWHHGXVWIUHHDLUWRWKHYDOYHDFWXDWRUV
$FRPSOHWHVHWRISQHXPDWLFDFWXDWHGEXWWHUIO\YDOYHVFKHFNYDOYHVDQG
DQJOHVHDWYDOYHVWRFRQWUROWKHFRPSUHVVHGDLUDQGUHJHQHUDWLRQIORZ
$QH[KDXVWDVVHPEO\ZLWKVLOHQFHUVWRUHGXFHWKHQRLVHGXULQJSUHVVXUH
UHOLHIDQGUHJHQHUDWLRQ
$VWDLQOHVVVWHHOIORZUHGXFLQJQR]]OHIRURSWLPDODQGVLOHQWUHJHQHUDWLRQ
DQGSUHVVXUHHTXDOL]DWLRQ
&RQWUROFDELQHW,3

,QOHWILOWHUDQGRXWOHWILOWHU /RRVHVXSSO\

Ь,QOHWILOWHU8'
+LJKHIILFLHQF\FRDOHVFLQJILOWHUVUHPRYLQJOLTXLGZDWHUDQGRLODHURVROWR
PJPϢ SSP DQGGXVWSDUWLFOHVGRZQWRPLFURQ

Ь2XWOHWILOWHU''S
3DUWLFXODWHILOWHUVIRUGXVWSURWHFWLRQUHPRYLQJGXVWSDUWLFOHVGRZQWRPLFURQ

6SDUHSDUWVIRURQH\HDURSHUDWLRQ
g 8'DLUILOWHUHOHPHQWSFV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

All materials supplied are in compliance with the X Model PDP Mass In-Out A B C D E F G H J K L X Y ØZ
Z
CD 25 + -20 °C 95 kg G1/2" - G1/2" 394 766,5 1205 110 880 115 895 176 313 576 1355 560 360 9
POWER SUPPLY CD 35 + -20 °C 100 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1205 110 880 115 895 176 313 576 1355 560 360 9
A
A- A ( 1 : 15 ) CD 50 + -20 °C 110 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1205 110 880 115 1065 164 311 612 1572 560 360 9
CD 65 + -20 °C 128 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1495 110 880 115 1245 161 312 732 1807 560 360 9
Y
CD 80 + -20 °C 141 kg G1" - G1" 394 816,5 1495 110 880 115 1395 159 313 767 2252 560 360 9
128
CD 105 + -20 °C 165 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 394 816,5 1835 261 880 115 1695 159 311 918 2702 560 360 9
100
CD 125 + -20 °C 218 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1495 431 880 115 1245 245 312 719 1922 560 530 9
CD 150 + -20 °C 234 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1495 431 880 115 1395 241 315 768 2252 560 530 9 B
37.5
CD 195 + -20 °C 277 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1835 431 880 285 1695 255 317 913 2702 560 530 9
620 A CD 225 + -20 °C 331 kg G2" - G2" 734 855,5 1495 601 880 285 1395 324 318 755 2252 560 700 9
CD 300 + -20 °C 394 kg G2" - G2" 734 855,5 1835 601 1210 310 1695 339 318 891 2702 560 700 9
CD 20 + -40 °C 95 kg G1/2" - G1/2" 394 766,5 1205 110 880 115 895 176 313 576 1355 560 360 9
CD 30 + -40 °C 100 kg G1/2" - G1/2" 394 766,5 1205 110 880 115 895 176 313 576 1355 560 360 9
CD 40 + -40 °C 110 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1205 110 880 115 1065 164 311 612 1572 560 360 9 C
L (for dismantling)
CD 55 + -40 °C 128 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1495 110 880 115 1245 161 312 732 1807 560 360 9
CD 65 + -40 °C 140 kg G1" - G1" 394 786,5 1495 110 880 115 1395 159 313 767 2252 560 360 9
CG
CD 85 + -40 °C 165 kg G1" - G1" 394 816,5 1835 110 880 115 1695 159 311 918 2702 560 360 9
C
CD 105 +
G
-40 °C 215 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1495 431 880 115 1245 245 312 719 1922 560 530 9
CD 125 + -40 °C 234 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1495 431 880 115 1395 241 315 768 2252 560 530 9
D
E
CD 170 + -40 °C 276 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 564 816,5 1835 431 880 115 1695 255 317 913 2702 560 530 9
K
A CD 190 + -40 °C 331 kg G1 1/2" - G1 1/2" 734 816,5 1495 601 880 285 1395 324 318 755 2252 560 700 9
CD 250 + -40 °C 389 kg G2" - G2" 734 855,5 1835 601 880 285 1695 339 318 891 2702 560 700 9
110
CD 335 + -40 °C 500 kg G2" - G2" 929 855,5 1835 796 1210 310 1695 424 317 909 2702 560 895 9
A
4 4 4
J H
B
F
D
F
NOTE:
- All dimensions in millimeters, unless otherwise stated

Tolerances, if not indicated, according to:
ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLASS
Name DIMENS. DRWG CD 20-335+ Confidentiality

acc. to 1102 K
Class
Material See Drawing Public
Treatment Not Applicable INV G

CONFIDENTIAL:
Scale 1 : 15 Family A2 Compare Drawing owner
Drawn by AIR41892 Blank nr. Replaces API

4 Updates for CD105 (-20/-40 PDP) and for col. 9829529800-M1 2.0 Version Drwg Designation Sheet 1 / 1
28/10/2020 User Agent STATUS Blank wt. Kg Fini wt. 332,934 kg
F
Ed
Posi-
tion Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D Released
14/09/2020 9829529800-01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
A
4
4
4 C
MAIN POWER SUPPLY [B]

VOLTAGE : 115 V requirements of the List of Prohibited Substances
F
FREQ : 60 Hz 1 PH
Tolerances,if not indicated,according to:
MAIN POWER SUPPLY [B] Confidentiality Class

Name Service diagram Prima control acc. to 1102K
VOLTAGE : 230 V
CONFIDENTIAL:
Material Confidential
Treatment Not Applicable ACD

FREQ : 50/60 Hz 1 PH
Scale 1:1 Family A3 Compare Drawing owner
Drawn by INEAPY Blank nr. Replaces API G

PY
Version Drwg Designation Sheet ( ) 01 01

4 1/30/2018
EA
0 Kg Kg
STATUS 04 Blank wt. Fini wt.
IN
Note
Posi-
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D Model Ed.Version 3D RELEASED
1/24/2018 9827294000-01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

For DD+, PD+, UD+ and QD+

A
For: DDp+, PDp+
E
ØD
62
GAUGE
1. POP UP INDICATOR
2. GAUGE
3. AUTO DRAIN
78
4. MANUAL DRAIN B
5. HEXAGONAL SOCKET SCREW M4x4
6. HEXAGONAL SOCKET SCREW M6x8
C
G (2x)
F (4x)
A = FOR DISASSEMBLING
G or NPT Thread
35,5 36,5 E
30
54,7
36,9
41,7
AUTO DRAIN
44
F
MANUAL DRAIN POP UP INDICATOR
8
4
All Dimensions are in Metric System

M4 Tolerances, if not indicated, according to:
ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLASS

M6
Name DIMENS. DRWG DIMENS. DRWG (NO Confidentiality
acc. to 1102 K
Class
HEXAGONAL SOCKET SET SCREWS Material See Drawing BYPASS) Confidential

Treatment See Drawing INV G
CONFIDENTIAL:
Designation Recommended Torque Scale 1:2 Family A2 Compare Drawing owner
Drawn by INENR Blank nr. Replaces API

Pressure Gauge + Indicator 3,5 Nm
1 1629319230-M1 Version Drwg Designation Sheet 1 / 2
28/05/2021 User Agent Blank wt. Kg Fini wt. NA
Automatic Drain 3 Nm STATUS
Ed
Posi-
tion Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Manual Drain 3 Nm Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D Released
13/05/2020 9827928800-01
Instruction book
Oil-injected screw compressors
Atlas Copco
Oil-injected screw compressors
Instruction book
Original instructions
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Any unauthorized use or copying of the contents or any part thereof is prohibited.
This applies in particular to trademarks, model denominations, part numbers and
drawings.
This instruction book is valid for CE as well as non-CE labelled machines. It meets the
requirements for instructions specified by the applicable European directives as
identified in the Declaration of Conformity.
December 2021
www.atlascopco.com
Instruction book
Table of contents
1 Safety precautions..........................................................................................................5
1.1 Safety icons................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 General safety precautions.................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Safety precautions during installation................................................................................ 6
1.4 Safety precautions during operation.................................................................................... 7
1.5 Safety precautions during maintenance or repair.............................................................. 9
2 General description...................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Air flow..................................................................................................................................... 16
2.3 Oil system..................................................................................................................................17
2.4 Cooling system.........................................................................................................................18
2.5 Condensate system..................................................................................................................19
2.6 Regulating system................................................................................................................... 23
2.7 Electrical system.................................................................................................................... 24
2.8 Air dryer....................................................................................................................................24
3 Installation.....................................................................................................................27
3.1 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 27
3.2 Installation proposal............................................................................................................. 29
3.3 Electrical connections.......................................................................................................... 31
3.4 Cooling water requirements................................................................................................. 34
3.5 Pictographs.............................................................................................................................. 38
2
Instruction book
4 Operating instructions................................................................................................. 40
4.1 Initial start-up..........................................................................................................................40
4.2 Before starting........................................................................................................................43
4.3 Starting ....................................................................................................................................45
4.4 During operation..................................................................................................................... 47
4.5 Checking the display............................................................................................................... 48
4.6 Stopping ....................................................................................................................................49
4.7 Taking out of operation..........................................................................................................50
5 Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 52
5.1 Preventive maintenance schedule.........................................................................................52
5.2 Oil specifications..................................................................................................................... 55
5.3 Storage after installation.................................................................................................... 56
5.4 Service kits............................................................................................................................... 56
5.5 Disposal of used material...................................................................................................... 56
6 Adjustments and servicing procedures..................................................................... 57
6.1 Drive motor ..............................................................................................................................57
6.2 Air filter....................................................................................................................................57
6.3 Oil and oil filter change.........................................................................................................58
6.4 Coolers..................................................................................................................................... 60
6.5 Safety valves............................................................................................................................60
6.6 Dryer maintenance instructions...........................................................................................61
3
Instruction book
7 Problem solving............................................................................................................62
8 Technical data............................................................................................................... 66
8.1 Readings on display................................................................................................................. 66
8.2 Electric cable size and fuses................................................................................................ 67
8.3 Dryer switches.........................................................................................................................70
8.4 Reference conditions and limitations.................................................................................. 70
8.5 Compressor data..................................................................................................................... 70
9 Air receiver instructions.............................................................................................. 72
10 Guidelines for inspection.............................................................................................73
4
Instruction book
1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety icons

Explanation
Danger to life
Warning
Important note
1.2 General safety precautions

1. The operator must employ safe working practices and observe all related work safety
requirements and regulations.
2. If any of the following statements does not comply with the applicable legislation, the stricter of
the two shall apply.
3. Installation, operation, maintenance and repair work must only be performed by authorized,
trained, specialized personnel. The personnel should apply safe working practices by use of
personal protection equipment, appropriate tools and defined procedures.
4. The compressor is not considered capable of producing air of breathing quality. For air of
breathing quality, the compressed air must be adequately purified according to the applicable
legislation and standards.
5. Before any maintenance, repair work, adjustment or any other non-routine checks:
• Stop the machine
• Press the emergency stop button
• Switch off the voltage
• Depressurize the machine
• Lock Out - Tag Out (LOTO):
• Open the power isolating switch and lock it with a personal lock
• Tag the power isolating switch with the name of the service technician.
• On units powered by a frequency converter, wait 10 minutes before starting any electrical
repair.
• Never rely on indicator lamps or electrical door locks before maintenance work, always
disconnect and check with measuring device.
If the machine is equipped with an automatic restart after voltage failure

function and if this function is active, be aware that the machine will restart
automatically when the power is restored if it was running when the power
was interrupted!
5
Instruction book
6. Never play with compressed air. Do not apply the air to your skin or direct an air stream at
people. Never use the air to clean dirt from your clothes. When using the air to clean
equipment, do so with extreme caution and wear eye protection.
7. The owner is responsible for maintaining the unit in safe operating condition. Parts and
accessories shall be replaced if unsuitable for safe operation.
8. It is prohibited to walk or stand on the unit or on its components.
9. If compressed air is used in the food industry and more specifically for direct food contact, it is
recommended, for optimal safety, to use certified Class 0 compressors in combination with
appropriate filtration depending on the application. Please contact your customer center for
advice on specific filtration.
10. The service switch should only be operated by a trained service specialist from the
manufacturer.
1.3 Safety precautions during installation
All responsibility for any damage or injury resulting from neglecting these
precautions, or non-observance of the normal caution and care required for
installation, operation, maintenance and repair, even if not expressly stated, will
be disclaimed by the manufacturer.
Precautions during installation

1. The machine must only be lifted using suitable equipment in accordance with the applicable
safety regulations. Loose or pivoting parts must be securely fastened before lifting. It is strictly
forbidden to dwell or stay in the risk zone under a lifted load. Lifting acceleration and
deceleration must be kept within safe limits. Wear a safety helmet when working in the area of
overhead or lifting equipment.
2. The unit is designed for indoor use. If the unit is installed outdoors, special precautions must be
taken. Consult your supplier.
3. In case the device is a compressor, place the machine where the ambient air is as cool and
clean as possible. If necessary, install a suction duct. Never obstruct the air inlet. Care must be
taken to minimize the entry of moisture at the inlet air.
4. Any blanking flanges, plugs, caps and desiccant bags must be removed before connecting the
pipes.
5. Air hoses must be of correct size and suitable for the working pressure. Never use frayed,
damaged or worn hoses. Distribution pipes and connections must be of the correct size and
suitable for the working pressure.
6. In case the device is a compressor, the aspirated air must be free of flammable fumes, vapors
and particles, e.g. paint solvents, that can lead to internal fire or explosion.
7. In case the device is a compressor, arrange the air intake so that loose clothing worn by people
cannot be drawn in.
8. Ensure that the discharge pipe from the compressor to the aftercooler or air net is free to
expand under heat and that it is not in contact with or close to flammable materials.
9. No external force may be exerted on the air outlet valve; the connected pipe must be free of
strain.
10. If remote control is installed, the machine must bear a clear sign stating: DANGER: This
machine is remotely controlled and may start without warning.
6
Instruction book
The operator has to make sure that the machine is stopped and depressurized and that the
electrical isolating switch is open, locked and labelled with a temporary warning before any
maintenance or repair. As a further safeguard, persons switching on or off remotely controlled
machines shall take adequate precautions to ensure that there is no one checking or working
on the machine. To this end, a suitable notice shall be affixed to the start equipment.
11. Air-cooled machines must be installed in such a way that an adequate flow of cooling air is
available and that the exhausted air does not recirculate to the compressor air inlet or cooling
air inlet.
12. The electrical connections must correspond to the applicable codes. The machines must be
earthed and protected against short circuits by fuses in all phases. A lockable power isolating
switch must be installed near the compressor.
13. On machines with automatic start/stop system or if the automatic restart function after voltage
failure is activated, a sign stating "This machine may start without warning" must be affixed
near the instrument panel.
14. In multiple compressor systems, manual valves must be installed to isolate each compressor.
Non-return valves (check valves) must not be relied upon for isolating pressure systems.
15. Never remove or tamper with the safety devices, guards or insulation fitted on the machine.
Every pressure vessel or auxiliary installed outside the machine to contain air above
atmospheric pressure must be protected by a pressure relieving device or devices as required.
16. Piping or other parts with a temperature in excess of 70˚C (158˚F) and which may be
accidentally touched by personnel in normal operation must be guarded or insulated. Other
high temperature piping must be clearly marked.
17. For water-cooled machines, the cooling water system installed outside the machine has to be
protected by a safety device with set pressure according to the maximum cooling water inlet
pressure.
18. If the ground is not level or can be subject to variable inclination, consult the manufacturer.
19. If the device is a dryer and no free extinguishing system is present in the air net close to the
dryer, safety valves must be installed in the vessels of the dryer.
Also consult the following safety precautions: Safety precautions during

operation and Safety precautions during maintenance.
These precautions apply to machinery processing or consuming air or inert gas.
Processing of any other gas requires additional safety precautions typical to the
application which are not included herein.
Some precautions are general and cover several machine types and equipment;
hence some statements may not apply to your machine.
1.4 Safety precautions during operation
precautions, or non observance of the normal caution and care required for
Precautions during operation

1. Never touch any piping or components of the machine during operation.
7
Instruction book
2. Use only the correct type and size of hose end fittings and connections. When blowing through
a hose or air line, ensure that the open end is held securely. A free end will whip and may
cause injury. Make sure that a hose is fully depressurized before disconnecting it.
3. Persons switching on remotely controlled machines shall take adequate precautions to ensure
that there is no one checking or working on the machine. To this end, a suitable notice shall be
affixed to the remote start equipment.
4. Never operate the machine when there is a possibility of taking in flammable or toxic fumes,
vapors or particles.
5. Never operate the machine below or in excess of its limit ratings.
6. Keep all bodywork doors shut during operation. The doors may be opened for short periods
only, e.g. to carry out routine checks. Wear ear protectors when opening a door.
On machines without bodywork, wear ear protection in the vicinity of the machine.
7. People staying in environments or rooms where the sound pressure level reaches or exceeds
80 dB(A) shall wear ear protectors.
8. Periodically check that:
• All guards are in place and securely fastened
• All hoses and/or pipes inside the machine are in good condition, secure and not rubbing
• No leaks occur
• All fasteners are tight
• All electrical leads are secure and in good order
• Safety valves and other pressure relief devices are not obstructed by dirt or paint
• Air outlet valve and air net, i.e. pipes, couplings, manifolds, valves, hoses, etc. are in
good repair, free of wear or abuse
• Air cooling filters of the electrical cabinet are not clogged
9. If warm cooling air from compressors is used in air heating systems, e.g. to warm up a
workroom, take precautions against air pollution and possible contamination of the breathing
air.
10. On water-cooled compressors using open circuit cooling towers, protective measures must be
taken to avoid the growth of harmful bacteria such as Legionella pneumophila bacteria.
11. Do not remove any of, or tamper with, the sound-damping material.
12. Never remove or tamper with the safety devices, guards or insulations fitted on the machine.
atmospheric pressure shall be protected by a pressure relieving device or devices as required.
13. Yearly inspect the air receiver. Minimum wall thickness as specified in the instruction book must
be respected. Local regulations remain applicable if they are more strict.
Also consult following safety precautions: Safety precautions during installation

and Safety precautions during maintenance.
8
Instruction book
1.5 Safety precautions during maintenance or repair
precautions, or non observance of the normal caution and care required for
Precautions during maintenance or repair

1. Always use the correct safety equipment (such as safety glasses, gloves, safety shoes, etc.).
2. Use only the correct tools for maintenance and repair work.
3. Use only genuine spare parts for maintenance or repair. The manufacturer will disclaim all
damage or injuries caused by the use of non-genuine spare parts.
4. All maintenance work shall only be undertaken when the machine has cooled down.
5. A warning sign bearing a legend such as "Work in progress; do not start" shall be attached to
the starting equipment.
6. Persons switching on remotely controlled machines shall take adequate precautions to ensure
that there is no one checking or working on the machine. To this end, a suitable notice shall be
affixed to the remote start equipment.
7. Close the compressor air outlet valve and depressurize the compressor before connecting or
disconnecting a pipe.
8. Before removing any pressurized component, effectively isolate the machine from all sources of
pressure and relieve the entire system of pressure.
9. Never use flammable solvents or carbon tetrachloride for cleaning parts. Take safety
precautions against toxic vapors of cleaning liquids.
10. Scrupulously observe cleanliness during maintenance and repair. Keep dirt away by covering
the parts and exposed openings with a clean cloth, paper or tape.
11. Never weld or perform any operation involving heat near the oil system. Oil tanks must be
completely purged, e.g. by steam cleaning, before carrying out such operations. Never weld on,
or in any way modify, pressure vessels.
12. Whenever there is an indication or any suspicion that an internal part of a machine is
overheated, the machine shall be stopped but no inspection covers shall be opened before
sufficient cooling time has elapsed; this to avoid the risk of spontaneous ignition of the oil vapor
when air is admitted.
13. Never use a light source with open flame for inspecting the interior of a machine, pressure
vessel, etc.
14. Make sure that no tools, loose parts or rags are left in or on the machine.
15. All regulating and safety devices shall be maintained with due care to ensure that they function
properly. They may not be put out of action.
16. Before clearing the machine for use after maintenance or overhaul, check that operating
pressures, temperatures and time settings are correct. Check that all control and shut-down
devices are fitted and that they function correctly. If removed, check that the coupling guard of
the compressor drive shaft has been reinstalled.
17. Every time the separator element is renewed, examine the discharge pipe and the inside of the
oil separator vessel for carbon deposits; if excessive, the deposits should be removed.
18. Protect the motor, air filter, electrical and regulating components, etc. to prevent moisture from
entering them, e.g. when steam cleaning.
9
Instruction book
19. Make sure that all sound-damping material and vibration dampers, e.g. damping material on the
bodywork and in the air inlet and outlet systems of the compressor, is in good condition. If
damaged, replace it by genuine material from the manufacturer to prevent the sound pressure
level from increasing.
20. Never use caustic solvents which can damage materials of the air net, e.g. polycarbonate
bowls.
21. Only if applicable, the following safety precautions are stressed when handling
refrigerant:
• Never inhale refrigerant vapors. Check that the working area is adequately ventilated; if
required, use breathing protection.
• Always wear special gloves. In case of refrigerant contact with the skin, rinse the skin with
water. If liquid refrigerant contacts the skin through clothing, never tear off or remove the
latter; flush abundantly with fresh water over the clothing until all refrigerant is flushed
away; then seek medical first aid.
Also consult following safety precautions: Safety precautions during installation

and Safety precautions during operation.
10
Instruction book
2 General description
2.1 Introduction
Product description
Marine Air System GA 55 up to GA 90 are single-stage, oil-injected screw compressors driven by
an electric motor. The compressors are available in air-cooled and water-cooled version and are
enclosed in sound-insulated bodywork.
A condensate trap with automatic drain system is provided.
The compressors can be delivered without integrated dryer (Pack version) or with integrated dryer
(Full Feature version).
The compressors are available in 2 variants: the Marine Air System and the Marine Air System
Plus. A Marine Air System Plus unit has following extra’s compared to the Marine Air System unit:
• Main switch (S10)
• A-meter (P3)
• Thermistors and anti-condensation heaters in main drive motor with an indication light and
On/Off switch (H96/S96)
• Marine approved motor
• Flame retardant/halogen free wiring
• ES100 relay (potential free contacts)
Pack compressors
Pack compressors have no integrated dryer.
11
Instruction book
Figure 1: Marine Air System Plus, front view
Reference Name
AV Air outlet valve
Da Condensate outlets
ER Elektronikon Graphic controller
S3 Emergency stop button
S10 Main switch (Marine Air System Plus only)
S96/H96 Anti-condensation heater switch/light (Marine Air System Plus only)
P3 A-meter (Marine Air System Plus only)
12
Instruction book
Figure 2: Rear view, Marine Air System GA 55 up to GA 90
Reference Name
AV Air outlet valve
Ca Air cooler
Co Oil cooler
CV/Vs Check valve/oil stop valve
FN Cooling fan (air cooled compressors)
Da/Dm Condensate outlets
E Compressor element
M1 Motor
UA Unloader
Compressors with integrated dryer

Full Feature compressors are provided with an air dryer, integrated in the sound-insulated
bodywork. The dryer removes water from the compressed air by cooling the air to near freezing
point.
13
Instruction book
Figure 3: Marine Air System GA 55 FF, front view
Reference Name
1 Electric cubicle
AF Air filter
AR Air receiver (oil separator vessel)
AV Air outlet valve
Da Automatic condensate outlet
Dm Manual condensate outlet
DR Dryer
ER Elektronikon Graphic controller
S3 Emergency stop button
S96/H96 Anti-condenation heater switch/light (Marine Air System Plus only)
OF Oil filter housing
14
Instruction book
Figure 4: Rear view, Marine Air System GA 55 FF up to GA 90 FF
Reference Name
AV Air outlet valve
E Compressor element
CV/Vs Check valve/oil stop valve
FN Cooling fan
M1 Compressor drive motor
Da/Dm Condensate outlets
Co Oil cooler
Ca Air cooler
UA Unloader
15
Instruction book
2.2 Air flow

Flow diagrams
Figure 5: Flow diagram, GA Full-Feature
Reference Description
A Intake air
B Air/oil mixture
C Oil
D Wet compressed air
E Condensate
F Dried compressed air
Note: The cooling fan is not provided on water-cooled compressors.
Description
Air drawn through filter (AF) and open inlet valve (IV) of unloader is compressed in compressor
element (E). A mixture of compressed air and oil flows into the air receiver/oil separator (AR) via
16
Instruction book
check valve (CV). The air is discharged through outlet valve (AV) via minimum pressure valve (Vp)
and air cooler (Ca).
The air cooler is provided with a moisture trap (MT).
On Full-Feature compressors, the air flows through air dryer (DR) before it is discharged through
outlet valve (AV). Also see section Air dryer.
During loaded operation, minimum pressure valve (Vp) keeps the pressure in the separator tank
(AR) above a minimum value, required for lubrication. An integrated check valve prevents the
compressed air downstream the valve from being vented to atmosphere during unloaded operation.
When the compressor is stopped, check valve (CV) and inlet valve (IV) close, preventing
compressed air (and oil) to be vented into the air filter.
2.3 Oil system

Flow diagram
Figure 6: Oil system
References Description
1 Compressed air flow to the air dryer (compressors with integrated dryer)
A Intake air
B Air/oil mixture
C Oil
Note: The cooling fan is not provided on water cooled compressors.
17
Instruction book
Description
In air receiver/oil separator (AR), most of the oil is removed from the air/oil mixture by centrifugal
action. The remaining oil is removed by oil separator (OS). The oil collects in the lower part of air
receiver/oil separator (AR), which serves as an oil tank.
The oil system is provided with a thermostatic bypass valve (BV). When the oil temperature is
below its set point, bypass valve (BV) shuts off the supply to oil cooler (Co) and the oil cooler is
bypassed.
Air pressure forces the oil from air receiver/oil separator (AR) through oil filter (OF) and oil stop
valve (Vs) to compressor element (E).
Bypass valve (BV) starts opening the supply from cooler (Co) when the oil temperature has
increased to the set point. At approx. 15 ˚C (27 ˚F) above the set point, all the oil flows through the
oil cooler.
Oil stop valve (Vs) prevents the compressor element from flooding with oil when the compressor is
stopped. The valve is opened by element outlet pressure when the compressor is started.
2.4 Cooling system

Flow diagram
Figure 7: Cooling system, water-cooled compressors
References Description
A Intake air
B Air/oil mixture
C Oil
F Water flow
18
Instruction book
Description
The cooling system on water-cooled compressors comprises air cooler (Cwa) and oil cooler (Cwo).
They are connected to a cooling water circuit. The water flows through the inlet pipe, the coolers
and the outlet pipe.
Figure 8: Water-cooled air cooler and oil cooler
2.5 Condensate system

Water drains
Figure 9: Condensate drains, typical example
Reference Designation
Da Automatic drain connection
Dm Manual drain
Da1 Automatic drain connection of the dryer (only on Full-Feature units)
Dm1 Manual drain connection of the dryer (only on Full-Feature units)
Beside each automatic drain outlet is a manual (Dm) condensate drain connection for manually
draining of the condensate.
19
Instruction book
Figure 10: Electronic condensate drains, typical example
The compressors have an electronic water drain (EWD). The condensate from the air cooler
accumulates in a collector. When the condensate reaches a certain level, it is discharged through
the automatic drain outlet (Da).
Also see section Air flow.
Testing the electronic water drain can be done by briefly pressing the test button (1) on top of the
drain.
Electronic drains
On some models, another model of electronic drains is used.
Operation
The condensate accumulates in the collector of the drain. When the condensate reaches a certain
level, it is discharged through the automatic drain outlet (Da).
The Test button on top of the drain can be used in three different ways, according the situation:
• When pressed during normal operation, it starts the manual drain test.
• When pressed during an alarm, it resets the control logic
• By pressing the Test button for at least 5 seconds, the self diagnosis routine will start.
20
Instruction book
Figure 11: Electronic condensate drains
Green LED on
Normal operation, drain is in standby and awaiting condensate.
Green LED blinking
Normal operation, drain valve is open to drain water.
Green LED fading on/off
Water is not flowing in to the drain‘s tank. If the floater does not reach the upper level
for 3 hours, the solenoid is energized for 2 seconds. This cycle is repeated for 5 times
(so up to 15 hours). Afterwards, the green light starts fading on/off.
Causes:
• No condensate entering the tank.
• Float mounted incorrectly (upside down).
Checks:
• Is any condensate reaching the drain? Does the water separation take place in
the heat exchanger?
• Is the floater mounted in its correct position, for instance after maintenance?
Solution:
• Although this LED sign does not indicate any kind of failure, the drain can be
reset by pushing the test button (T) for 5 seconds.
21
Instruction book
Red LED blinking slowly: cleaning routine 1

The drain’s tank is filled and the water cannot be drained or can only be drained very
slowly.
In normal operation, the drain gets 20 seconds time to drain all water. If the drain is
not emptied within this time frame, a (first) cleaning routine is activated, alternatively
opening and closing the valve for 2 seconds, during maximum 30 cycles. This routine
is started in an attempt to unblock the drain.
If this first unlock routine is unsuccessful, a second routine will be started.
Causes:
• Filter mesh clogged.
• Not enough pressure on drain.
• Internal problem with the drain.
Checks:
• Is the filter clean and in good condition?
• Is there a minimum pressure of 0.2 bar (2.8 psi) in the drain?
Press the test button (T) for at least 5 seconds to reset the drain.
Red LED blinking fast
If cleaning routine 1 is completed (after 30 cycles) but still unsuccessful, cleaning
routine 2 is activated. This routine will open (3 sec) and close (60 sec) the drain’s
valve until a floater is in lower position, so the water is completely drained.
Meanwhile, the external alarm signal is activated.
Causes:
• Filter mesh clogged.
• Not enough pressure on drain.
• Internal problem with the drain.
Checks:
• Is the filter clean and in good condition?
• Is there a minimum pressure of 0.2 bar (2.8 psi) in the drain?
From this point onwards, the drain will remain in this routine, even after restart. Press
the test button (T) for at least 5 seconds to reset the drain.
Red LED on
An irreversible error occurred. Replace the drain and keep the failed one for further
analysis.
Table 1: LED explanation
22
Instruction book
2.6 Regulating system

Flow diagram
Figure 12: Regulating system (loaded condition)
Loading
When the net pressure is below the loading pressure, solenoid valve (Y1) is energised. Results:
• The space above unloading valve/blow-off valve (UV) is connected with the oil separator tank
pressure (1) via the solenoid valve.
• Unloading valve/blow-off valve (UV) moves downwards, closing off the connection to channels
(2) and (3).
• Underpressure from the compressor element causes loading plunger (LP) to move downwards
and inlet valve (IV) to open fully.
Air delivery is 100%, the compressor runs loaded.
Unloading
If the air consumption is less than the air output of the compressor, the net pressure increases.
When the net pressure reaches the unloading pressure, solenoid valve (Y1) is de-energised.
Results:
• The pressure above unloading valve/blow-off valve (UV) is released to atmosphere and the
space above valve (UV) is no longer in connection with the oil separator tank pressure (1).
• Unloading valve/blow-off valve (UV) moves upwards, connecting the oil separator tank pressure
(1) with channels (2) and (3).
• The pressure in channel (2) causes the loading plunger (LP) to move upwards, causing inlet
valve (IV) to close, while the pressure is gradually released to atmosphere.
• The pressure in the separator tank stabilises at low value. A small amount of air is kept drawn
in to guarantee a minimal pressure, required for lubrication during unloaded operation.
Air output is stopped, the compressor runs unloaded.
23
Instruction book
2.7 Electrical system

Electrical components
The electrical system comprises following components:
Figure 13: Typical example of electric cubicle
F1/2/3 Fuses
F7/F8/F9 Fuses (only on Full-Feature)
F21 Overload relay, compressor motor
K5 Auxiliary relay
K11 Auxiliary contactor
K12 Auxiliary contactor
K21 Line contactor
K22 Star contactor
K23 Delta contactor
T1 Transformer
PE Earth terminal
S10 Main switch (Marine Air System Plus only)
Electrical diagrams
The complete electrical diagram can be found in the electric cubicle.
2.8 Air dryer

(On compressors with integrated dryer only)
24
Instruction book
Flow diagram
Figure 14: Air dryer
Reference Name
AI Air inlet
AO Air outlet
1 Air/air heat exchanger
2 Air/refrigerant heat exchanger/evaporator
3 Condensate separator
4 Automatic drain / condensate outlet
5 Refrigerant compressor
6 Refrigerant condenser
7 Liquid refrigerant dryer/filter
8 Capillary
9 Bypass valve
10 Condenser cooling fan
11 Pressure switch, fan control
12 Liquid separator
Compressed air circuit

Compressed air enters heat exchanger (1) and is cooled by the outgoing, cold, dried air. Water in
the incoming air starts to condense. The air then flows through heat exchanger/evaporator (2),
where the refrigerant evaporates, causing the air to be cooled further to close to the evaporating
temperature of the refrigerant. More water in the air condenses. The cold air then flows through
separator (3) where all the condensate is separated from the air. The condensate is automatically
drained through condensate drain (4).
The cold, dried air flows through heat exchanger (1) where it is warmed up by the incoming air.
25
Instruction book
Refrigerant circuit
Compressor (5) delivers hot, high-pressure refrigerant gas which flows through condenser (6)
where most of the refrigerant condenses.
The liquid refrigerant flows through liquid refrigerant dryer/filter (7) to capillary tube (8). The
refrigerant leaves the capillary tube at about evaporating pressure.
The refrigerant enters evaporator (2) where it withdraws heat from the compressed air by further
evaporation at about constant pressure. The heated refrigerant leaves the evaporator and is sucked
in by the compressor (5) through a liquid separator (12).
Bypass valve (9) regulates the refrigerant flow. Fan (10) is switched on or off by switch (11)
depending on the pressure degree of the condensate.
26
Instruction book
3 Installation
3.1 Dimension drawings
Figure 15: Dimensions MAS GA 55 up to MAS GA 90
27
Instruction book
28
Instruction book
3.2 Installation proposal

Compressor room example
Figure 16: Compressor room example
(1) Air cooling

(2) Water cooling
(3) The direction of the cooling flows may never be inverted
Description
1 Install the compressor unit on a solid, level floor suitable for taking the weight.
2 Position of the compressed air outlet valve.
29
Instruction book
The pressure drop over the air delivery pipe can be calculated as follows:
Δp = (L x 450 x Qc1.85) / (d5 x P), with
d = Inner diameter of the pipe in mm
Δp = Pressure drop (recommended maximum: 0.1 bar (1.5 psi)
3 L = Length of the pipe in m
P = Absolute pressure at the compressor outlet in bar(a)
Qc = Free air delivery of the compressor in l/s
It is recommended that the connection of the compressor air outlet pipe is made on top
of the main air net pipe in order to minimise carry-over of possible condensate residue.
Ventilation: the inlet grids and ventilation fan should be installed in such a way that any
recirculation of cooling air to the compressor or dryer is avoided. The maximum air
velocity through the grids is 5 m/s (16.5 ft/s).
The maximum air temperature at the compressor intake is 46 ˚C (115 ˚F) (minimum 0
˚C / 32 ˚F).
Qv = Required ventilation capacity in m3/s
N = Shaft input of compressor in kW
4
D = Electric power input of dryer in kW
ΔT = Temperature increase in compressor room in °C
For water-cooled compressors, the ventilation capacity required to limit the
compressor room temperature can be calculated from:
• Qv = (0.13 N + 1.2 D)/ΔT
The maximum allowed pressure drop in ducting before or after the compressor is 30 Pa
The drain pipes to the drain collector must not dip into the water of the drain collector.
Atlas Copco has oil/water separators (type OSD or OSCi) to separate the major part of
5
the oil from the condensate to ensure that the condensate meets the requirements of the
environmental codes.
6 Control module with monitoring panel.
7 Power supply cable to be sized and installed by a qualified electrician.
To preserve the protection degree of the electric cubicle and to protect its components
from dust from the environment, it is mandatory to use a proper cable gland when
connecting the supply cable to the compressor.
8 Provision for energy recovery system.
Filter, type DD for general purposes. The filter traps solid particles down to 1 micron with
a max. oil carry-over of 0.5 mg/m3. A high-efficiency filter, type PD, may be installed
downstream of a DD filter. This filter traps solid particles down to 0.01 micron with a
max. oil carry-over of 0.01 mg/m3. If oil vapours and odours are undesirable, a QD type
9
filter should be installed downstream of the PD filter.
It is recommended to install by-pass pipes over each filter together with ball valves, in
order to isolate the filters during service operations without disturbing the compressed
air delivery.
Install the air receiver (optional) in a frost free room, on a solid level floor suitable for
10
taking the weight.
By-pass system to by-pass the dryer during service operations (available as an option,
11
consult Atlas Copco).
30
Instruction book
On water-cooled compressors:
Water flow and pressure to be adjusted depending upon local conditions.
For cooling water quality see section Cooling water requirements
A water shut-off valve and water drain valve should be installed by the customer in the
compressor water inlet pipe and outlet pipe. If water shut-off valves at the compressor
water inlet and outlet pipe are installed, a safety device with set pressure according to
12b
the maximum cooling water inlet pressure (see section Reference conditions and
limitations) has to be installed between the compressor water outlet pipe and shut-off
valve. When operating the unit, the operator must ensure that the cooling water system
cannot be blocked. The above-mentioned applies also to the energy recovery cooling
water system. Remove the plastic plugs (if provided) from the compressor water pipes
and connect the pipes to the cooling water circuit.
13 Cooling air grating, dryer
When a duct is foreseen on the air inlet, the ambient temperature sensor need to be
14
repositioned in such a way that the inlet temperature is monitored.
15 Safety valve
Safety
The operator must apply all relevant safety precautions, including those mentioned
in this book.
Outdoor/altitude operation
Fix speed compressors can be sold with option "rain protection". With this option, this compressor
can be installed outside under a shelter, in frost free conditions. If frost might occur, the appropriate
measures should be taken to avoid damage to the machine and its ancillary equipment. In this
case, and also if operating above 1000 m (3300 ft), consult Atlas Copco.
Moving/lifting
If the compressor is installed on deck or if the air inlet temperature can be below 0 ˚C (32 ˚F),
precautions must be taken. Consult Atlas Copco.
In case of units equipped with the Lifting Device Option, it is not allowed to lift the
compressor if the canopy parts or lifting supports are not completely installed.
When the compressor is being lifted, it is also forbidden to come under the load or
to perform maintenance activities to it.
3.3 Electrical connections

Important remark
To preserve the protection degree of the electric cubicle and to protect its components
from dust from the environment, it is mandatory to use a proper cable gland when
connecting the supply cable to the compressor.
31
Instruction book
Figure 17: Electrical connections (typical example)
Instructions
1. Provide an isolating switch.
2. Check that the motor cables and wires inside the electric cabinet are clamped tight to their
terminals.
3. Check the fuses and the setting of the overload relay. See section Electrical cable size.
4. If terminals 1, 3 and 5 of motor contactors K21 and K23 are not bridged, connect power supply
cables to terminals 1, 3 and 5 of contactor K21 and to terminals 1, 3 and 5 of contactor K23.
32
Instruction book
If terminals 1, 3 and 5 of motor contactors K21 and K23 are bridged, connect power supply
cables to terminals L1, L2 and L3 of terminal strip 1X0.
The power cables must be connected stress-free to the terminals to avoid mechanical forces to
the terminals. For this reason, the use of flexible cables is strongly advised.
Also see section Electrical cable size.
5. Connect earth conductor bolt (PE).
Compressor status indication

The Elektronikon controller is provided with potential free auxiliary NO contacts (NO = normally
open) (K05, K07 and K08) for remote indication of:
• Manual load/unload or automatic operation (K07)
• Warning condition (K08)
• Shut-down condition (K05)
Maximum contact load: 10 A / 250 V AC.
Stop the compressor and switch off the voltage before connecting external equipment. Consult
Atlas Copco.
Compressor control modes

On compressors equipped with an Elektronikon® graphic controller, See also section Control mode
selection.
The following control modes can be selected:
• Local control: The compressor will react to commands entered by means of the buttons on the
control panel. Compressor start/stop commands via Clock function are active, if programmed.
• Remote control: The compressor will react to commands from external switches. Emergency
stop remains active. Compressor start/stop commands via Clock function are still possible.
Options:
Have the modifications checked by Atlas Copco.

Stop the compressor and switch off the voltage before connecting external
equipment.
Only potential-free contacts are allowed.
• LAN control: The compressor is controlled via a local network. Consult Atlas Copco.
See electrical diagram to locate the connectors.
The complete electrical diagram can be found in the electrical cubicle.
33
Instruction book
3.4 Cooling water requirements

General
Cooling water needs to fulfill certain requirements in order to avoid problems of

scaling, fouling, corrosion or bacterial growth.
In open circuit cooling towers, protective measures must be taken to avoid the
growth of harmful bacteria such as legionella pneumophila when there is a risk
of inhalation of the water droplets.
No general recommendation can encompass the effects of all combinations of the various
compounds, solids and gases typically found in cooling water in interaction with different materials.
Therefore the recommendations formulated in our Cooling Water Specifications are a general guide
line for acceptable coolant quality. However, where strict limits apply, a statement is made in the
specification.
The water requirements refer to untreated water. When water is treated, some parameters will
change. Water treatments should be carried out by a specialized water treatment company, taking
the responsibility for the performance of the treated cooling water and the compatibility with the
materials in the cooling circuit. This includes not only the selection of the appropriate additives, but
also the correct application, monitoring of concentrations and properties, prevention of sludge
formation and maintenance of the system. This applies also to treatment with antifreeze products.
They must be provided with suitable stabilizers and inhibitors. Specifications are also depending on
the type of cooling circuit (open, once through / recirculating with tower / closed) and on the
application (Standard – max 65 °C cooling water temperature at the outlet) or Energy Recovery
(water temperature up to 95 °C).
In case water is not in line with recommended values or if any doubt, consult the manufacturer.
Cooling water parameters

1. pH
The effect of pH is already included in the Ryznar Stability Index (RSI - see item 4 below), but
also the pH itself is subject to limitations:
pH
Type of cooling system Materials Standard Energy recovery
Containing copper 6.8 - 9.3 6.8 - 9.3
Stainless steel with
Single pass carbon steel and / or 6.8 - 9.3 6.8 - 9.3
cast iron
Stainless steel only 6 - 9.3 6 - 9.3
Containing copper 6.8 - 9.3 not applicable
Recirculating (with
carbon steel and / or 6.8 - 9.3
tower)
cast iron
Stainless steel only 6 - 9.3
34
Instruction book
pH
Type of cooling system Materials Standard Energy recovery
Containing copper 7.5 - 9.3 7.5 - 9.3
Closed loop carbon steel and / or 7.5 - 9.3 7.5 - 9.3
cast iron
Stainless steel only 6 - 9.3 6 - 9.3
The values in bold are rejection limits.

When the system contains Zn or Al, the pH must be < 8.5.
2. Total dissolved solids (TDS) and conductivity
The conductivity is expressed in μS/cm, the TDS in ppm.
Both parameters are related with each other. The conductivity is convenient for quick
monitoring of general water quality, but the TDS is required for calculating the RSI. If only one
of both parameters is measured, an estimation can be obtained by using a theoretical
conversion factor (0.67):
TDS = conductivity x 0.67
3. Hardness
Different types of hardness are in relation with each other and together with the pH and the
alkalinity of the water they determine the equilibrium situation of the water, determined and
specified by the RSI.
In addition, the calcium hardness must be limited to:
Ca (ppm Ca CO3)
Type of cooling system Standard Energy recovery
Single pass < 500 <2
Recirculating (with tower) < 500 not applicable
Closed loop < 1000 < 50
4. The Ryznar Stability Index (RSI)

The Ryznar Stability Index is a parameter for predicting whether water will tend to dissolve or
precipitate calcium carbonate. The adhesion of scaling depositions and their effect are different
on different materials, but the equilibrium of the water (scaling or corrosive) is only determined
by its actual pH value and by the saturation pH value (pHs). The saturation pH value is
determined by the relationship between the calcium hardness, the total alkalinity, the total solids
concentration and the temperature.
The Ryznar Stability Index is calculated as follows:
RSI = 2*pHs - pH,
in which
• pH = measured pH (at room temp) of the water sample
• pHs= pH at saturation
pHs is calculated from:
pHs = (9.3 + A + B) - (C + D),
35
Instruction book
in which
• A : depends on the total solids concentration
• B : depends on the water temperature at the outlet of the heat exchanger
• C : depends on the calcium hardness (CaCO3)
• D : depends on the HCO3- concentration or M-alkalinity
The values of A, B, C and D can be found in below table:
Total A Temperature B Ca hardness C M- D

dissolved (°C) (ppm CaCO3) Alkalinity
solids (ppm
(mg/l) CaCO3)
< 30 0.1 0-1 2.3 9 - 11 0.6 10 - 11 1.0
30 - 320 0.2 2-6 2.2 12 - 14 0.7 12 - 14 1.1
> 320 0.3 7 - 11 2.1 15 - 17 0.8 15 - 17 1.2
12 - 16 2.0 18 - 22 0.9 18 - 22 1.3
17 - 22 1.9 23 - 28 1.0 23 - 28 1.4
23 - 27 1.8 29 - 35 1.1 29 - 35 1.5
28 - 32 1.7 36 - 44 1.2 36 - 44 1.6
33 - 38 1.6 45 - 56 1.3 45 - 56 1.7
39 - 43 1.5 57 - 70 1.4 57 - 70 1.8
44 - 49 1.4 71 - 89 1.5 71 - 89 1.9
50 - 55 1.3 90 - 112 1.6 90 - 112 2.0
56 - 61 1.2 113 - 141 1.7 113 - 141 2.1
62 - 67 1.1 142 - 177 1.8 142 - 177 2.2
68 - 73 1.0 178 - 223 1.9 178 - 223 2.3
74 - 79 0.9 224 - 281 2.0 224 - 281 2.4
80 - 85 0.8 282 - 355 2.1 282 - 355 2.5
86 - 91 0.7 356 - 446 2.2 356 - 446 2.6
92 - 95 0.6 447 - 563 2.3 447 - 563 2.7
564 - 707 2.4 564 - 707 2.8
708 - 892 2.5 708 - 892 2.9
893 - 1000 2.6 893 - 1000 3.0
Interpretation of the values obtained:

• RSI < 6: boiler scale formation
• 6 < RSI < 7: neutral water
• RSI > 7: corrosive water
As a general rule, the RSI index should be between 5.6 and 7.5. If that is not the
case, contact a specialist.
5. Free chlorine (Cl2)

Disinfecting with chlorine is not done in closed systems, neither in energy recovery
systems.
A continuous level of 0.5 ppm should not be exceeded. For shock treatments, a maximum limit
of 2 ppm for maximum 30 minutes/day applies.
36
Instruction book
6. Chlorides (Cl-)
Chloride ions will create pitting corrosion on stainless steel. Their concentration should be
limited, depending from the RSI value.
5.6 < RSI < 6.3 < RSI < 6.9 < RSI <
RSI < 5.5 7.6 < RSI
6.2 6.8 7.5
Cl- (ppm) 200 350 500 350 200
For energy recovery systems, the limit is 100 ppm.

7. Sulphates (SO42-)
Sulphate (ppm)
Single pass < 1000 < 200
Closed loop < 400 < 200
8. Iron and Manganese
Dissolved iron (ppm) Dissolved manganese (ppm)

Type of cooling Standard Energy Standard Energy
system recovery recovery
Single pass <1 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.05
Recirculating
<1 not applicable < 0.2 not applicable
(with tower)
Closed loop <1 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.05
The values in bold are rejection limits.

9. Copper
Copper (ppm)
Single pass <1 < 0.2
Recirculating (with tower) <1 not applicable
Closed loop <1 < 0.2
10. Ammonium
The limit of 0.5 ppm is a rejection limit.
The limitation only applies for copper containing systems.
11. Suspended solids
Large particles (size > 10 µm) should not be present as they can be filtered out.
Small particles (< 0.5 µm) are not taken into account.
For particles between 0.5 µm and 10 µm, the following limits apply:
37
Instruction book
Suspended solids (ppm)

Single pass < 10 <1
Closed loop < 10 <1
12. Oil or grease

< 1 ppm (rejection value)
13. Biology
If biology is present, it must be aerobic. Anaerobic biology (in closed systems) must be avoided.
Biology (CFU/ml)
Single pass < 105 / < 107 < 103 / < 105
Recirculating (with tower) < 105 / < 107 not applicable
Closed loop < 103 / < 105 < 103 / < 105
The table shows the recommended values. The values in bold are rejection limits.
If additives are used in the cooling water, take into account that the cooling
capacity will change.
Δm = ((Cpw - Cpa) * X) / (Cpw *(1-X) + X*Cpa) * 100 %
with
Δm: change of mass flow of the coolant
Cpw: specific heat capacity of water
Cpa: specific heat capacity of the additives
X: the percentage of additives
3.5 Pictographs
Description
1 Manual condensate drain
2 Automatic condensate drain
3 Warning: voltage
38
Instruction book
4 Warning: switch off the voltage and depressurize compressor before repairing
Warning: before connecting compressor electrically, consult Instruction book for
5
motor rotation direction
6 Torques for steel (Fe) or brass (CuZn) bolts
7 Consult instruction book before greasing
8 Lightly oil gasket of oil filter, screw it on and tighten by hand (approx. half a turn)
Figure 18: Pictographs
7 Warning: stop the compressor before repairing fans
Warning: switch off the voltage before removing the protecting cover inside the
8
electric cubicle
9 Consult the instruction book before carrying out maintenance
Figure 19: Pictographs, water-cooled compressors
13 Cooling water outlet
14 Cooling water inlet
39
Instruction book
4 Operating instructions
4.1 Initial start-up

Safety
The operator must apply all relevant Safety precautions.
For the location of the air outlet valve and the drain connections, see sections
Introduction and Condensate system.
Procedure
40
Instruction book
Figure 20: Transport fixtures of MAS GA 55 up to MAS GA 90
Figure 21: Example of electric cubicle on MAS GA 55 up to MAS GA 90
- Consult the sections Electrical cable size, Installation proposal and Dimension drawings.
The following transport fixtures, painted red, must be removed:
- • Bolts and bushes under the oil separator (1)

• Bolts and bushes under the gear casing (2)
• Support under motor(3)
41
Instruction book
Check that the electrical connections correspond to the applicable codes and that all wires
are clamped tight to their terminals.
-
The installation must be earthed and protected against short circuits by fuses of the inert
type in all phases. An isolating switch must be installed near the compressor.
Check transformer (T1) for correct connection.
- Check the settings of drive motor overload relay (F21).
Check that the motor overload relay is set for manual resetting.
Check the setting of circuit breaker (Q15). Also check that the switch on the circuit breaker
-
is in position I.
Fit air outlet valve (AV); see section Introduction for the location of the valve.
Close the valve.
- Connect the air net to the valve.
On compressors equipped with a dryer bypass, fit the air outlet valve to the dryer bypass
pipe.
Connect the condensate drain outlet(s) to a drain collector.
-
See section Condensate system.
The drain pipes to the drain collector must not dip into the water. If there is a risk for
-
freezing, the pipes must be insulated.
For compressors with a DD or a DD and PD filter connect the automatic drain of the filters
-
to a suitable drain collector.
On water-cooled compressors, drain valves, shut-off valves and a regulating valve should
-
be fitted by the customer in the cooling water piping.
Check the oil level.

-
The oil level should be between the oil filler neck (FC) and the top in the sight glass (Gl).
Provide labels, warning the operator that:
- • The compressor may automatically restart after voltage failure (if activated, consult
Atlas Copco).
• The compressor is automatically controlled and may be restarted automatically.
42
Instruction book
On water-cooled compressors, close the cooling water drain valves. Open the cooling water
-
inlet valve and the regulation valve.
Switch on the voltage. Start the compressor and stop it immediately.
Check the rotation direction of drive motor (M1) while the motor is coasting to a stop. The
correct rotation direction of the drive motor is indicated by an arrow shown on the motor fan
cowl.
If the rotation direction of the drive motor is incorrect, open the isolating switch and reverse
two incoming electric lines.
-
Incorrect rotation direction of the drive motor may cause damage to the compressor.
On air-cooled compressors, check also the rotation direction of the fan motor. Rotation
arrows, visible through the grating in the roof, are provided on the plate below the fan to
indicate the correct rotation direction of the fan motor.
If the rotation direction of the fan motor is incorrect, open the isolating switch and reverse
two incoming electric connections at the terminals of circuit breaker (Q15).
On Full-Feature compressors: switch on the voltage and actuate contactor K12 (dryer fan)
on the dryer rail for a few seconds (e.g. by means of a screw driver) to check for the
rotation direction. The rotation direction of the fan is indicative for the rotation direction of
-
the dryer compressor. If the direction is wrong, two phases of the mains supply have to be
switched.
The dryer will become damaged when operating in the wrong direction!
Check the programmed settings. On compressors equipped with an Elektronikon® Graphic
-
controller, consult section Programmable settings.
Start and run the compressor for a few minutes. Check that the compressor operates
-
normally.
4.2 Before starting

Remarks
If the compressor has not run for the past 6 months, it is strongly recommended
to improve the lubrication of the compressor element at starting. Disconnect the
inlet hose, remove the unloader (UA) and pour 0.75 l (0.20 US gal, 0.17 Imp
gal) of oil into the compressor element. Reinstall the unloader and reconnect
the inlet hose. Make sure that all connections are tight.
43
Instruction book
Figure 22: Location of unloader MAS GA 55 up to MAS GA 90
Procedure
Figure 23: Position of oil level sight-glass
See section Initial start for location of the oil system components.
-
Check oil level (Gl), top up if necessary.
- If necessary, empty the dust trap of the filter, see section Air filter.
If the red part of the air filter service indicator shows full out, replace the air filter element.
Reset the service indicator (VI) by pushing the knob in the extremity of the body and reset
- the service warning.
On compressors equipped with an Elektronikon® Graphic controller, see section Service
menu.
44
Instruction book
Figure 24: Position of air filter and service indicator
On water-cooled compressors, also:

• Check that the cooling water drain valves in the inlet and outlet pipes are closed.
- • Open the cooling water inlet valve.
• Open the water flow regulating valve. This step can be skipped if, after previous
operation, the setting of this valve has not been changed.
4.3 Starting
Procedure
For the position of the air outlet valve and the drain connections, see sections
Starting and Condensate system.
Figure 25: Control panel Elektronikon® Graphic
45
Instruction book
Step Action
- Open the air outlet valve.
- Switch on the voltage. Check that voltage on LED (6) lights up.
Press start button (1) on the control panel. The compressor starts running and the
- automatic operation LED (8) lights up. Ten seconds after starting, the drive motor switches
over from star to delta and the compressor starts running loaded.
On water-cooled compressors, regulate the cooling water flow during loaded running to
obtain the most suitable temperature at the outlet of the compressor element, i.e. between
2 and 7 ˚C (4 and 13 ˚F) above the relevant temperature in the figure below. For optimum
-
operation, the cooling water outlet temperature must never exceed the value specified in
section Compressor data. Consult Atlas Copco if condensate should form during frequent
unloading periods.
Figure 26: Minimum compressor element temperature for water-cooled units
• (A): Air inlet temperature

• (B): Condensation temperature
• (C): Working pressure
• (D): Relative air humidity
Example: If operating at a pressure of 10 bar(e) (145 psig) in an ambient temperature of 20 ˚C (68
˚F) and at a relative air humidity of 100%, the minimum temperature to prevent condensate from
forming is 68 ˚C (154 ˚F). Regulate the cooling water flow during loaded operation to obtain a
temperature between 70 and approx. 75 ˚C (158 and approx. 167 ˚F) at the outlet of the
compressor element.
46
Instruction book
4.4 During operation

Warnings
The operator must apply all relevant Safety precautions. Also consult section
Problem solving.
Keep the doors closed during operation; they may be opened for short periods only
to carry out checks.
When the motors are stopped and LED (8) (automatic operation) is alight, the
motors may start automatically.
Checking the oil level
When the automatic operation LED (8) is lit, the regulator is automatically
controlling the compressor, i.e. loading, unloading, stopping of the motors and
restarting!
Regularly check the oil level. Press stop button (9)
47
Instruction book
The oil level should be between the oil filler neck and the top in the sight glass (Gl).
If the oil level is too low, wait until the compressor has depressurised. Push the emergency stop
button (10) to avoid the compressor to start unexpectedly. Next, close the air outlet valve and press
the test button on top of the electronic water drain(s) (two water drains are provided on Full-Feature
compressors) until the air system between oil separator/air receiver vessel and outlet valve is fully
depressurised. See section Condensate system for location of the outlet valve and water drain.
Unscrew oil filler plug (FC) one turn to permit any pressure left in the system to escape. Wait a few
minutes. Remove the plug and add oil until the level reaches the filler opening. Fit and tighten the
plug (FC).
On compressors with an Elektronikon® Graphic controller, unlock the emergency stop button (10),
select the STOP icon on the display and press reset before restarting.
Air filter
Figure 28: Position of the service indicator
Regularly check the service indicator. If the coloured part of service indicator (VI) shows full out,
replace the air filter element. Reset the service indicator by pushing the knob in the extremity of the
indicator body.
Drains
Regularly check that condensate is discharged during operation. See section Condensate system.
The amount of condensate depends on environmental and working conditions.
4.5 Checking the display

Compressors with Eletronikon™ Touch controller:
48
Instruction book
Figure 29: Control panel Elektronikon™ Touch
Check the display (1) regularly for readings and messages. The display normally shows the
compressor outlet pressure, while the status of the compressor is indicated by pictographs.
Remedy the trouble if alarm LED (2) is lit or flashes.
The display (1) will show a service message if a service plan interval has been exceeded or if a
service level for a monitored component has been exceeded. The service LED is on. Carry out the
service actions of the indicated plans or replace the component and reset the relevant timer.
4.6 Stopping
Elektronikon regulator
49
Instruction book
Procedure
Step Action
Press stop button (9). Automatic operation LED (8) goes out and the
-
compressor stops after 30 seconds of unloaded operation.
To stop the compressor in the event of an emergency, press emergency
stop button (10). Alarm LED flashes (7).
On compressors with an Elektronikon® Graphic controller:
• Remedy the problem cause and unlock the button by pulling it out.
-
• Navigate to the Stop icon on the display by means of the navigation keys
(3/4) and press the Select key.
Press reset.
Do not use emergency stop button (10) for normal stopping!
- Close air outlet valve (AV), see section Introduction.
Press the test button on top of the electronic water drain(s) until the air system
between air receiver and outlet valve is fully depressurized. See section
-
Condensate system.
Switch off the voltage.
- • Close the cooling water inlet valve.

• If freezing temperatures can be expected, drain the cooling system
completely.
4.7 Taking out of operation

Warning
Procedure
Step Action
- Stop the compressor and close the air outlet valve.
Press the test button on top of the electronic water drain(s) until the air system
- between air receiver and outlet valve is fully depressurized. Consult section
Condensation system to locate the drain valve.
- Switch off the voltage and disconnect the compressor from the mains.
Unscrew the oil filler plug only one turn to permit any pressure in the system to
- escape.
Consult section Oil and oil filter change, to locate the filler plug.
Shut off and depressurise the part of the air net which is connected to the outlet
-
valve. Disconnect the compressor air outlet pipe from the air net.
- • Isolate and disconnect the water system from the cooling water net.
• Drain the water circuit.
50
Instruction book
Step Action
- Drain the oil.
Drain the condensate circuit and disconnect the condensate piping from the
-
condensate net.
51
Instruction book
5 Maintenance
5.1 Preventive maintenance schedule

Control panel
Figure 31: Control panel Elektronikon Graphic
Warning
Before carrying out any maintenance, repair work or adjustments, proceed

as follows:
• Stop the compressor.
• Close the air outlet valve and press the test button on top of the electronic
water drain(s) until the air system between air receiver and outlet valve is
fully depressurized.
• Press the emergency stop button (10).
• Switch off the voltage.
• Depressurize the compressor.
For detailed instructions, see section Problem solving.
Only pressing the emergency stop button is not sufficient to make the
compressor voltage free.
If the machine is equipped with an automatic restart after voltage failure function
and if this function is active, be aware that the machine will restart automatically
when the power is restored if it was running when the power was interrupted.
Warranty - Product Liability

Use only authorised parts. Any damage or malfunction caused by the use of unauthorized parts is
not covered by Warranty or Product Liability.
Service kits
For overhauling or carrying out preventive maintenance, service kits are available (see section
Service kits).
52
Instruction book
Service contracts
Atlas Copco offers several types of service contracts, relieving you of all preventive maintenance
work. Consult your Atlas Copco Customer Centre.
General
When servicing, replace all removed O-rings and washers.
Intervals
The local Atlas Copco Customer Centre may overrule the maintenance schedule, especially the
service intervals, depending on the environmental and working conditions of the compressor.
The longer interval checks must also include the shorter interval checks.
Service plans for compressors with an Elektronikon Graphic controller

Preventive service operations are specified in the schedule below.
Each plan has a programmed time interval at which all service actions belonging to that plan are to
be carried out. When reaching the interval, a message will appear on the screen indicating which
service plans are to be carried out. After servicing, the intervals must be reset, see section Service
menu.
Preventive maintenance schedule
Period Operation
Check oil level.
Check readings on display.
Check air filter service indicator.
Daily
Check that condensate is discharged during operation.
Drain condensate.
On water-cooled units: check for cooling water flow.
Check that condensate is discharged when pressing the test button on top of the
electronic water drain.
On compressors with integrated dryer:
• Stop the compressor, close the air outlet valve and switch off the voltage.
• Remove any dirt from the condenser inlet with a vacuum cleaner.
Monthly (1)
• Next, clean with an air jet in the reverse direction of the normal flow. Use low
pressure air. Keep the compressed air nozzle more than 30 cm away from
the condenser to avoid damaging the of condenser fins.
• Remove dust from inside the dryer, e.g. with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not use water or solvents to clean the condenser.
Check coolers, clean if necessary.
Remove the air filter element and inspect. If necessary, clean using an air jet.
3-monthly (1)
Replace damaged or heavily contaminated elements.
Check the filter element of the electric cabinet. Replace if necessary
Yearly or every Replace the wearing parts of the electronic water drain(s). A service kit is
8000 hours (2) available.
Every 5 years
or 40000 hours Replace all rubber hoses.
(2)
53
Instruction book
Table 2: Daily, monthly and 3-monthly check list
(1): More frequently when operating in a dusty atmosphere.

(2): Whichever comes first
Apart from the above mentioned actions, the service interventions in the table below are
programmed in the memory of the Elektronikon controller. Each plan has a programmed time
interval at which all service actions belonging to that plan are to be carried out. When reaching the
interval, a message will appear on the screen indicating which service plans are to be carried out.
After servicing, the service timer must be reset.
Running
Action
hours
4000 (1) Change oil and oil filter.
Replace the air filter element.
Replace the filter element of the electric cabinet.
Check pressure and temperature readings.
Carry out a LED/display test.
4000 (1) Check for leakages.
Open the manual drain valve (Dm) to clean the filter of the automatic drain. See
section Condensate system.
Test the temperature shutdown function.
On water-cooled units: check for possible water leakage.
yearly Test safety valve.
Have the oil separator element replaced.
The oil separator element must also be replaced when the pressure drop over it
8000 (2)
exceeds 1 bar (14.5 psi). Check the pressure drop while the compressor is
running loaded and preferably with a stable working pressure.
Table 3: Preventive Maintenance schedule programmed in the Elektronikon
(1): or yearly, whichever comes first

(2): or every 2 years, whichever comes first
The indicated oil exchange intervals are valid for standard operating conditions (see section
Reference conditions and limitations) and nominal operating pressure (see section Compressor
data). Exposure of the compressor to external pollutants, operation at high humidity combined with
low duty cycles or operation at higher temperatures may require a shorter oil exchange interval.
Contact Atlas Copco if in doubt.
Important
• Never modify a timer setting without approval from Atlas Copco.

• For the change interval of oil and oil filter in extreme conditions of
temperature, humidity or cooling air, consult your Atlas Copco Customer
Centre.
• Any leakage should be attended to immediately. Damaged hoses or flexible
joints must be replaced.
54
Instruction book
5.2 Oil specifications

In order to achieve the best machine performance and guarantee the reliability, it is required to use
genuine Atlas Copco Lubricants. Their tailor made formulation is the result of years of field
experience, research and in-house development. Consult the Spare Parts list for part number
information.
Avoid mixing lubricants of different brands or types as they may not be

compatible and the oil mix may have inferior properties. A label, indicating the
type of oil filled ex factory, is stuck on the air receiver/oil tank.
Ambient temperature Humid Dust Duty type

Below 30 °C (86 °F) No No Mild
Below 30 °C (86 °F) Yes No Mild
Below 30 °C (86 °F) No Yes Mild
Below 30 °C (86 °F) Yes Yes Demanding
Between 30 °C (86 °F)
No No Demanding
and 40 °C (104 °F)
Yes No Demanding
and 40 °C (104 °F)
No Yes Demanding
and 40 °C (104 °F)
Yes Yes Extreme
and 40 °C (104 °F)
Above 40 °C (104 °F) - - Extreme
Table 4: Relation between the operating conditions and the duty type
Roto Synthetic Fluid XTEND DUTY

Atlas Copco's Roto Synthetic Fluid XTEND DUTY is a high quality synthetic 8000 hours lubricant
for oil injected screw compressors which keeps the compressor in excellent condition. Because of
its excellent oxidation stability,Roto Synthetic Fluid XTEND DUTY can be used for oil injected screw
compressors operating at ambient temperatures between 0 ˚C (32 ˚F) and 55 ˚C (131 ˚F).
Always use Roto Synthetic Fluid XTEND DUTY for Marine Air System GA compressors.
See the table below for oil exchange intervals:
Ambient temperature Element outlet Exchange interval Maximum time

temperature interval
up to 35°C (95°F) up to 100°C (212°F) 8000 2 years
from 35°C (95°F) up to
from 100°C (212°F) up
40°C (104°F) (see 6000 2 years
to 105°C (221°F)
note)
above 40°C (104°F) above 105°C (221°F) 4000 2 years
Note: the presence of dust and/or high humidity may require a shorter exchange interval. Consult
Atlas Copco.
55
Instruction book
* Whichever comes first.
5.3 Storage after installation

Procedure
Run the compressor regularly, e.g. twice a week, until warm. Load and unload the compressor a
few times.
If the compressor is going to be stored without running from time to time,

protective measures must be taken. Consult your supplier.
5.4 Service kits

Service kits
For overhauling and for preventive maintenance, a wide range of service kits is available. Service
kits comprise all parts required for servicing the component and offer the benefits of genuine Atlas
Copco parts while keeping the maintenance budget low.
Also a full range of extensively tested lubricants, suitable for your specific needs is available to
keep the compressor in excellent condition.
Consult the Spare Parts List for part numbers.
5.5 Disposal of used material
Used filters or any other used material (e.g. desiccant, lubricants, cleaning rags, machine parts,
etc.) must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly and safe manner, and in line with the local
recommendations and environmental legislation.
Electronic components are subject to the EU Directive 2012/19/EC for Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE). As such, these parts must not be disposed of at a municipal waste
collection point. Refer to local regulations for directions on how to dispose of this product in an
environmental friendly manner.
56
Instruction book
6 Adjustments and servicing procedures
6.1 Drive motor

General
Keep the outside of the electric motor clean for efficient cooling. If necessary, remove dust with a
brush and/or compressed air jet.
Bearing maintenance
Motors with a grease nipple to grease the non drive end bearing must follow the maintenance
interval as mentioned on the motor data plate.
Motors with greased for life bearings at the non drive end side have the same overhaul schedule as
the compressor element.
The bearing at the drive end side is lubricated by the oil system and requires no maintenance.
6.2 Air filter

Location of air filter
Recommendations
1. Never remove the element while the compressor is running.
2. For minimum downtime, replace the dirty element by a new one.
3. Discard the element when damaged.
Procedure
1. Stop the compressor. Switch off the voltage.
57
Instruction book
2. Release the snap clips of air filter (AF) and remove the cover and the air filter element. Discard
the filter element.
3. Fit the new element and the cover.
4. Reset service indicator (VI) by pushing the knob in the extremity of the body.
5. Reset the air filter service warning.
For compressors equipped with an Elektronikon® Graphic regulator, see section Service menu.
6.3 Oil and oil filter change

Warning

Always drain the compressor oil at all drain points. Used oil left in the
compressor can contaminate the oil system and can shorten the lifetime of the
new oil.
Never mix lubricants of different brands or types as they may not be compatible
and the oil mix will have inferior properties. A label, indicating the type of oil filled
ex-factory, is stuck on the air receiver/oil tank.
Procedure
Figure 32: Oil drain and filler plug, oil separator
58
Instruction book
Figure 33: Oil drain plugs, check valve and gear casing
Figure 34: Vent plug, oil cooler
Run the compressor until warm. Stop the compressor after 3 minutes of unloaded
operation. Close the air outlet valve and switch off the voltage. Wait a few minutes and
-
depressurise by unscrewing oil filler plug (FC) just one turn to permit any pressure in the
system to escape.
- Loosen the vent plug (VP) of the oil cooler and wait for 5 minutes.
Remove drain plug (DP1) and open drain valve (Dm).
Also drain the oil by removing the drain plug:
-
• on the check valve (DP2)
• on the gear casing (DP3)
Collect the oil in a collector and deliver it to the local collection service. Refit and tighten
- the drain and vent plugs after draining.
Close the drain valve (Dm).
Remove the oil filter (OF). Be aware that this filter has a left thread connection. Clean
- the seat on the manifold. Oil the gasket of the new filter and screw it into place. Tighten
firmly by hand.
Remove filler plug (FC).
- Fill the air receiver (AR) with oil until the level reaches the filler neck.
Take care that no dirt drops into the system. Refit and tighten filler plug (FC).
59
Instruction book
Run the compressor loaded for a few minutes. Stop the compressor and wait a few
-
minutes to allow the oil to settle.
Depressurise the system by unscrewing filler plug (FC) just one turn to permit any
pressure in the system to escape. Remove the plug.
-
Fill the air receiver with oil until the level reaches the filler neck.
Tighten the filler plug.
Reset the service warning after carrying out all service actions in the relevant Service
- Plan:
For compressors with Elektronikon® Graphic controller, see section Service menu.
6.4 Coolers
General
Keep the coolers clean to maintain their efficiency.
Instructions for water-cooled compressors

Consult Atlas Copco.
6.5 Safety valves

Location of safety valve
Figure 35: Position of safety valve
Operating
Operate the safety valve by unscrewing the cap one or two turns and retighten it.
60
Instruction book
Testing
Before removing the valve, depressurise the compressor.
See section Problem solving.
Valve (SV) can be tested on a separate air line. If the valve does not open at the set pressure
stamped on the valve, it needs to be replaced.
Warning
No adjustments are allowed. Never run the compressor without safety valve.
6.6 Dryer maintenance instructions

Safety precautions
Refrigeration dryers of ID type contain refrigerant HFC.
When handling refrigerant, all applicable safety precautions must be observed. Please be
specifically aware of the following points:
• Contact of refrigerant with the skin will cause freezing. Special gloves must be worn. If
contacted with the skin, the skin should be rinsed with water. On no account may clothing be
removed.
• Fluid refrigerant will also cause freezing of the eyes; always wear safety glasses.
• Refrigerant is harmful. Do not inhale refrigerant vapours. Check that the working area is
adequately ventilated.
Be aware that certain components such as the refrigerant compressor and the discharge pipe can
become quite hot (up to 110 °C - 230 °F). Therefore, wait until the dryer has cooled down before
removing the panels.
Before starting any maintenance or repair work, switch off the voltage and close the air inlet and
outlet valves.
Local legislation
Local legislation may stipulate that:
• Work on the refrigerant circuit of the cooling dryer or on any equipment which influences its
function must be undertaken by an authorised control body.
• The installation should be checked once a year by an authorised control body.
General
For all references see section Introduction.
The following remarks should be kept in mind:
• Keep the dryer clean.
• Brush or blow off the finned surface of condenser monthly.
• Inspect and clean the electronic condensate drain monthly.
61
Instruction book
7 Problem solving
Warning
Before carrying out any maintenance, repair work or adjustment, press the stop
button, wait until the compressor has stopped (approx. 30 seconds) and close
the air outlet valve.
Press the test button on top of the electronic water drain unit the air system
between the air receiver and outlet valve is fully depressurized.
Press the emergency stop button and switch off the voltage.
Depressurise the compressor by opening the oil filler plug one turn.
For location of components, see sections:
• Introduction
• Condensate system
• Initial start
Open and lock the isolating switch.
The air outlet valve can be locked during maintenance or repair as follows:
• Close the valve.
• Remove the screw fixing the handle with the wrench delivered with the
compressor.
• Lift the handle and turn it until the slot of the handle fits over the blocking
edge on the valve body.
• Fit the screw.
Faults and remedies, compressor

On compressors equipped with an Elektronikon® Graphic controller, if the alarm LED is lit or
flashes, consult sections Event history menu or Service menu.
Condition Fault Remedy

Compressor starts running, but
does not load after a delay Solenoid valve out of order Replace valve
time
Inlet valve stuck in closed
Have valve checked
position
Leak in control air tubes Replace leaking tubes
Minimum pressure valve leaking
Have valve checked
(when net is depressurised)
Compressor does not unload, Solenoid valve out of order Replace valve
safety valve blows Inlet valve does not close Have valve checked

Condensate is not discharged
Check and correct as
from condensate separator Discharge tube clogged
necessary
during loading
62
Instruction book

Compressor air output or Air consumption exceeds air
Check equipment connected
pressure below normal delivery of compressor
Choked air filter element Replace filter element
Solenoid valve malfunctioning Replace valve
Leak in control air tubes Replace leaking tubes
Inlet valve does not fully open Have valve checked
Have oil separator element
Oil separator clogged
replaced
Air leakage Have leaks repaired
Safety valve leaking Have valve replaced
Compressor element out of order Consult Atlas Copco

Excessive oil flow through air Check valve leaking or oil stop Replace defective parts.
inlet filter after stopping valve jammed Replace air filter element
Excessive oil consumption; oil
carry-over through discharge Incorrect oil causing foam Change to correct oil
line
Check for overfilling. Release
Oil level too high pressure and drain oil to
correct level.
Oil separator defective
replaced
Malfunctioning of the scavenge Have non-return valve
line replaced in the scavenge line

Safety valve blows after
Inlet valve malfunctioning Have valve checked
loading
Minimum pressure valve Have valve checked. Replace
malfunctioning if necessary
Safety valve out of order Have valve replaced
Oil separator element clogged
replaced
Compressor element out of order Consult Atlas Copco
On Full-Feature compressors,
Have system checked by
Safety valve blows dryer piping clogged due to
Atlas Copco Customer Centre
formation of ice

Compressor element outlet
temperature or delivery air Oil level too low Check and correct
temperature above normal
63
Instruction book

Check for cooling air
restriction or improve
On air-cooled compressors, ventilation of the compressor
insufficient cooling air or cooling room. Avoid recirculation of
air temperature too high cooling air. If installed, check
capacity of compressor room
fan
On water-cooled compressors,
Increase flow
cooling water flow too low
On water-cooled compressors,
Consult Atlas Copco
restriction in cooling water
Customer Centre
system
Oil cooler clogged Clean cooler
Bypass valve malfunctioning Have valve tested
Air cooler clogged Clean cooler
Compressor element out of order Consult Atlas Copco Centre
Faults and remedies, dryer

For all references hereafter, consult section Air dryer.

Pressure dew point too Air inlet temperature too Check and correct; if necessary, clean
high high the aftercooler of the compressor
Check and correct; if necessary, draw
Ambient temperature too
cooling air via a duct from a cooler
high
place or relocate the compressor
Have circuit checked for leaks and
Shortage of refrigerant
recharged
Refrigerant compressor
See below
does not run
Evaporator pressure too
See below
high
Condenser pressure too
See below
high
Condenser pressure too Fan control switch out of
Replace
high or too low order
Fan blades or fan motor Have checked fan/fan motor, if
out of order necessary replace.
Check and correct; if necessary, draw
Ambient temperature too
cooling air via a duct from a cooler
high
place or relocate the compressor
Condenser externally
Clean condenser
clogged
Compressor stops or does Electric power supply to
Check and correct as necessary
not start compressor is interrupted
64
Instruction book

Thermal protection of
Motor will restart when motor windings
refrigerant compressor
have cooled down
motor has tripped
Have system inspected
Clean the filter of the automatic drain by
Electronic condensate Electronic drain system
opening the manual drain valve. Check
drain remains inoperative clogged
functioning of the drain by pushing the
test button.
Condensate trap
Automatic drain out of Have system checked. If necessary,
continuously discharges air
order replace the automatic drain.
and water
Hot gas bypass valve
Evaporator pressure is too
incorrectly set or out of Have hot gas bypass valve adjusted
high or too low at unload
order
Condenser pressure too
See above
high or too low
Have circuit checked for leaks and
Shortage of refrigerant
recharged if necessary
65
Instruction book
8 Technical data
8.1 Readings on display
Figure 36: Elektronikon® Graphic controller
Important
The readings mentioned below are valid under the reference conditions (see
section Reference conditions and limitations).
Reference Reading
Air outlet pressure Modulates between programmed unloading and loading pressures.
Compressor element For water-cooled units: approx. 60 ˚C (108 ˚F) above cooling water inlet
outlet temperature temperature.
Dewpoint
See section Compressor data.
temperature
Cooling water outlet
Below 50 ˚C (122 ˚F).
temperature
66
Instruction book
8.2 Electric cable size and fuses

Important
• The voltage on the compressor terminals must not deviate more than 10% of
the nominal voltage.
It is however highly recommended to keep the voltage drop over the supply
cables at nominal current below 5% of the nominal voltage (IEC 60204-1).
• If cables are grouped together with other power cables, it may be necessary
to use cables of a larger size than those calculated for the standard
operating conditions.
• Use the original cable entry. See section Dimension drawings.
To preserve the protection degree of the electric cubicle and to protect
its components from dust from the environment, it is mandatory to use
a proper cable gland when connecting the supply cable to the
compressor.
• Local regulations remain applicable if they are stricter than the values
proposed below.
Currents and fuses
Compressor specification I (1) Max fuse (1) I (2) Max fuse (2)
Type gL/gG gL/gG
V Hz A A A A
MAS+ GA 55 460 60 94 125 102 125
MAS GA 55 460 60 102 125 111 125
Table 5: IEC approval
(1): current in the supply lines at maximum load and nominal voltage (compressors without
integrated dryer).
(2): current in the supply lines at maximum load and nominal voltage (compressors with integrated
dryer).
Cable sizing according IEC

The tables below indicate the current carrying capacities of cables for 3 commonly used installation
methods, calculated according to standard 60364-5-52 - electrical installations of buildings part 5 -
selection and erection equipment and section 52 - current carrying capacities in wiring systems.
The allowed currents are valid for PVC insulated cables with three loaded copper conductors
(maximum conductor temperature 70 °C).
Installation method B2 according table B.52.1.

Multi-core cable in conduit on a wooden wall
67
Instruction book
Ambient temperature
Cable section 30 °C 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C
4 mm² < 27 A < 23 A < 21 A < 19 A < 16 A
6 mm² < 34 A < 30 A < 27 A < 24 A < 21 A
10 mm² < 46 A < 40 A < 36 A < 33 A < 28 A
16 mm² < 62 A < 54 A < 49 A < 44 A < 38 A
25 mm² < 80 A < 70 A < 63 A < 57 A < 49 A
35 mm² < 99 A < 86 A < 78 A < 70 A < 60 A
50 mm² < 118 A < 103 A < 93 A < 84 A < 72 A
70 mm² < 149 A < 130 A < 118 A < 106 A < 91 A
95 mm² < 179 A < 156 A < 141 A < 127 A < 109 A
120 mm² < 206 A < 179 A < 163 A < 146 A < 126 A
Table 6: Maximum allowed current in function of the ambient temperature for installation
method B2
Installation method C according table B.52.1.

Single-core or multi-core cable on a wooden wall
Ambient temperature
4 mm² < 32 A < 28 A < 25 A < 23 A < 20 A
6 mm² < 41 A < 36 A < 32 A < 29 A < 25 A
10 mm² < 57 A < 50 A < 45 A < 40 A < 35 A
16 mm² < 76 A < 66 A < 60 A < 54 A < 46 A
25 mm² < 96 A < 84 A < 76 A < 68 A < 59 A
35 mm² < 119 A < 104 A < 94 A < 84 A < 73 A
50 mm² < 144 A < 125 A < 114 A < 102 A < 88 A
70 mm² < 184 A < 160 A < 145 A < 131 A < 112 A
95 mm² < 223 A < 194 A < 176 A < 158 A < 136 A
120 mm² < 259 A < 225 A < 205 A < 184 A < 158 A
method C
Installation method F according table B.52.1.

Single-core cables, touching in free air
Clearance to wall not less than one cable diameter
Ambient temperature
25 mm² < 110 A < 96 A < 87 A < 78 A < 67 A
68
Instruction book
Ambient temperature
35 mm² < 137 A < 119 A < 108 A < 97 A < 84 A
50 mm² < 167 A < 145 A < 132 A < 119 A < 102 A
70 mm² < 216 A < 188 A < 171 A < 153 A < 132 A
95 mm² < 264 A < 230 A < 209 A < 187 A < 161 A
120 mm² < 308 A < 268 A < 243 A < 219 A < 188 A
method F
Calculation method for IEC:

• Single supply cables (3 phases + PE - configuration (1)):
• Add 10 % to the total compressor current (ItotPack or ItotFF from the tables)
• Install the prescribed fuse on each cable
• Parallel supply cable (2 x 3 phases + PE - configuration (2)):
• Add 10 % to the total compressor current (ItotPack or ItotFF from the tables) and divide by
2
• Multiply the ampacity of the cables with 0.8 (see table A.52.17 (52-E1))
• Install fuses of half the size of the recommended maximum fuse size on each cable.
• When using 2 x 3 phases + PE as in (3):
• Add 10 % to the total compressor current (ItotPack or ItotFF from the tables) and divide by
√3
• Multiply the ampacity of the cables with 0.8 (see table A.52.17 (52-E1))
• Fuse size: the recommended maximum fuse size divided by √3 on each cable.
• Size of the PE cable:
• For supply cables up to 35 mm²: same size as supply cables
• For supply cables larger than 35 mm²: half the size of the supply wires
Always check the voltage drop over the cable (less than 5 % of the nominal voltage is
recommended).
Example: Itot = 89 A, maximum ambient temperature is 45 °C, recommended fuse = 100 A
• Single supply cables (3 phases + PE - configuration (1)):
• I = 89 A + 10 % = 89 x 1.1 = 97.9 A
• The table for B2 and ambient temperature = 45 ° C allows a maximum current of 93 A for
a 50 mm² cable. For a cable of 70 mm², the maximum allowed current is 118 A, which is
sufficient. Therefore, use a 3 x 70 mm² + 35 mm² cable.
If method C is used, 50 mm² is suffficient. (35 mm² for method F) => cable 3 x 50 mm² +
25 mm².
• Parallel supply cable (2 x 3 phases + PE - configuration (2)):
• I = (89 A + 10 %)/2 = (89 x 1.1)/2 = 49 A
• For a cable of 25 mm², B2 at 45 °C, the maximum current is 63 A x 0.8 = 50.4 A. So 2
parallel cables of 3 x 25 mm² + 25 mm² are sufficient.
• Install 50 A fuses on each cable instead of 100 A.
69
Instruction book
Fuse calculations for IEC are done according to 60364-4-43 electrical installations of buildings,
part 4: protection for safety- section 43: protection against overcurrent. Fuse sizes are calculated in
order to protect the cable against short circuit. Fuse type aM is recommended but gG/gL is also
allowed.
8.3 Dryer switches

General
The regulating and safety devices are factory-adjusted to give optimum performance of the dryer.
Do not alter the setting of any of the devices.
8.4 Reference conditions and limitations

Reference conditions
Air inlet pressure (absolute) bar 1

Air inlet temperature ˚C 20
Relative humidity % 0
Working pressure See section Compressor data.
On water-cooled units also:

Cooling water inlet temperature ˚C 20
Limits
Maximum working pressure See section Compressor data.

Minimum working pressure bar(e) 4
Maximum air inlet temperature ˚C 46
Minimum ambient temperature ˚C 0
On water-cooled units also:

Maximum cooling water outlet temperature ˚C 50
Maximum cooling water inlet pressure bar(e) 5
8.5 Compressor data

Reference conditions
All data specified below apply under reference conditions, see section
Reference conditions.
70
Instruction book
MAS GA 55
175
psi
Frequency Hz 60
Maximum (unloading) pressure, Full-Feature units bar(e) 12.3
Reference working pressure, Full-Feature units bar(e) 12
Pressure drop over dryer, Full-Feature units bar(e) 0.25
Set point, thermostatic valve ˚C 60
Temperature of air leaving outlet valve (approx.), Full-Feature units ˚C 3
Pressure dew point, Full-Feature units ˚C 3
Motor shaft speed r/min 3570
Nominal motor power kW 55
Dryer power at full load, Full-Feature units kW 1.6
Dryer power at unloaded operation, Full-Feature units kW 1.4
R410
Refrigerant type, Full-Feature units
A
Refrigerant quantity, Full-Feature units kg 1.05
Oil capacity, water-cooled units l 25
Sound pressure level (according to ISO 2151 (2004)) dB(A) 69
71
Instruction book
9 Air receiver instructions

Instructions
This vessel can contain pressurised air; this can be potentially dangerous if the
1
equipment is misused.
This vessel must only be used as a compressed air/oil separator and must be
2
operated within the limits specified on the data plate.
No alterations must be made to this vessel by welding, drilling or any other
3
mechanical methods without the written permission of the manufacturer.
4 The pressure and temperature of this vessel must be clearly indicated.
The safety valve must correspond with pressure surges of 1.1 times the maximum
5 allowable operating pressure. It should guarantee that the pressure will not
permanently exceed the maximum allowable operating pressure of the vessel.
6 Use only oil as specified by the manufacturer.
This vessel has been designed and built to guarantee an operational liftetime in
excess of 20 years and an infinite number of pressure load cycles. There is no
7 intrinsic need for in service inspection of the vessel when used within the design
limits for its intended application. However, national legislation may require in
service inspection.
Original bolts have to be used after opening for inspection. The maximum torque
8 has to be taken into consideration: for M12 bolts 73 Nm (+/- 18) / 54 lbf.ft (+/- 13),
for M16 bolts 185 Nm (+/- 45) / 136.5 lbf.ft (+/- 33).
72
Instruction book
10 Guidelines for inspection

Guidelines
On the Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer, the harmonised and/or other
standards that have been used for the design are shown and/or referred to.
The Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer is part of the documentation that is
supplied with this compressor.
Local legal requirements and/or use outside the limits and/or conditions as specified by the
manufacturer may require other inspection periods as mentioned below.
73
atlascopco.com
© Printed in Atlas Copco Airpower N.V.. All rights reserved. Designs and specifications are subject to change
without notice or obligation… December 2021
PARTS LIST
OIL-INJECTED ROTARY SCREW
COMPRESSORS
Marine Air Systems - Working air compressors
GA 55, GA 75, GA 90
Atlas Copco
Oil-injected rotary screw compressors
Marine Air Systems

Working air compressors
GA 55, GA 75, GA 90
From following serial No. onwards: API 615 000
Parts list
• Copyright, Atlas Copco Airpower n.v., Antwerp, Belgium.

drawings.
• Use only authorized parts. Any damage or malfunction caused by the use
of unauthorized parts is not covered by Warranty or Product Liability.
2015 - 12
No. 2930 7117 52

Replaces No. 2930 7117 51
www.atlascopco.com
Parts list
en - INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

1 ORDERING PARTS
Always specify the part number, the name and quantity of the required items, as well as the type and serial number of the machine.
Pages marked with Service symbol - “ ” contain parts of Service kit(s). For complete contents of the kit see chapter “1 - Service kits”.
2 COLUMN INFORMATION
Ref. - Reference number: links a specific listed part to the drawing. Only parts with a reference number are shown in the drawing. Parts in the drawing without a reference number
are simply there to illustrate the assembly.
Part number - Part number: if no part number is specified, the component is not available as a spare part. A line shown in bold is an assembly. A part of which the number is fol-
lowed by a black dot is comprised in the bold printed assembly right above.
“<<< >>>” Directs to another list with the same title as the “Name”.
When the part number of the specific parts is placed below the “Ref.”/”Name” line a choice must be made upon the type/version of the machine.
Qty - Quantity: indicates the number of parts in connection with the corresponding reference number. „AR“ means „As required“: quantity or number to be determined.
Name - Part name: translations of the English names can be found in document “Glossary of part names”.
Remarks - Extra information about the part.
A series of letters can indicate that a particular part has been certified by the specified authorized body, in accordance with the codes or rules of the list.
Measurements are given in millimeters.
bg - ИНСТРУКЦИИ ЗА ИЗПОЛЗВАНЕ
1 ЗАЯВЯВАНЕ НА РЕЗЕРВНИ ЧАСТИ

Винаги указвайте номера на частта, наименованието и необходимото количество от артикула, както и модела и серийния номер на машината.
Страниците, маркирани със символ за сервиз - “ “ , съдържат части от Сервизен комплект(и). За пълното съдържание на комплекта вж. глава “1 - Service kits “ (1 -
Сервизни комплекти).
2 ЗНАЧЕНИЕ НА КОЛОНИТЕ
Ref. - Цифрово обозначение: връзка с чертежа за определена част от спецификацията. На чертежа са показани само детайли с цифрово обозначение. Детайлите без
цифрово обозначение в чертежа са показани само за прегледност на сглобената единица.
Part number - Номер на частта: ако не е указан такъв, детайлът не се предлага като резервна част. Удебелена линия означава сглобена единица. Част, чийто номер е
последван от черна точка, се съдържа в сглобената единица, отпечатана точно отгоре с получер шрифт.
“<<< >>>” е указател към друга спецификация със същото наименование като “Name”.
Когато номерът на частта на указания детайл е разположен под реда “Ref.”/”Name”, трябва да се направи избор съобразно модела/версията на машината.
Qty - Количество: указва броя детайли, свързани със съответното цифрово обозначение. “Заявка” означава “По заявка”: количество или бройка за доуточняване.
Name - Наименование на частта: преводите на английските наименования могат да бъдат намерени в документа “Речник на наименованията на частите”.
Remarks - Допълнителна информация за частта.
Поредица от букви може да указва, че определен детайл е сертифициран от посочения упълномощен орган за съответствие с параметрите или правилата в
спецификацията.
Всички стойности са дадени в милиметри.
br - INSTRUÇÕES DE USO
1 ENCOMENDANDO PEÇAS
Sempre especifique o número da peça, o nome e a quantidade dos itens necessários, assim como o tipo e o número de série da máquina.
Páginas marcadas com o símbolo Serviço - “ “ contêm peças do(s) Kit(s) de serviço. Para conhecer o conteúdo completo do kit, consulte o capítulo “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kits de
serviço).
2 INFORMAÇÕES SOBRE AS COLUNAS

Ref. - Número de referência: indica onde está uma peça específica listada no desenho. Somente peças com número de referência são mostradas no desenho. As peças no desenho que
não têm um número de referência destinam-se simplesmente a ilustrar o conjunto.
Part number - Número da peça: se nenhum número de peça estiver especificado, o componente não está disponível como peça sobressalente. Uma linha mostrada em negrito é um
conjunto. Uma peça cujo número seja seguido por um ponto preto faz parte do conjunto impresso em negrito imediatamente acima dela.
O símbolo “<<< >>>” direciona para outra lista com o mesmo título, como “Name” (Nome).
Quando o número de peça específico é colocado abaixo da linha “Ref.”/”Name” (Ref. / Nome), é preciso escolher o tipo/versão da máquina.
Qty - Quantidade: indica o número de peças e os números de referência correspondentes. “AR” significa “As required” (Conforme solicitado): a quantidade ou o número a ser
determinado.
Name - Nome da peça: as traduções dos nomes em inglês podem ser encontradas no documento “Glossary of part names” (Glossário de nomes de peças).
Remarks - Observações - Informações extras sobre a peça.
Uma série de letras pode indicar que uma determinada peça é certificada pelo órgão autorizado específico, de acordo com os códigos ou as regras da lista.
As medidas são fornecidas em milímetros.
cs -NÁVOD K POUŽITÍ
1 OBJEDNÁNÍ DÍLŮ
Vždy uveďte přesné číslo dílu, název a množství požadovaných položek, a také typ a sériové číslo stroje.
Stránky označené symbolem servisu - “ “ obsahují součásti servisní sady (servisních sad). Kompletní obsah sady naleznete v kapitole “1 - Service kits “ (1, Servisní sady).
2 INFORMACE VE SLOUPCÍCH
Ref. - Referenční číslo: odkazuje díl uvedený v seznamu k místu ve výkresu. Ve výkresu jsou uvedeny pouze díly s referenčním číslem. Díly bez referenčního čísla, které jsou ve
výkresu uvedeny, slouží pouze jako ilustrace.
Part number. - Číslo dílu: pokud není uvedeno číslo dílu, komponent se jako náhradní díl nedodává. Řádek tučně je sestava. Díl, jehož číslo je následováno černou tečkou, je
součástí sestavy, jejíž název je vytištěn tučně výše.
„<<< >>>“ vede na další seznam se stejným názvem, jaký je uveden v poli „Name“ (Název dílu).
Pokud je pod řádkem „Ref.“/„Name“ umístěno číslo dílu konkrétního dílu, musí být proveden výběr typu/verze stroje.
Qty - Množství: uvádí počet dílů spojených s příslušným referenčním číslem. „AR“ znamená „As required“ (podle požadavků): množství nebo číslo, které má být určeno.
Name - Název dílu: překlad anglického názvu lze najít v dokumentu „Rejstřík názvů dílů“.
Remarks - Doplňkové informace k dílu.
Série písmen může označovat, že určitý díl byl certifikován autorizovanou osobou v souladu s kódy a pravidly seznamu.
Rozměry jsou uvedeny v milimetrech.
4 2930 7052 03
Parts list
da - ANVENDELSESINSTRUKTIONER
1 BESTILLING AF RESERVEDELE
Angiv altid reservedelsnummer, navn og antal for de dele, du ønsker, samt maskinens typebetegnelse og serienummer.
Sider markeret med servicesymbolet - “ “ indeholder dele af service-kittet(ene). For et samlet overblik over kittets indhold, se kapitel “1 - Service kits”(1 - Service kits).
2 FORKLARING TIL SPALTER

Ref. - Referencenummer: knytter en specifik del på listen til tegningen. På tegningen vises kun reservedele, som har et referencenummer. Reservedele på tegningen, som ikke har et
referencenummer, er medtaget for illustrationens skyld.
Part number. - Reservedelsnummer: hvis der ikke er angivet noget reservedelsnummer, fås den pågældende komponent ikke som reservedel. En linje, som vises med fed skrift, er
en samling af dele. En reservedel, hvor nummeret er efterfulgt af en sort prik, er en af de dele, der indgår i samlingen af dele, som vises med fed skrift ovenover.
“<<< >>>” henviser til en anden liste med samme titel som “Name”.
Når den specifikke reservedels nummer placeres under linjen “Ref.”/”Name”, skal du vælge type/version for maskinen.
Qty - Antal: angiver antallet af reservedele, der indgår i det tilsvarende referencenummer. “AR” betyder “As required” (som krævet): mængde eller antal skal bestemmes.
Name - Reservedelsnavn: oversættelse af de engelske navne kan findes i dokumentet “Liste over reservedelsnavne”.
Remarks - Ekstra information om reservedelen.
En bogstavrække kan angive, at en bestemt reservedel er blevet certificeret af det pågældende godkendende organ, i henhold til standarderne på listen.
Alle mål er angivet i millimeter.
de - BEDIENUNGSANWEISUNG
1 BESTELLEN VON TEILEN
Immer Teilenummer, Bezeichnung und Anzahl der erforderlichen Teile sowie Typ und Seriennummer der Maschine angeben.
Seiten mit dem Servicesymbol - “ “ enthalten Teile von Service-Kit(s). Informationen zum vollständigen Inhalt des Kits finden Sie im Kapitel „1 - Service kits“ (1 - Service-Kits).
2 ERLÄUTERUNG DER SPALTEN

Ref. – Referenznummer: Querverweis zwischen einem aufgeführten Teil und der Zeichnung. In der Zeichnung sind nur Teile mit einer Referenznummer abgebildet. Abgebildete
Teile ohne Referenznummer dienen lediglich der Darstellung der Baugruppe.
Part number – Teilenummer: Falls keine Teilenummer angegeben ist, ist das Bauteil nicht als Ersatzteil lieferbar. Baugruppen sind fett hervorgehoben. Wenn sich hinter einer
Teilenummer ein schwarzer Punkt befindet, gehört dieses Teil zur darüber stehenden Baugruppe.
“<<< >>>” bedeutet, daß Sie eine andere Liste nachschlagen müssen.
Steht die Teilnummer unter der Ref./Name Zeile, so muß eine Wahl gemacht werden je nach Typ/Ausführung der Maschine.
Qty – Anzahl: Gibt die Anzahl der Teile in Bezug auf die entsprechende Referenznummer an. „AR“ steht für „As required“ (nach Bedarf), die gewünschte Anzahl muss angegeben
werden.
Name – Teilebezeichnung: Eine Übersetzung der englischen Bezeichnungen finden Sie im Dokument “Glossary of part names” (Glossar Teilebezeichnungen).
Remarks – Zusätzliche Information zu dem Teil.
Eine Buchstabenfolge weist darauf hin, dass ein bestimmtes Teil durch die angegebene zuständige Stelle gemäß den aufgeführten Normen und Richtlinien zertifiziert wurde.
Abmessungen sind in Millimetern angegeben.
el - ΟΔΗΓΙΕΣ ΧΡΗΣΗΣ
1 ΠΑΡΑΓΓΕΛΙΑ ΑΝΤΑΛΛΑΚΤΙΚΩΝ
Να προσδιορίζετε πάντοτε τον κωδικό είδους, την περιγραφή και την ποσότητα των αιτούμενων ειδών καθώς, επίσης, και τον τύπο και τον αριθμό σειράς του μηχανήματος.
Οι σελίδες που επισημαίνονται με το σύμβολο Σέρβις- “ “ περιέχουν μέρη από Πακέτα ανταλλακτικών συντήρησης. Για το πλήρες περιεχόμενο του πακέτου, ανατρέξτε στο
κεφάλαιο “1 - Service kits” (1 – Πακέτα ανταλλακτικών συντήρησης).
2 ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΕΣ ΓΙΑ ΤΗ ΣΥΜΠΛΗΡΩΣΗ ΤΩΝ ΣΤΗΛΩΝ

Ref. - Κωδικός αναφοράς: συνδέει ένα συγκεκριμένο λειτουργικό εξάρτημα του καταλόγου με το σχέδιο. Στο σχέδιο εμφανίζονται μόνο εξαρτήματα που διαθέτουν κωδικό
αναφοράς. Τα εξαρτήματα του σχεδίου που δε διαθέτουν κωδικό αναφοράς απλώς εμφανίζονται για την πληρέστερη περιγραφή του συγκροτήματος.
Part number - Κωδικός είδους: εάν δεν προσδιορίζεται κωδικός είδους, το εξάρτημα δεν είναι διαθέσιμο ως ανταλλακτικό. Γραμμές που εμφανίζονται με έντονη γραφή
αντιστοιχούν σε συγκροτήματα. Ένα εξάρτημα του οποίου ο κωδικός ακολουθείται από μαύρη τελεία περιλαμβάνεται στο αμέσως παραπάνω συγκρότημα που εμφανίζεται με
έντονη γραφή.
To “<<< >>>” αποτελεί αναφορά σε άλλο κατάλογο με τον τίλτο που αναγράφεται στην ένδειξη “Name”.
Όταν ο κωδικός είδους του προσδιοριζόμενου εξαρτήματος βρίκεται κάτω από τη γραμμή “Ref.”/”Name”, θα πρέπει να γίνει επιλογή του τύπου/έκδοσης του μηχανήματος.
Qty - Ποσότητα: υποδεικνύει το πλήθος των εξαρτημάτων που ζητούνται από τον αντίστοιχο κωδικό αναφοράς. “AR” σημαίνει “As required” (Σύμφωνα με τις απαιτήσεις):
ποσότητα ή πλήθος προς προσδιορισμό.
Name - Περιγραφή είδους: μεταφράσεις των αγγλικών ονομασιών περιέχονται στο έντυπο “Γλωσσάριο εξαρτημάτων”.
Remarks - Πρόσθετες πληροφορίες σχετικά με ένα ανταλλακτικό.
Η ύπαρξη μιας σειράς γραμμάτων υποδεικνύει ότι ένα συγκεκριμένο ανταλλακτικό διαθέτει έγκριση από τον αναφερόμενο εξουσιοδοτημένο φορέα, σύμφωνα με τους κώδικες ή
τους κανονισμούς του καταλόγου.
Οι διαστάσεις αναφέρονται σε χιλιοστόμετρα.
es - INSTRUCCIONES DE USO
1 PEDIDO DE PIEZAS
Especifique siempre la designación, el nombre y la cantidad de las piezas deseadas, así como el tipo y el número de serie de la máquina.
Las páginas marcadas con el símbolo de Servicio - “ “ contienen piezas de kit(s) de servicio. Para el contenido completo del kit, vea el capítulo “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kits de
servicio).
2 INFORMACIÓN DE LAS COLUMNAS

Ref. - Número de referencia: establece un vínculo entre una pieza específica de la lista y el dibujo. Sólo las piezas con número de referencia aparecen en el dibujo. Las piezas que
aparezcan sin número de referencia sólo se muestran en el dibujo para ilustrar el conjunto.
Part number - Designación: si no se indica ninguna designación, el componente no se encuentra disponible como pieza de repuesto. Los conjuntos aparecen con una línea en
negrita. Las piezas con números seguidos por un punto negro, indican que forman parte del conjunto que aparece en negrita anteriormente.
“<<< >>>” dirige a otra lista con el mismo título que el “Name”.
Cuando la designación de una pieza específica está situada debajo de la línea “Ref.”/”Name” se debe elegir el tipo/versión de la máquina.
Qty - Cantidad: indica la cantidad de piezas asociadas al número de referencia correspondiente. “AR” significa “As required” (según se requiera): debe determinarse la cantidad o el
número.
Name - Nombre de la pieza: las traducciones de los nombres en inglés se encuentran en el documento “Glosario de nombres de piezas”.
Remarks - Observaciones: información adicional sobre las piezas.
Una serie de letras puede indicar que una pieza específica ha sido certificada por la entidad autorizada indicada, conforme a los códigos o reglas especificados.
Las dimensiones se expresan en milímetros.
2930 7052 03 5
Parts list
et - KASUTUSJUHISED
1 OSADE TELLIMINE
Määrake alati osa number, vajalike osade nimed ja kogused, samuti masina tüüp ja seerianumber.
Hooldussümboliga tähistatud leheküljed - “ “ sisaldavad hoolduskomplketi(–de) osi. Komplekti täieliku sisu jaoks vt peatükki “1 - Service kits” (1- Hoolduskomplektid).
2 VEERUTEAVE
Ref. viitenumber seostab konkreetse nimistus oleva osa vastava joonisega. Joonisel on toodud ainult viitenumbriga osad. Joonisel olevad viitenumbrita osad on mõeldud ainult il-
lustratsioonidena.
Part number: osa number. Kui osa number pole määratud, siis pole see komponent varuosana saadaval. Rasvane joon tähistab seadet. Osa, millele järgneb must punkt, koosneb
paremal üleval rasvaselt trükitud koostisest.
„<<< >>>” viib teise loendini, millel on samasugune pealkiri kui „Nimi”.
Kui osa number või konkreetne osa on paigutatud „Viite”/„Nime” joone alla, tuleb valida seadme tüüp/versioon.
Qty: kogus näitab vastava viitenumbriga tähistatud osade arvu. „AR“ tähendab „As required“ (Vastavalt vajadusele): määratletakse kas kogus või number.
Name ehk osa nimi: ingliskeelsete nimede tõlked leiate dokumendist „Osa nimede sõnastik“.
Remarks – osa kohta käiv lisateave.
Tähtede seeria võib näidata, et mingi osa on vastavalt nimekirja koodidele või reeglitele volitatud organist sertifitseeritud.
Mõõtmed on millimeetrites.
fi - KÄYTTÖOHJEET
1 OSIEN TILAAMINEN
Mainitse aina osan numero, haluttujen osien nimitykset ja määrät, sekä koneen malli ja valmistusnumero.
Huoltosymbolilla - “ “ merkityillä sivuilla on huoltotarvikesarjojen osia. Katso sarjan täydellinen sisältö luvusta “1 - Service kits” (1 - Huoltotarvikesarjat).
2 SARAKKEIDEN SELITYKSET
Ref. - Viitenumero: Viittaa osaan luettelossa ja piirustuksessa. Vain osat, joilla on viitenumero, näkyvät piirustuksessa. Ilman viitenumeroa piirustuksessa olevien osien tarkoituksena
on vain selkeyttää kokonaisuutta.
Part number - Osanumero: Jos osanumeroa ei ole ilmoitettu, osaa ei ole saatavana varaosana. Lihavoituna näkyvä rivi on kokonaisuus. Osa, jonka numeroa seuraa musta piste,
sisältyy lähinnä ylhäällä lihavoidulla painettuun tarvikesarjaan.
“<<< >>>” kehottaa katsomaan toista luetteloa, jonka “Name”-otsikko on sama.
Kun tietyn osan osanumero on “Ref.”/”Name”-viivan alapuolella, on valittava koneen tyyppi/versio.
Qty - Määrä: Ilmoittaa viitenumeroon liittyvien osien määrän. “AR” tarkoittaa “As required” (tarpeen mukaan): irtotavaraa tai määrä on selvitettävä.
Name - Osanimi: englanninkielisten osanimien käännökset löytyvät painotuotteesta Osien nimien sanasto.
Remarks - Lisätietoa osasta.
Kirjainyhdistelmä voi ilmoittaa, että mainittu valtuutettu elin on hyväksynyt osan luettelon koodien tai sääntöjen mukaisesti.
Mitat on annettu millimetreinä.
fr - INSTRUCTIONS D’UTILISATION
1 COMMANDE DE PIECES DETACHEES
Précisez toujours le numéro de pièce, la désignation et la quantité de composants souhaitée, ainsi que le type et le numéro de série de la machine.
Les pages sur lesquelles figure le symbole d’entretien - “ “ traitent de pièces comprises dans un/des kit(s) d’entretien. Pour le contenu complet du kit, voir le chapitre “1 - Service
kits” (1 - Kits d’entretien)
.
2 INFORMATIONS DISPONIBLES DANS LES COLONNES
Ref. - Numéro de référence : se réfère à une pièce particulière dans la liste et le schéma. Seules les pièces auxquelles un numéro de référence a été attribué sont représentées sur le
schéma. Les pièces sans numéro de référence sur le schéma sont simplement destinées à compléter l’illustration.
Part number - Numéro de pièce détachée : si aucun numéro de pièce n’est spécifié, le composant n’est pas disponible en tant que pièce détachée. Une ligne qui apparaît en gras
correspond à un ensemble. Une pièce dont le numéro est suivi d’un point noir est comprise dans l’ensemble apparaissant en gras juste au-dessus.
“<<< >>>” indique à consulter une autre liste.
Si le numéro de pièce d’une pièces spécifiques est placé au-dessous de la ligne de référence/nom, il faut choisir le type/version de la machine.
Qty - Quantité : indique le nombre de pièces avec le numéro de référence correspondant. « AR » signifie « As required » (comme requis) : il s’agit de la quantité ou du nombre à
déterminer.
Name - Désignation de la pièce : la traduction des désignations anglaises est disponible dans le document “Glossary of part names” (Glossaire des désignations des pièces).
Remarks - Remarques : informations supplémentaires concernant la pièce.
Une série de lettres peut indiquer qu’une pièce spécifique a été certifiée par l’organisme autorisé mentionné, conformément aux codes et règlements de la liste.
Les dimensions sont indiquées en millimètres.
hu - HASZNÁLATI ÚTMUTATÓ
1 ALKATRÉSZRENDELÉS
Mindig adja meg a cikkszámot, a kért elemek nevét és mennyiségét, valamint a készülék típusát és gyári számát.
A Szerviz - “ “ szimbólummal jelölt oldalak a szervizkészlet(ek) egyes alkatrészeire vonatkoznak. A készlet teljes tartalmát lásd az “1 - Service kits” (1 - Szervizkészletek) fejezet-
ben.
2 A TÁBLÁZAT OSZLOPAI
Ref. - Hivatkozási szám: a felsorolt alkatrészt a megfelelő ábrához társítja. A rajzon csak hivatkozási számmal ellátott alkatrészek láthatók. Az ábra hivatkozási szám nélküli részei
csak az összeszerelés módját illusztrálják.
Part number. – ha nincs megadva cikkszám, az adott alkatrész nem kapható pótalkatrészként. A vastag vonal szerelvényt jelez. Ha a cikkszám után fekete pont áll, az alkatrész a
jobbra fent vastaggal jelölt szerelvény része.
A „<<< >>>” jel átirányít egy másik listához, amely a „Name” elemmel azonos nevű.
Ha egy adott alkatrész cikkszámát a „Ref.”/„Name” oszlopba helyezik, ki kell választani a készülék típusát/verziószámát.
Qty - Mennyiség: az adott hivatkozási számhoz kapcsolódó alkatrészek számát jelöli. Az „AR” jelentése „As required” (igény szerint): itt megadhatja a mennyiséget vagy a számot.
Name - Az alkatrész neve: az angol nyelvű elnevezések fordításai az „Alkatrésznevek listája” c. dokumentumban találhatók.
Remarks - Az alkatrésszel kapcsolatos többletinformáció.
Egy betűsor jelzi azt, hogy az adott alkatrészt az illetékes hatóság a lista kódjainak vagy szabályainak megfelelő tanúsítvánnyal látta el.
A mérési eredmények milliméterben értendők.
6 2930 7052 03
Parts list
it - ISTRUZIONI PER L’USO

1 ORDINE DI PARTI DI RICAMBIO
Indicare sempre il numero categorico, il nome e la quantità delle parti richieste, come pure il tipo e il numero di serie della macchina.
Le pagine contrassegnate dal simbolo di assistenza - “ “ descrivono componenti appartenenti ai kit di manutenzione. Per informazioni sul contenuto completo del kit, consultare il
capitolo “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kit di manutenzione).
2 INFORMAZIONI SULLE COLONNE

Ref. - Numero di riferimento: indica un componente specifico elencato nel disegno. Nel disegno sono presenti solo i componenti con un numero di riferimento. I componenti senza
numero di riferimento sono presenti al solo scopo di illustrare il gruppo.
Part number - Numero categorico: se non è specificato nessun numero categorico, il componente non è disponibile come parte di ricambio. Una riga in grassetto indica un assem-
blaggio. Una parte il cui numero è seguito da un punto nero è compresa nell’assemblaggio stampato in grassetto in alto a destra.
“<<< >>>” indica di consultare un altro elenco di parti di ricambio.
Quando il numero di catalogo di una parte specifica è messo sotto la linea del riferimento/denominazione si deve fare una scelta in base al tipo/versione della macchina.
Qty - Quantità: indica il numero di componenti relativo al numero di riferimento. „AR“ significa „As required“ (Come richiesto): devono essere determinati la quantità o il numero.
Name - Nome parte: le traduzioni dei nomi inglesi dei componenti possono essere reperite nel “Glossary of part names” (Glossario dei nomi parti).
Remarks - Ulteriori informazioni sul componente.
Una serie di lettere possono indicare la certificazione di un componente da parte di un ente autorizzato specificato, in conformità alle normative riportate nell’elenco.
Le misure sono espresse in millimetri.
ja - 使用方法
1部品の注文
部品番号、注文するアイテムの名称および数量、機器のタイプおよびシリアル番号を必ず指定してください。
サービスマーク“ ”のついたページにはサービスキットの部品が記載されています。キットの内容物について
は、第1章「サービスキット」を参照してください。
2 各列の説明
Ref. - 参照番号：リストの部品が図のどこにあるかを示します。参照番号がある部品のみが図に示されていま
す。参照番号がない部品はアセンブリを表現するため便宜上表記されています。
Part number - 部品番号：部品番号が示されていない部品は、スペア部品としては提供されていません。太字の行
はアセンブリを示します。番号の後に黒い点が付いている部品は、すぐ上にある太字のアセンブリを構成してい
ます。
“<<< >>>”は、“Name”と同じタイトルの別のリストを示します。
“Ref.”または”Name”行の下に、特定の部品の部品番号が記載されている場合は、機器のタイプ/バージョンに
応じて部品を選択してください。
Qty - 数量：参照番号に対応する部品の数量を示します。 „AR“は「必要に応じて」を意味し、必要に応じて数
量または番号を指定します。
Name - 部品名：英語に対応する各言語の名称は「Glossary of part names」（部品名称対応表）に記載されてい
ます。
Remarks - 部品に関する追加情報です。
一連の文字列は特定の部品が指定認定団体によって承認されていることを示し、リストのコードまたは規定に準拠
しています。
測定値はミリメートル単位で示されています。
lt - NAUDOJIMO INSTRUKCIJA
1 DETALIŲ UŽSAKYMAS
Visada nurodykite detalės numerį, pavadinimą ir reikiamą kiekį bei įrenginio tipą ir serijos numerį.
Puslapiuose, pažymėtuose techninio aptarnavimo simboliu - “ “, yra aptarnavimo reikmenų rinkinio (-ių) dalių. Norėdami gauti informacijos apie visą rinkinio turinį, žr. skyrių “1
- Service kits” (1 - Aptarnavimo reikmenų rinkiniai).
2 INFORMACIJA STULPELYJE
Ref. - Nuorodos numeris: susieja sąraše nurodytą detalę ir brėžinį. Brėžinyje pavaizduotos tik detalės, turinčios nuorodos numerį. Brėžinio detalės, neturinčios nuorodos numerio, tik
iliustruoja komplektinį bloką.
Part number - detalės numeris: jeigu detalės numeris nenurodytas, komponento kaip atsarginės detalės įsigyti negalima. Eilutėje, kuri parodyta paryškintu šriftu, yra agregatas.
Detalė, po kurios numerio eina juodas taškas, yra įmontuota paryškintu šriftu aukščiau išspausdintame agregate.
„<<< >>>“ nukreipia į kitą sąrašą, kurio pavadinimas toks pat, kaip „Name“ (detalės pavadinimas).
Kai specifinės detalės numeris yra nurodytas žemiau „Ref.“ (nuoroda) /„Name“ (detalės pavadinimas) eilutės, reikia apsispręsti dėl įrenginio tipo/versijos.
Qty - Kiekis: naudojamas su atitinkamu nuorodos numeriu ir nurodo detalių kiekį. “AR” reiškia „As required“ (prireikus): dar nežinomas kiekis ar skaičius.
Name - detalės pavadinimas: angliškų pavadinimų vertimus galima rasti dokumente “Įrangos dalių terminai”.
Remarks - Papildoma informacija apie detalę.
Raidžių derinys gali rodyti, kad konkrečiai detalei sertifikuotą išdavė įgaliota institucija pagal sąrašo nurodymus ir taisykles.
Matmenys pateikti milimetrais.
2930 7052 03 7
Parts list
lv - INSTRUKCIJAS LIETOŠANAI
1. PASŪTĪŠANAS DETAĻAS
Vienmēr norādiet nepieciešamās iekārtas detaļas numuru, nosaukumu un daudzumu, kā arī tipu un mašīnas seriālo numuru.
Lappuses, kas apzīmētas ar apkopes simbolu - “ “ satur Apkopes komplekta(u) daļas. Pilnam komplekta satura pārskatam, skatiet nodaļu “1 - Service kits” (1 - Apkopes komple-
kti).
2. KOLONNAS INFORMĀCIJA
Ats. - Inventāra numurs: savieno atbilstošās saraksta daļas ar attēlu. Tikai detaļas ar inventāra numuru ir parādītas attēlā. Detaļas attēlā bez inventāra numura ir montāžai, vienkārši
paskaidrotas attēlā.
Part number – detaļas numurs: ja nav norādīts detaļas numurs, komponents nav pieejams kā rezerves detaļa. Treknrakstā parādītā līnija ir montāža. Detaļa, aiz kuras numura seko
melns punkts, ir ietverta tieši augšpusē treknrakstā drukātajā montāžā.
“<<< >>>” novirza uz citu sarakstu, kuram ir tāds pats nosaukums kā “Nosaukums”.
Kad kādas noteiktas detaļas numurs ir novietots zem līnijas “Ats.”/”Nosaukums” ir jāizvēlas iekārtas veids/versija.
Qty – daudzums: norāda detaļas daudzumu savienojumā ar attiecīgo inventāra numuru. “AR” nozīmē “As required” (pēc vajadzības): daudzums vai numurs, kuru jānosaka.
Name – detaļas nosaukums: angļu nosaukumu tulkojumus var atrast dokumentā “Detaļu nosaukumu vārdnīca“.
Remarks – speciāla informācija par detaļu.
Burtu rindiņa, saskaņā ar saraksta noteikumiem un kodiem, var norādīt, ka šo detaļu ir sertificējusi autorizēta organizācija.
Izmēri ir norādīti milimetros.
nl - INSTRUCTIES VOOR HET GEBRUIK
1 BESTELLEN VAN ONDERDELEN

Vermeld altijd het onderdeelnummer, de benaming en de hoeveelheid van de gewenste onderdelen, alsmede het type en het serienummer van de machine.
Pagina’s gemarkeerd met het servicesymbool - “ “ bevatten onderdelen uit servicekits. Voor de complete inhoud van de kit, zie paragraaf “1 - Service kits” (1 - Servicekits).
2 KOLOM INFORMATIE
Ref. - Referentienummer: koppelt een specifiek onderdeel in de lijst aan de desbetreffende tekening. Alleen onderdelen met een referentienummer zijn in de tekening afgebeeld.
Onderdelen zonder referentienummer die op de tekening voorkomen, worden slechts getoond om het samenstel te illustreren.
Part number - Onderdeelnummer: indien geen onderdeelnummer is aangegeven, is de betreffende component niet als reserveonderdeel verkrijgbaar. Een regel in een vet lettertype
is een samenstel. Een onderdeel waarvan het nummer gevolgd wordt door een zwart rondje, maakt deel uit van het vet afgedrukte samenstel direct erboven.
“<<< >>>” verwijst naar een andere lijst met dezelfde titel als de “Name” (benaming).
Als het onderdeelnummer van het desbetreffende onderdeel onder de regel “Ref.”/”Name” (Ref./Benaming) staat vermeld, moet er een keuze met betrekking tot het machinetype en
de machineversie worden gemaakt.
Qty - Aantal: geeft het aantal onderdelen aan in samenhang met het overeenkomstige referentienummer. “AR” betekent “As required” (benodigde hoeveelheid): de hoeveelheid of
het aantal moet nader worden bepaald.
Name - Naam van het onderdeel: vertalingen van de Engelse benamingen zijn te vinden in het document “Glossary of part names” (Woordenlijst van onderdelen).
Remarks - Extra informatie over het onderdeel.
Een reeks letters kan aangeven dat een bepaald onderdeel gecertificeerd is door het opgegeven bevoegde orgaan, in overeenstemming met de codes of voorschriften in de lijst.
Afmetingen zijn in millimeters vermeld.
no - BRUKSANVISNING
1 BESTILLING AV DELER
Angi alltid delenummeret, navnet og antallet deler samt type- og serienummeret for maskinen.
Sidene som er merket med Service-symbolet - “ “, omtaler deler av servicesettene. Du finner informasjon om hele innholdet i settet i kapittel “1 - Service kits” (1 - Servicesett).
2 FORKLARING TIL KOLONNENE

Ref. – Referansenummer: knytter en bestemt del i listen til tegningen. Deler uten referansenummer vises ikke på tegningen. Delene på tegningen som ikke har referansenummer, er
tatt med for å illustrere monteringen.
Part number – Delenummer: Hvis det ikke er angitt noe delenummer, kan ikke delen bestilles som reservedel. En fet linje er en montering. En del som har et nummer som er et-
terfulgt av en svart prikk, er omfattet i monteringen med fet skrift ovenfor.
“<<< >>>” henviser til en annen liste som heter det samme som “Navn”.
Når delenummeret til en bestemt del plasseres under linjen “Ref.”/”Name” må man velge hva slags type/versjon maskinen er.
Qty – Antall: angir hvor mange deler som er knyttet til referansenummeret. “AR” står for “As required” (“etter behov”): Antall eller nummer må spesifiseres.
Name – Delenavn: Oversettelsene av de engelske navnene finner du i dokumentet Ordliste med delenavn.
Remarks – Anmerkninger: tilleggsinformasjon om delen.
Bokstaver kan indikere at en bestemt del er sertifisert i henhold til det autoriserte organet som er angitt, i samsvar med kodene eller reglene for listen.
Mål er angitt i millimeter.
pl - INSTRUKCJA UŻYTKOWANIA
1 ZAMAWIANIE CZĘŚCI
Zawsze podawać numer części, nazwę i ilość potrzebnych elementów, a także typ i numer seryjny urządzenia.
Strony oznaczone symbolem - “ “ zawierają części zestawów serwisowych. Pełną zawartość zestawów można znaleźć w rozdziale “1 - Service kits” (1 - Zestawy serwisowe).
2 OBJAŚNIENIA KOLUMN
Ref. - Numer referencyjny: łączy konkretną część z listy ze schematem. Na schemacie prezentowane są wyłącznie części posiadające numer referencyjny. Części na schemacie nie
mające numeru referencyjnego umieszczono w celu zilustrowania montażu.
Part number - Numer części: jeśli nie podano numeru części, dany element nie jest dostępny jako część zapasowa. Tekst wytłuszczony oznacza zespół. Część, po numerze której
występuje czarna kropka, wchodzi w skład wytłuszczonego zespołu wskazanego powyżej po prawej stronie.
„<<< >>>” służą do przechodzenia do innej listy o tym samym tytule, co w kolumnie „Name” (Nazwa).
Jeśli numer dla konkretnej części jest umieszczony poniżej wiersza „Ref.”/„Name”, należy wybrać typ/wersję maszyny.
Qty - Ilość: oznacza liczbę części w odniesieniu do odpowiadającego im numeru referencyjnego. „AR” oznacza „As required” (Wg zapotrzebowania): ilość zostanie uzgodniona.
Name - Nazwa części: tłumaczenie nazw angielskich można znaleźć w dokumencie „Glossary of part names” (Słownik części).
Remarks - Informacje dodatkowe o danej części.
Ciąg liter może informować, że dana część uzyskała certyfikat określonej, upoważnionej organizacji, zgodnie z kodami lub zasadami z listy.
Wymiary zostały podane w milimetrach.
8 2930 7052 03
Parts list
pt - INSTRUÇÕES PARA UTILIZAÇÃO
1 ENCOMENDA DE PEÇAS
Especificar sempre a referência da peça, o nome e a quantidade de itens necessários, bem como o tipo e o número de série da máquina.
Páginas marcadas com o símbolo de assistência - “ “ contêm peças de kits de assistência. Para ver todos os conteúdos do kit consultar o capítulo “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kits de
assistência).
2 INFORMAÇÃO SOBRE AS COLUNAS

Ref. - Número de referência: estabelece a ligação entre uma peça específica listada e o desenho. No desenho, apenas são mostradas peças com um número de referência. As peças
mostradas no desenho que não apresentem um número de referência servem apenas para ilustrar o conjunto.
Part number - Referência da peça: se não for indicada a referência da peça, o componente não está disponível como peça sobresselente. Uma linha em negrito representa um con-
junto. Uma peça cujo número esteja seguido de um ponto preto está incluída no conjunto impresso em negrito, imediatamente acima.
“<<< >>>” conduz a outra lista com o mesmo título de “Name”.
Quando a referência da peça específica se encontra por baixo da linha “Ref.”/”Name”, é preciso escolher o tipo/versão da máquina.
Qty - Quantidade: indica o número de peças relacionadas com o número de referência correspondente. “AR” significa “As required” (consoante requerido): quantidade ou número a
determinar.
Name - Nome da peça: é possível encontrar traduções dos nomes ingleses das peças no documento “Glossário de designações de peças”.
Remarks - Informação extra sobre a peça.
Uma série de letras pode indicar que uma determinada peça foi certificada pela entidade autorizada referida, de acordo com os códigos ou as normas da lista.
As medidas são indicadas em milímetros.
ro - INSTRUCŢIUNI DE UTILIZARE
1 COMANDAREA PIESELOR
Specificaţi întotdeauna numărul de reper, numele şi cantitatea articolelor necesare şi tipul şi numărul de serie ale maşinii.
Paginile marcate cu simbolul Service - “ “ conţin componente din kituri de service. Pentru conţinutul complet al acestui kit consultaţi capitolul “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kituri de
service).
2 INFORMAŢIILE DIN COLOANE

Ref. - Numărul de referinţă: corelează piesa respectivă din listă cu desenul. În desen sunt prezentate numai piesele care au numere de referinţă. Piesele din desen care nu au niciun
număr de referinţă se află acolo numai pentru a ilustra ansamblul.
Part number - Număr de reper: dacă nu este specificat niciun număr de reper, componenta nu este disponibilă ca piesă de schimb. O linie îngroşată reprezintă un ansamblu. Un
reper al cărui număr este urmat de un punct negru este cuprins în ansamblul tipărit îngroşat de deasupra sa.
“<<< >>>” direcţionează către o altă listă care are titlul identic cu “Nume”.
Când numărul de reper al piesei respective este plasat sub linia “Referinţă”/”Nume”, este obligatorie selectarea unui tip sau a unei versiuni a maşinii.
Qty - cantitate: indică numărul de piese corespunzătoare numărului de referinţă respectiv. “AR” înseamnă “Conform necesar”: cantitate sau număr care urmează a fi determinat.
Name - Nume reper: traducerile numelor englezeşti pot fi găsite în documentul “Glosar de nume de repere”.
Remarks - Informaţii suplimentare despre piese.
O serie de litere poate indica faptul că o anumită piesă a fost certificată de organismul de autorizare specificat, în conformitate cu regulile sau codurile listei.
Dimensiunile sunt date în milimetri.
ru - Правила пользования
1 ЗАКАЗ ДЕТАЛЕЙ
Всегда указывайте номер по каталогу, наименование и количество требуемых позиций, а также тип и серийный номер машины. Страницы, помеченные символом
Service - “ “ , содержат информацию о сервисном(ых) наборе(ах). Полное содержание сервисного набора приведено в главе “1 - Service kits” (1 - Сервисные наборы ).
2 ИНФОРМАЦИЯ О СТОЛБЦЕ
Ref. - Справочный номер: связывает деталь, указанную в списке, с чертежом. На чертеже показаны только детали, имеющие справочные номера. Детали на чертеже без
справочных номеров показаны только для иллюстрации сборки.
Partnumber - Каталожный номер: если каталожный номер не указан, то данный компонент нельзя заказать как запчасть. Жирным шрифтом показаны сборочные
единицы. Деталь, после номера которой следует черная точка, входит в состав сборочной единицы, набранной жирным шрифтом непосредственно над ней. Кавычки
“<<< >>>” ссылаются на другой список того же наименования, что и “Name” (Наименование детали).
Если каталожный номер находится под линией “Ref.”/”Name”, это означает, что необходимо сделать выбор в соответствии с типом/исполнением машины.
Qty - Количество: указывает количество деталей в соответствии с их справочным номером. “AR” означает “ As required” (По требованию): количество или номер
необходимо определить.
Name - Наименование детали: перевод английских наименований находится в “Glossary of Part Names” (Словаре наименований деталей).
Remarks - Примечания - дополнительная информация о детали. Ряд букв может означать, что конкретная деталь сертифицирована указанным уполномоченным лицом, в
соответствии с кодами или правилами в перечне. Размеры даны в миллиметрах.
sk - NÁVOD NA POUŽITIE
1 OBJEDNÁVANIE SÚČASTÍ
Vždy zadajte číslo súčasti, názov a množstvo požadovaných položiek a takisto typ a výrobné číslo zariadenia.
Strany označené servisným symbolom - “ “ obsahujú časti servisnej súpravy/servisných súprav. Úplný zoznam príslušnej súpravy nájdete v kapitole “1 - Service kits” (1 - Servisné
súpravy) .
2 INFORMÁCIE V STĹPCOCH
Ref. - Referenčné číslo: slúži na prepojenie konkrétnej uvedenej súčasti k príslušnému výkresu. Na výkrese sú zobrazené len súčasti s referenčným číslom. Súčasti bez referenčného
čísla na výkrese slúžia len na ilustráciu montážnej skupiny.
Part number - Číslo súčasti: ak nie je určené žiadne číslo súčasti, daný komponent nie je k dispozícii ako náhradná súčiastka. Riadok uvedený tučným písmom predstavuje
montážnu skupinu. Súčasť, za ktorej číslom nasleduje čierna bodka, je zahrnutá vo vyššie uvedenej hrubo vytlačenej zostave vpravo.
„<<< >>>“ smeruje na ďalší zoznam s rovnakým názvom ako v položke „Name“.
Keď sa číslo určitej súčasti nachádza pod riadkom „Ref.“/„Name“, je potrebné vybrať typ/verziu zariadenia.
Qty - Množstvo: označuje počet súčastí vzhľadom na príslušné referenčné číslo. Skratka „AR“ znamená „As required“ (podľa potreby): množstvo alebo číslo bude stanovené.
Name - Názov súčiastky: preklady anglických názvov môžete nájsť v dokumente „Register názvov súčastí“.
Remarks - Ďalšie informácie o danej súčasti.
Postupnosť písmen môže určovať, že určitá súčasť bola certifikovaná stanovenou oprávnenou inštitúciou podľa kódov alebo pravidiel v danom zozname.
Rozmery sú uvedené v milimetroch.
2930 7052 03 9
Parts list
sl - NAVODILA ZA UPORABO
1 NAROČANJE DELOV
Vedno navedite številko dela, ime in količino zahtevanih predmetov ter tip in serijsko številko stroja.
Strani, označene s simbolom za servis “ “, vsebujejo dele servisnih kompletov. Za celotno vsebino kompleta si oglejte poglavje “1 - Service kits”(1 - Servisni kompleti).
2 INFORMACIJE O STOLPCU
Ref. - Referenčna številka: povezuje določen navedeni del z risbo. Na risbi so prikazani samo deli z referenčno številko. Deli na risbi, ki nimajo referenčne številke, so namenjeni
samo prikazu sklopa.
Part number - Številka dela: če številka dela ni navedena, komponenta ni na voljo kot rezervni del. Vrstica z odebeljenim tiskom predstavlja sklop. Del, katerega številki sledi črna
pika, spada v sklop, natisnjen z odebeljenim tiskom neposredno nad njim.
“<<< >>>” vas usmeri na drug seznam z enakim nazivom kot “Name (Ime)”.
Če je pod vrstico “Ref.”/”Name” navedena številka dela za določeni del, mora izbira temeljiti na tipu/različici stroja.
Qty - Količina: določa število delov v povezavi z ustrezno referenčno številko. “AR” pomeni “As required” (kot je zahtevano): količina ali število za določitev.
Name - Ime dela: prevodi angleških imen se nahajajo v dokumentu “Pojmovnik z imeni delov”.
Remarks - Dodatne informacije o delu.
Zaporedje črk lahko pomeni, da je bil določen del certificiran s strani navedenega pooblaščenega organa, v skladu z zakoni ali pravili seznama.
Mere so podane v milimetrih.
sv - INSTRUKTIONER FÖR ANVÄNDNING
1 BESTÄLLA DELAR
Ange alltid reservdelsnummer, namn och antal delar som önskas, samt typbeteckning och tillverkningsnummer på maskinen.
Sidor markerade med servicesymbolen - “ “ innehåller delar av servicesatser. Hela innehållet i satsen redovisas i kapitlet “1 - Service kits” (1 - Servicesatser).
2 SPALTINFORMATION
Ref. - Referensnummer: kopplar ihop en viss reservdel i förteckningen med ritningen. Endast reservdelar med referensnummer visas i ritningen. Reservdelar som saknar referens-
nummer i ritningen finns med för att illustrera själva monteringen.
Part number - Reservdelsnummer: om reservdelsnummer saknas finns komponenten inte som reservdel. Monteringsanvisningar visas med fet stil. En reservdel vars nummer följs
av en svart punkt finns med i den fetstilta monteringsanvisningen direkt ovanför.
”<<< >>>” hänvisar till en annan lista med samma titel som ”namnet”.
När reservdelsnumret för den specifika delen är placerad nedanför ”Ref.”/”Namn”-raden måste ett val göras utifrån maskinens typ/version.
Qty - Antal: anger hur många delar som är kopplade till motsvarande referensnummer. “AR” betyder “As required” (som erfordras): antal eller nummer bestäms senare.
Name - Reservdelsbeteckningar: översättningar av de engelska beteckningarna återfinns i dokumentet “Glossary of part names” (Ordlista med reservdelsbeteckningar).
Remarks - Extrainformation om reservdelen.
En uppsättning bokstäver kan ange att en viss reservdel har certifierats av det befullmäktigade organet, enligt koderna eller reglerna i förteckningen.
Mått anges i millimeter.
tr - KULLANIM TALİMATLARI
1 PARÇA SİPARİŞİ
Gerekli öğelerin parça numaraları, ad ve miktarının yanı sıra makinenin tip ve seri numarasını da mutlaka belirtin.
Servis simgesi - “ “ taşıyan sayfalarda Servis kiti (kitleri) parçaları bulunmaktadır. Kitle ilgili tüm bilgilere ulaşmak için “1 - Service kits” (1 - Servis kitleri) bölümüne başvurun.
2 KOLON BİLGİLERİ
Ref. - Referans numarası: özel olarak listelenmiş bir parça için çizimden bağlantı sağlar. Sadece referans numarası olan parçalar çizimde gösterilir. Çizimde referans numarası bulun-
mayan parçalar sadece montaj işlemlerini göstermek için verilmiştir.
Part number - Parça numarası: parça numarası belirtilmemişse, bileşen yedek parça olarak bulunmamaktadır. Koyu harflerle gösterilen satır montajdır. Numarasından sonra siyah
bir nokta gelen parça, yukarıda koyu harflerle basılmış montaja dahildir.
“<<< >>>”, “Name” (Ad) ile aynı başlıkta bir başka listeye yönlendirir.
Belirli bir parçanın parça numarası “Ref.”/”Name” (Ref./Ad) satırının altına yerleştirildiğinde, makine tipi/modeli konusunda seçim yapılmalıdır.
Qty - Miktar: uygun referans numarasıyla bağlantılı olarak parça sayısını gösterir. “AR”, “As required” (Gerektiği gibi) anlamına gelmektedir: belirlenecek olan miktar veya sayı.
Name - Parça adı: İngilizce adların çevirileri, “Parça adları sözlüğü”nde bulunabilir.
Remarks - Açıklamalar: Parça hakkında ek bilgiler.
Bir dizi harf, belirli bir parçanın yasalara veya liste kurallarına uygun olarak özel yetkili bir makam tarafından sertifikalandırıldığını gösterebilir.
Ölçümler milimetre cinsinden verilmiştir.
zh - 使用说明
1订购零件
订购零件时必需指定零件号、零件名称、零件数量以及机器的类型和系列号。
在标有维修标记 “ ” 的页上有维修组件的部分内容。该组件的完整内容请参见章节“1 - 维修组件” “1 - Service kits” 。
2 每列内容的说明
Ref. - 图示编号：将零件清单中列出的零件与示意图中的该零件相关联。零件清单中仅显示有图示编号的零件。示意图中没有标注
图示编号的零件仅用来在图中帮助示意。
Part number - 零件号：如果某项没有零件号，则该项不可作为零备件供应。以粗体印刷的零件号表示这是一个装置。编号后面有一
个黑点的零件包含在其上面以粗体印刷的装置中。
“<<< >>>” 表示该装置的零件清单在手册中以同一名称另外分章单列。
如果指定的零件号位于“Ref.”(图示编号)”Name”(零件名称)列上，则订购零件时必须指明机器的类型/版本。
Qty - 数量：显示相应的图示编号的零件个数。“AR”表示“As required”：即根据需要确定数量。
Name - 零件名称：在文件“零件名称对照表”中可以找到对应的英文名称。
Remarks - 零件的附注。
一连串的字母表示某一特定零件依照标准或规定的要求已获得指定授权机构的认证。
10 2930 7052 03
Parts list
2930 7052 03 11
Parts list
Table of contents
1 Service kits................................................................................................................ 15
2 Drive arrangement - GA 55, GA 75........................................................................... 17
3 Drive arrangement - GA 90....................................................................................... 21
4 Air system - Air inlet - GA 55, GA 75......................................................................... 25
5 Air system - Air inlet - GA 90..................................................................................... 29
6 Air system - Unloader assembly - GA 55, GA 75...................................................... 31
7 Air system - Unloader assembly - GA 90.................................................................. 33
8 Air system - Air receiver............................................................................................ 35
9 Air flow and cooling system - Air-cooled................................................................... 39

10 Air flow and cooling system - Water-cooled.............................................................. 43
11 Oil system................................................................................................................. 47
12 Air outlet - Pack - Air-cooled...................................................................................... 49
13 Air outlet - Pack - Water-cooled................................................................................ 51
14 Air outlet - Full Feature - Air-cooled.......................................................................... 53
15 Air outlet - Full Feature - Water-cooled..................................................................... 57
16 Air outlet - Full Feature - Air dryer 1)......................................................................... 61
17 Cubicle - IEC - Marine Air System............................................................................. 67

18 Cubicle - IEC - Marine Air System Plus..................................................................... 73
19 Bodywork.................................................................................................................. 81
20 Standard option - UD 220+ filter................................................................................ 85
21 Standard option - UD 310+ filter................................................................................ 87
22 Standard option - UD+ filter - Parts........................................................................... 89
12 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Notes:
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
2930 7117 52 13
Parts list
1 Service kits
Ref. Part number Qty Name Remarks
1 Oil
2901 1700 00 Roto-Xtend Duty Fluid - 5 Litres

1 Air-/Oil filter kit
2901 9200 20 GA 55, GA 75
2901 9200 30 GA 90

2901 9200 40 1 Oil separator and scavenge line kit

1 Unloader kit
2901 1622 00 GA 55, GA 75
2901 1463 00 GA 90

2901 1453 00 1 Minimum pressure valve kit

1 Oil Stop Valve and Check Valve kit
2901 2018 00 GA 55, GA 75
2901 2012 00 GA 90

1 Thermostic valve kit
2901 1618 00 Tropical thermostat 75°C

1 Preventive maintenance kit 1)
2901 9200 80 GA 55, GA 75
2901 9200 20 • 1 Air-/Oil filter kit
2901 9200 40 • 1 Oil separator kit
2901 1622 00 • 1 Unloader kit
2901 1453 00 • 1 Minimum pressure valve kit
2901 2018 00 • 1 Oil Stop Valve and Check Valve kit

1 Preventive maintenance kit 1)
2901 9200 90 GA 90
2901 9200 30 • 1 Air-/Oil filter kit
2901 9200 40 • 1 Oil separator kit
2901 1463 00 • 1 Unloader kit
2901 1453 00 • 1 Minimum pressure valve kit
2901 2012 00 • 1 Oil Stop Valve and Check Valve kit

Drain wearing parts kit - EWD 330M
2901 0633 20 1 Pack
2901 0633 20 2 Full Feature

1 Element mounting kit
2901 2015 00 GA 55, GA 75
2901 2047 00 GA 90

1 Element overhaul kit
2901 1646 00 GA 55, GA 75
2901 1089 01 GA 90
14 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Service kits 1
1 Motor rebearing kit

2901 2016 00 GA 55, GA 75
2901 2011 00 • 1 Motor drive side kit
2901 2048 00 • 1 Motor non drive side kit

1 Motor rebearing kit
2901 2017 00 GA 90
2901 2010 00 • 1 Motor drive side kit
2901 2048 00 • 1 Motor non drive side kit

1) Preventive maintenance kits do not include Thermostatic Valve kit and Drain kit to do
complete 8000 running hours service.
2930 7117 52 15
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
3060 3090
3100
1030
1055
3080
3010
3020
1085
3110
2100
2095 2055 2050
3070 2060 2045
3050 1075
2030 2040
3030 2090 2035 2025
3040 2085
1060
1065 1070
4015 2080
2065
2015
1025 2020
1030 2075
1020
2070
1030 1095
2010
1015 4020
1010
1040
1090
1045 1035
1005
This document is our properety and shall not without our permission be altered,
Tolerances, if not indicated
ATLAS COPCO STANDAR
Name INSTR.
Material NOT AP
Treatment Not App
9820 9785 42-01ed00 Sc
Dr
16 2012-03-06 dphalke 2930 7117 52 Ve
00 9820978542 00.01
STATUS 00
Posi- De
Ed
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D Approved
Parts list
Drive arrangement - GA 55, GA 75 2
1 005 1616 7281 80 1 Service stage

1 010 1622 6600 00 1 Spacer
1 015 1625 5051 01 1 Key
1 020 1625 5050 01 1 Washer
1 025 0211 1409 00 1 Screw
1 030 1619 6032 00 3 Nipple (SPM)
1 035 0663 2107 84 1 O-ring
1 040 1622 8704 00 1 Nozzle
1 045 0147 1322 03 1 Hexagon bolt
1 055 1625 5052 01 1 Key
1 060 1625 5050 01 1 Washer
1 065 0211 1409 00 1 Screw
1 070 1622 9023 00 1 Spacer
1 075 1622 5501 80 1 Plug assembly
1622 3699 00 • 1 Magnet
0663 2107 89 • 1 O-ring
1 085 0101 1951 40 2 Dowell pin
1 090 0663 2103 22 1 O-ring
1 095 0147 1365 03 12 Hexagon bolt
2 010 1625 5980 20 2 Support
2 015 0147 1403 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 020 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 025 1625 5969 01 2 Antivibr. pad
2 030 0147 1362 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 035 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
2 040 1622 4752 30 2 Support
2 045 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
2 050 0147 1362 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 055 0301 2358 00 2 Washer
2 060 0147 1400 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 065 1625 7278 00 2 Support
2 070 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 075 0147 1403 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 080 1625 5970 01 2 Antivibr. pad
2 085 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 090 0147 1400 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 095 0301 2378 00 2 Washer
2 100 0147 1479 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 Motor assembly
1622 9033 04 GA 55 400V/50Hz Marine Air System
1622 9033 21 GA 55 400V/50Hz Marine Air System Plus
3 010 1622 9005 00 • 1 Gearbox
3 020 1622 8794 00 • 1 Bushing
3 030 0508 1100 85 • 1 Roller bearing
3 040 0335 2176 00 • 1 Circlip
3 050 1622 9046 00 • 1 Seal lip
2930 7117 52 17
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
3060 3090
3100
1030
1055
3080
3010
3020
1085
3110
2100
2095 2055 2050
3070 2060 2045
3050 1075
2030 2040
3030 2090 2035 2025
3040 2085
1060
1065 1070
4015 2080
2065
2015
1025 2020
1030 2075
1020
2070
1030 1095
2010
1015 4020
1010
1040
1090
1045 1035
1005
Tolerances, if not indicated
ATLAS COPCO STANDAR
Name INSTR.
Material NOT AP
Treatment Not App
9820 9785 42-01ed00 Sc
Dr
18 2012-03-06 dphalke 2930 7117 52 Ve
00 9820978542 00.01
STATUS 00
Posi- De
Ed
tion
Parts list
Drive arrangement - GA 55, GA 75 2
3 060 1088 1001 03 • 1 Warning mark

3 070 1622 9050 00 • 1 Nipple
3 080 0211 1406 03 • 6 Screw
3 090 • 1 Dataplate
3 100 0371 1100 13 • 1 Lifting ring
3 110 • 1 Motor
4 015 1 Gear motor
1622 3110 85 GA 55 7.5bar(e)
1622 3110 43 GA 55 8.5bar(e)
1622 3110 41 GA 55 10bar(e)
1622 3110 33 GA 55 13bar(e)
1622 3110 73 GA 55 100psig
1622 3110 33 GA 55 125psig
1622 3110 71 GA 55 150psig
1622 3110 25 GA 55 175psig
1622 3110 55 GA 75 7.5bar(e)
1622 3110 53 GA 75 8.5bar(e)
1622 3110 49 GA 75 10bar(e)
1622 3110 85 GA 75 13bar(e)
1622 3110 49 GA 75 100psig
1622 3110 45 GA 75 125psig
1622 3110 43 GA 75 150psig
1622 3110 73 GA 75 175psig
4 020 1 Gear element
1622 3110 86 GA 55 7.5bar(e)
1622 3110 44 GA 55 8.5bar(e)
1622 3110 42 GA 55 10bar(e)
1622 3110 34 GA 55 13bar(e)
1622 3110 74 GA 55 100psig
1622 3110 34 GA 55 125psig
1622 3110 72 GA 55 150psig
1622 3110 26 GA 55 175psig
1622 3110 56 GA 75 7.5bar(e)
1622 3110 54 GA 75 8.5bar(e)
1622 3110 50 GA 75 10bar(e)
1622 3110 86 GA 75 13bar(e)
1622 3110 50 GA 75 100psig
1622 3110 46 GA 75 125psig
1622 3110 44 GA 75 150psig
1622 3110 74 GA 75 175psig
2930 7117 52 19
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
3060 3090
1030
3100
1030
1055
3080
3010
1085 3020
3110
2040
3030 3050
2055
2060 2050
2100
2045
1035 1040 2095
1075
2025
2030
2035
1060 3070
1065 1070 3040
4015 2010
2090
2015
2085 2080
4020 2020
1015 1025
1095 2065
1020
2075
2070
1030
1010
1090
1030
1005
Tolerances, if not indicated, accord
ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLAS
Name INSTR.
Material NOT APPLI
Treatment Not Applica
Scale
Drawn by
9820 9785 43-01ed00
2012-03-06 dphalke Version D
00 9820978543 00.01
STATUS 00.01
Posi- Des chec
Ed
20
tion
2930 7117 52
Parts list
Drive arrangement - GA 90 3
1 005 1616 7146 83 1 Service stage

1 010 1622 4633 00 1 Spacer
1 015 1625 5056 01 1 Key
1 020 1625 5054 00 1 Washer
1 025 0211 1409 00 1 Screw
1 030 1619 6032 00 5 Nipple (SPM)
1 035 0663 2111 46 1 O-ring
1 040 1622 3793 00 1 Nozzle
1 055 1625 5055 01 1 Key
1 060 1625 5054 00 1 Washer
1 065 0211 1409 00 1 Screw
1 070 1622 9019 00 1 Spacer
1 075 1622 5501 80 1 Plug assembly
1622 3699 00 • 1 Magnet
0663 2107 89 • 1 O-ring
1 085 0101 1951 40 2 Dowell pin
1 090 0663 2109 78 1 O-ring
1 095 0147 1365 03 10 Hexagon bolt
2 010 1625 5980 20 2 Support
2 015 0147 1403 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 020 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 025 1625 5969 01 2 Antivibr. Pad
2 030 0147 1362 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 035 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
2 040 1622 4752 30 2 Support
2 045 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
2 050 0147 1362 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 055 0301 2358 00 2 Washer
2 060 0147 1400 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 065 1625 7278 00 2 Support
2 070 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 075 0147 1403 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 080 1625 5970 01 2 Antivibr. Pad
2 085 0301 2358 00 4 Washer
2 090 0147 1400 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 095 0301 2378 00 2 Washer
2 100 0147 1479 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 Motor assembly
1622 9038 04 400V/50Hz Marine Air System
1622 9038 21 400V/50Hz Marine Air System Plus
3 010 1622 9004 00 • 1 Gearbox
3 020 1622 8794 00 • 1 Bushing
3 030 0508 1100 85 • 1 Roller bearing
3 040 0335 2176 00 • 1 Circlip
3 050 1622 9046 00 • 1 Seal lip
3 060 1088 1001 03 • 1 Warning mark
3 070 1622 9050 00 • 1 Nipple
3 080 0211 1406 03 • 6 Screw
3 090 • 1 Dataplate
3 100 0371 1100 13 • 1 Lifting ring
2930 7117 52 21
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
3060 3090
1030
3100
1030
1055
3080
3010
1085 3020
3110
2040
3030 3050
2055
2060 2050
2100
2045
1035 1040 2095
1075
2025
2030
2035
1060 3070
1065 1070 3040
4015 2010
2090
2015
2085 2080
4020 2020
1015 1025
1095 2065
1020
2075
2070
1030
1010
1090
1030
1005
Tolerances, if not indicated, accord
ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLAS
Name INSTR.
Material NOT APPLI
Treatment Not Applica
Scale
Drawn by
9820 9785 43-01ed00
2012-03-06 dphalke Version D
00 9820978543 00.01
STATUS 00.01
Posi- Des chec
Ed
22
tion
2930 7117 52
Parts list
Drive arrangement - GA 90 3
3 110 • 1 Motor
4 015 1 Gear motor
1622 3692 41 7.5bar(e)
1622 3692 53 8.5bar(e)
1622 3692 33 10bar(e)
1622 3692 25 13bar(e)
1622 3692 33 100psig
1622 3692 43 125psig
1622 3692 25 150psig
1622 3692 19 175psig
4 020 1 Gear element
1622 3692 42 7.5bar(e)
1622 3692 54 8.5bar(e)
1622 3692 34 10bar(e)
1622 3692 26 13bar(e)
1622 3692 34 100psig
1622 3692 44 125psig
1622 3692 26 150psig
1622 3692 20 175psig
2930 7117 52 23
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5
4
2070
2065
2060
2070
2055
2050
2080
2075
3020
2035 3015
2010
2040 2080
2020 2025
2005
1186
1185 1160 1215

1220 1165
2045 1175 1186
1150 1176 1115
1130
1105
1170 1110
1155
1100 1120
1180 1125
1140
1135
1195 1205
1171
1145 1102
1210 1101
1185
1225
1190
1200
1205
1210
Tolera
ATLA
Name
Mater
9820 9785 44-01ed00 Treatm
24 2930 7117 52
2012-09-28 dphalke 00.01

Parts list
Air system - Air inlet - GA 55, GA 75 4
1 100 1625 8957 00 1 Housing

1 101 0571 0035 93 1 Nipple
1 102 0663 3119 00 1 O-ring
1 105 1613 2359 00 1 Piston
1 110 1 Nipple
1622 6613 03 GA 55
1622 6613 01 GA 75
1 115 0663 3130 00 1 O-ring
1 120 1622 9089 00 1 Valve
1 125 1622 5662 00 1 Spring
1 130 0686 3718 19 1 Plug
1 135 1622 9087 00 1 Plug
1 140 0663 3130 00 1 O-ring
1 145 1 Nipple
1625 5057 00 GA 75
1 150 1 O-ring
0663 3125 00 GA 75
1 155 1089 0574 70 1 Temp. sensor
1 160 1622 9639 00 1 Valve
1 165 1625 8407 00 1 Spring
1 170 0686 3718 24 1 Plug
1 171 0686 3718 16 1 Plug
1 175 0663 2106 57 1 O-ring
1 176 0663 2106 67 4 O-ring
1 180 0211 1964 74 4 Cap screw
1 185 0574 8000 45 1 Hose assembly
1 186 0574 8000 43 1 Hose assembly
1 190 1625 5955 00 1 Hose
1 195 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 200 0663 7136 00 1 O-ring
1 205 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
1 210 0211 1363 03 4 Screw
1 215 1 Nipple
0571 0036 19 GA 75
1 220 1 O-ring
0663 3119 00 GA 75
2 005 0663 7150 00 1 O-ring
2 010 <<< >>> 1 Unloader assembly
2 020 0147 1363 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 025 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
2 035 0663 2113 43 1 O-ring
2 040 0571 0036 13 1 Nipple
2 045 0574 8000 36 1 Hose assembly
2 050 1625 7691 00 1 Air filter
1622 1855 01 • 1 Filter element
2 055 1625 5935 00 1 Support
2 060 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
2 065 0147 1360 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 070 0147 1963 08 3 Hexagon bolt
2 075 1625 8270 00 1 Hose assembly
1613 7912 01 • 1 Indicator
2 080 0347 6119 00 2 Hose clip
2930 7117 52 25
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5
4
2070
2065
2060
2070
2055
2050
2080
2075
3020
2035 3015
2010
2040 2080
2020 2025
2005
1186
1185 1160 1215

1220 1165
2045 1175 1186
1150 1176 1115
1130
1105
1170 1110
1155
1100 1120
1180 1125
1140
1135
1195 1205
1171
1145 1102
1210 1101
1185
1225
1190
1200
1205
1210
Tolera
ATLA
Name
Mater
9820 9785 44-01ed00 Treatm
26 2930 7117 52
2012-09-28 dphalke 00.01

Parts list
Air system - Air inlet - GA 55, GA 75 4
3 015 1 Solenoid valve

1089 0702 13 50Hz
1089 0702 14 60Hz
3 020 1088 1001 01 2 Warning mark
2930 7117 52 27
Parts list
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
2070
2065
2060
2070
2055
2050
2080 2075
2080
3015
3020
2020
2025
2035
2040
2010
2045 2005
1195 1205 1210 1160 1165

1175 1176
1177 1178
1155 1100
1170
1120
1125
1105 1130
1102 1180
1101
1110 1115
1190
Tolerances, if not indi
ATLAS COPCO STAN
Name INST
Material NOT
Treatment Not
9820 9785 45-01ed00

2012/02/09 dphalke
9820978545 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
tion 28 Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model
2930 7117Approved
Ed . Version 3D
52
Parts list
Air system - Air inlet - GA 90 5
1 100 1622 9081 00 1 Housing

1 101 0571 0036 07 1 Nipple
1 102 0663 3125 00 1 O-ring
1 105 1613 2359 00 1 Piston
1 110 1622 6613 03 1 Nipple
1 115 0663 3130 00 1 O-ring
1 120 1622 9089 00 1 Valve
1 125 1622 5662 00 1 Spring
1 130 0686 3718 19 1 Plug
1 155 1089 0574 70 1 Temp. sensor
1 160 1622 9639 00 1 Valve
1 165 1625 8407 00 1 Spring
1 170 0686 3718 24 1 Plug
1 175 0663 2104 03 1 O-ring
1 176 0663 2106 67 2 O-ring
1 177 0663 2106 10 1 O-ring
1 178 0663 2107 09 1 O-ring
1 180 0211 1964 75 4 Screw
1 185 0574 8000 45 1 Hose assembly
1 186 0574 8000 44 1 Hose assembly
1 190 1625 4045 00 1 Flexible
1 195 0663 7138 00 2 O-ring
1 205 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
1 210 0211 1363 03 4 Screw
2 005 0663 2107 37 1 O-ring
2 010 <<< >>> 1 Unloader assembly
2 020 0147 1363 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 025 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
2 035 0663 2113 43 1 O-ring
2 040 0571 0036 13 1 Nipple
2 045 0574 8000 37 1 Hose assembly
2 050 1625 7692 00 1 Air filter
1613 9503 00 • 1 Filter element
2 055 1625 5935 00 1 Support
2 060 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
2 065 0147 1360 03 2 Hexagon bolt
2 070 0147 1963 08 3 Hexagon bolt
2 075 1622 0965 80 1 Hose assembly
1613 7912 01 • 1 Indicator
2 080 0347 6120 00 2 Hose clip
3 015 1 Solenoid valve
1089 0702 13 50Hz
1089 0702 14 60Hz
3 020 1088 1001 01 2 Warning mark
2930 7117 52 29
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5
6
1110
1100
1120
1130
1140
1090
1150
1050
1030
1180
1190 1040 1060
1080
1010
1070
1020
1170
1160
ed for manufacturing or communicated to any other person or company.
ment is our properety and shall not without our permission be altered,
9820 9785 46-01ed00

FIDENTIAL:
30 2930 7117 52
2011-11-24 dphalke
00 9820978546
Parts list
Air system - Unloader assembly - GA 55, GA 75 6
1622 3488 80 1 Unloader assembly

1 010 • 1 Housing
1 020 1622 3182 00 • 1 Guide
1 030 0663 2111 55 • 1 O-ring
1 040 1622 3184 00 • 1 Bushing
1 050 1622 3694 80 • 1 Blow-off valve
1 060 1622 3183 00 • 1 Seal
1 070 1622 3185 00 • 1 Spring
1 080 1622 3173 00 • 1 Tape
1 090 1622 3169 00 • 1 Piston
1 100 1622 3163 00 • 1 Cover
1 110 0335 2179 00 • 1 Circlip
1 120 0663 7149 00 • 1 O-ring
1 130 1622 3168 00 • 1 Ring
1 140 0261 1090 99 • 1 Nut
1 150 1622 3170 05 • 1 Bushing
1 160 1622 3164 10 • 1 Rod
1 170 1613 6818 01 • 1 Valve
1 180 0160 0996 86 • 2 Screw
1 190 0301 2318 00 • 2 Washer
2930 7117 52 31
1 2 3 4 Parts
5 list
1110
1100
1120
1130
1140
1090
1150
1080
1010
1020
1060 1070
1040
1030
1190 1050
1180
pied, used for manufacturing or communicated to any other person or company.
is document is our properety and shall not without our permission be altered,
1160 1170
9820 9785 47-01ed00
32 2011-11-24 dphalke 2930 7117 52

00 9820978547 00.00
Ed Posi- Date
Modified from Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D
Parts list
Air system - Unloader assembly - GA 90 7
1622 3489 80 1 Unloader assembly

1 010 • 1 Housing
1 020 1622 3182 00 • 1 Guide
1 030 0663 2111 55 • 1 O-ring
1 040 1622 3184 00 • 1 Bushing
1 050 1622 3694 80 • 1 Blow-off valve
1 060 1622 3183 00 • 1 Seal
1 070 1622 3185 00 • 1 Spring
1 080 1622 3689 00 • 1 Tape
1 090 1622 3687 00 • 1 Piston
1 100 1622 3649 00 • 1 Cover
1 110 0335 2182 00 • 1 Int. circlip
1 120 0663 7151 00 • 1 O-ring
1 130 1622 3691 00 • 1 Quadring
1 140 0261 1099 32 • 1 Hexagon nut
1 150 1622 3690 00 • 1 Bushing
1 160 1622 3686 00 • 1 Valve
1 170 1622 3688 10 • 1 Rod
1 180 0160 0996 86 • 2 Screw
1 190 0301 2318 00 • 2 Washer
2930 7117 52 33
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
8
2080
2070
2075
2065
2025
2060 2085
2090
2100
2095
2106
2055 2105 1010
2050
2045 2120
2125
4060
2040
2035 3010
2030 3015
2020
3040
2130
2015
2010
2155
3025 2160
3020 2165
3005
4030 4035
2170
4055 4025
4050 4020
2175 4015
4045
4040
4005
3035
3030
Tolerances,
ATLAS COP
Name
Material
Treatment
9820 9785 48-01ed00
34 2012-04-16 dphalke 2930 7117

00.01 52
9820978548 STATU
Posi- Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D Approve
Parts list
Air system - Air receiver 8
1 010 1 Safety valve

1202 5749 00 GA 55 7.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 55 8.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 55 10bar(e)
1202 5401 00 GA 55 13bar(e)
1613 5452 00 GA 55 100psig
1613 5452 00 GA 55 125psig
1613 5452 00 GA 55 150psig
1613 7810 00 GA 55 175psig
1202 5749 00 GA 75 7.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 75 8.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 75 10bar(e)
1202 5401 00 GA 75 13bar(e)
1613 5452 00 GA 75 100psig
1613 5452 00 GA 75 125psig
1613 5452 00 GA 75 150psig
1613 7810 00 GA 75 175psig
1202 5749 00 GA 90 7.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 90 8.5bar(e)
1202 5749 00 GA 90 10bar(e)
1202 5401 00 GA 90 13bar(e)
1613 5452 00 GA 90 100psig
1613 5452 00 GA 90 125psig
1613 5452 00 GA 90 150psig
1613 7810 00 GA 90 175psig
1 Vessel assembly
1625 5931 99 ASME
1625 5931 99 CE
2 010 1625 7252 00 • 1 Shield
2 015 1625 7253 00 • 1 Separator
2 020 0147 1244 03 • 1 Hexagon bolt
2 025 0663 2104 78 • 1 O-ring
2 030 1613 3222 00 • 1 Washer
2 035 1613 3223 01 • 1 Seal
2 040 1613 3221 00 • 1 Piston valve
2 045 1622 3662 00 • 1 Spring
2 050 0663 2101 01 • 1 O-ring
2 055 1622 3663 00 • 1 Piston
2 060 1622 3664 00 • 1 Spring
2 065 0301 2335 00 • 4 Washer
2 070 1625 7277 00 • 1 Valve housing
2 075 0211 1328 03 • 4 Cap screw
2 080 0335 3111 00 • 1 Circlip
2 085 1622 4867 00 • 1 Nipple
2 090 0663 3119 00 • 2 O-ring
2 095 1613 9005 01 • 1 Non return valve
2 100 0663 2108 11 • 1 O-ring
2 105 1625 7254 00 • 1 Pipe
2 106 0663 2113 43 • 1 O-ring
2 115 0661 1000 39 • 1 Washer
2 120 0571 0035 94 • 1 Nipple
2 125 0663 3125 00 • 1 O-ring
2 130 0663 2106 95 • 1 O-ring
2 135 0605 8700 51 • 1 Bushing
2930 7117 52 35
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
8
2080
2070
2075
2065
2025
2060 2085
2090
2100
2095
2106
2055 2105 1010
2050
2045 2120
2125
4060
2040
2035 3010
2030 3015
2020
3040
2130
2015
2010
2155
3025 2160
3020 2165
3005
4030 4035
2170
4055 4025
4050 4020
2175 4015
4045
4040
4005
3035
3030
Tolerances,
ATLAS COP
Name
Material
Treatment
9820 9785 48-01ed00
36 2012-04-16 dphalke 2930 7117

00.01 52
9820978548 STATU
Posi- Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Ed . Version 3D Approve
Parts list
Air system - Air receiver 8
2 155 1202 8992 00 • 1 Plug

2 160 0663 3130 00 • 1 O-ring
2 165 1513 0168 00 • 1 Sight glass
2 170 0571 0036 01 • 1 Nipple
2 175 1625 5934 00 • 1 Nipple
• 1 Vessel
1625 7251 99 ASME
1625 7251 99 CE
3 005 •• 1 Vessel
3 010 0147 1107 92 •• 8 Hexagon bolt
3 015 1625 7250 00 •• 1 Cover
3 020 •• 1 Data plate
3 025 0244 4184 00 •• 4 Screw
3 030 1625 7620 00 •• 1 Plug
3 035 0663 2115 45 •• 1 O-ring
3 040 0663 2107 49 •• 1 O-ring
4 005 0392 1100 25 4 Vibration damper
4 015 0333 3227 00 1 Lock washer
4 020 1613 8967 12 1 Grounding
4 025 0226 0301 00 1 Screw
4 030 0301 2335 00 4 Washer
4 035 0266 2110 00 4 Nut
4 040 1625 7302 00 3 Washer
4 045 0147 1964 20 3 Hexagon bolt
4 050 0852 0010 22 1 Ball valve
4 055 0686 3718 16 1 Plug
4 060 1089 0637 29 1 Switch
2930 7117 52 37
Parts list
9
1 2 3 4 5 6
2016
2030
2015
2035
2010
2040
2025
2005 1035 1030

2020
1015
1005
1020
1025
1010
1070
1065
1040
1050
1050
1045
1060
1055 1060
1055
Tolerance
ATLAS CO
Name
Material
Treatmen
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9785 49-01ed00

2012/02/20 tmulay ,
00 9820978549 00.00
STA
Posi-
38
Ed
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model 2930Ed
7117 52 3D
. Version Approv
Parts list
Air flow and cooling system - Air-cooled 9
1 005 1 Cooler plate

1625 5920 80 GA 55
1625 5921 80 GA 75
1625 5910 80 GA 90
• 1 Plate
0196 1552 79 • 2 Set screw
1202 6584 00 • AR Seal
1 010 1 After cooler
1625 5944 01 GA 55
1625 5944 03 GA 75
1625 5944 05 GA 90
1 015 4 Hexagon bolt
0147 1323 03 GA 55
1079 1472 05 GA 75
1079 1472 05 GA 90
1 020 0301 2335 00 4 Washer
1 025 1 Oil cooler
1625 5945 01 GA 55
1625 5945 03 GA 75
1625 5945 05 GA 90
0147 1323 03 GA 55
1079 1472 05 GA 75
1079 1472 05 GA 90
1 035 0301 2335 00 4 Washer
1 040 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 045 1 Hose
1625 5953 00 GA 55
1625 5953 00 GA 75
1625 4012 00 GA 90
1 050 0663 7138 00 2 O-ring
1 055 0211 1363 03 4 Screw
1 060 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
1 065 1 Hose assembly
0574 8000 39 GA 55
0574 8000 40 GA 75
0574 8000 40 GA 90
1 070 1 Hose assembly
0574 8000 41 GA 55
0574 8000 42 GA 75
0574 8000 42 GA 90
2 005 1 Fan
1625 2552 61 GA 55 400V/50Hz
1625 5949 71 GA 55 460V/60Hz
1625 5949 76 GA 55 690V/60Hz
1625 2552 61 GA 75 400V/50Hz
1625 5949 71 GA 75 460V/60Hz
1625 5949 76 GA 75 690V/60Hz
1625 2552 22 GA 90 400V/50Hz
1625 5949 31 GA 90 460V/60Hz
1625 5949 35 GA 90 690V/60Hz
2 010 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
2 015 1625 5914 80 1 Baffle 1)
1625 5936 00 • 2 Plate
2930 7117 52 39
Parts list
9
1 2 3 4 5 6
2016
2030
2015
2035
2010
2040
2025
2005 1035 1030

2020
1015
1005
1020
1025
1010
1070
1065
1040
1050
1050
1045
1060
1055 1060
1055
Tolerance
ATLAS CO
Name
Material
Treatmen
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9785 49-01ed00

2012/02/20 tmulay ,
00 9820978549 00.00
STA
Posi-
40
Ed
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model 2930Ed
7117 52 3D
. Version Approv
Parts list
Air flow and cooling system - Air-cooled 9
1079 9901 18 • 1 Decal

2 016 0147 1963 08 5 Hexagon bolt
2 020 1625 5911 80 1 Baffle 1)
1625 5936 00 • 2 Plate
1079 9901 18 • 1 Decal
2 025 0147 1963 08 3 Hexagon bolt
2 030 1625 5917 80 1 Support 1)
1202 6584 00 • AR Seal
2 035 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
2 040 0129 3270 60 5 Blind rivet

1) Lined with:
Foam: 0395 6001 66 (AR) 25 x 2040 x 1650 (self-adhesive)

2930 7117 52 41
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5
10
1015
1170
1175 1280
1170
1175
1030
1150
1005
1300
1075
1040 1035
1075
1070 1275
1160 1010
1165
1135
1110
1105
1025
1135 1020
1065
1066
1085 1080 1120

1100 1115
1090 1270
1205
1130
1125 1192
1145 1140
1191
1216
1265
1285
1290
1180 1193 1192

1191
1193
1216
1185
1200
1060
1195
1055
1045 1050
1060
1055 1050
1217
Tolera
ATLAS
Name
Mater
9820 9785 50-01ed00 Treatm
42 2930 7117 52
2012-04-26 dphalke
9820978550 00.01
Parts list
Air flow and cooling system - Water-cooled 10
1 005 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt

1 010 1625 4064 00 1 Support
1 015 1625 8212 00 1 Heat exchanger
1 020 0275 1110 05 4 Nut
1 025 0333 3227 00 4 Lock washer
1 030 1625 8213 00 1 Heat exchanger
1 035 0275 1110 05 3 Nut
1 040 0333 3227 00 3 Lock washer
1 045 1625 7649 00 1 Hose
1 050 0211 1363 03 4 Screw
1 055 0301 2344 00 4 Washer
1 060 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 065 1613 9370 83 1 Water separator
0663 6147 00 • 1 O-ring Ø3x114.5
0663 6136 00 • 1 O-ring Ø3x59.5
0663 2111 27 • 1 O-ring Ø3x31.5
1 066 0663 3119 00 1 O-ring
1 070 0686 3718 17 1 Plug
1 075 0686 3718 15 2 Plug
1 080 1625 8282 00 1 Pipe coupling
1 085 0583 8120 74 1 Fitting pipe
1 090 0583 8120 81 1 Fitting pipe
1 100 0661 1000 38 1 Seal washer
1 105 0147 1474 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 110 0301 2378 00 2 Washer
1 115 1625 2007 00 1 Pipe
1 120 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 125 0211 1363 03 2 Screw
1 130 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 135 0663 3143 00 2 O-ring
1 140 0147 1476 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 145 0301 2378 00 2 Washer
1 150 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 160 0147 1476 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 165 0301 2378 00 2 Washer
1 170 0663 2105 99 2 O-ring
1 175 0571 0036 47 2 Nipple
1 180 1625 7659 00 1 Pipe
1 185 1625 7658 00 1 Pipe
1 191 1625 5985 00 2 Plate
1 192 0129 3270 60 4 Rivet
1 193 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 195 1625 4047 00 1 Pipe
1 200 0574 8000 63 1 Hose assembly
1 205 0574 8000 64 1 Hose assembly
1 216 1089 0574 70 2 Temp. sensor
1 217 2 Connector + cable 2)
1622 0663 01 Marine Air System
1622 0663 11 Marine Air System Plus
1 265 1079 9913 79 1 Inform. label
1 270 1079 9913 69 1 Inform. label
1 275 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 280 1625 4013 80 1 Baffle 1)
1619 2758 00 • 1 Seal
2930 7117 52 43
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5
10
1015
1170
1175 1280
1170
1175
1030
1150
1005
1300
1075
1040 1035
1075
1070 1275
1160 1010
1165
1135
1110
1105
1025
1135 1020
1065
1066
1085 1080 1120

1100 1115
1090 1270
1205
1130
1125 1192
1145 1140
1191
1216
1265
1285
1290
1180 1193 1192

1191
1193
1216
1185
1200
1060
1195
1055
1045 1050
1060
1055 1050
1217
Tolera
ATLAS
Name
Mater
9820 9785 50-01ed00 Treatm
44 2930 7117 52
2012-04-26 dphalke
9820978550 00.01
Parts list
Air flow and cooling system - Water-cooled 10
1 285 1625 4065 00 1 Plate

1 290 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 300 1625 2006 00 1 Hose assembly

1) Lined with:
2) Located in „Cubicle“
2930 7117 52 45
Parts list
1 2 3 4 5 6
11
1050
1030
1020
1070 1055 2005 1015 1025

1065 1035
1060 1040
1045
1015 1015
1016
1010
1020 1015
1020
1080
1031
Toleranc
ATLAS
Name
Materia
Treatme
9820 9786 38-01ed00
46 2930 7117 52
2012/10/08 tmulay ,
9820978638 00.02
S
Parts list
Oil system 11
1 010 1622 9094 00 1 Housing filter

1 015 0663 3130 00 4 O-ring
1 016 1625 8915 00 1 Nipple
1 020 0571 0036 01 3 Nipple
1 025 1625 7527 00 2 Nipple
1 030 2 Oil filter
1625 7526 00 Roto-Xtend Fluid
1 031 1 Label
1079 9925 87 Roto-Xtend Fluid
1 035 1625 5916 00 1 Support
1 040 0147 1321 03 4 Hexagon bolt
1 045 0301 2335 00 4 Washer
1 050 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 055 0663 2101 95 1 O-ring
1 060 1614 6118 00 1 Flange
1 065 0301 2321 00 2 Washer
1 070 0147 1246 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 080 0574 8000 35 1 Hose assembly
2 005 1 Thermostatic valve
1622 7064 03 75°C
2930 7117 52 47
Parts list
12
1 2 3 4 5
4010
1080
1055
1040
1020 1035
1025
1030
1015
4005
4015
4020
2120 2125 4025

2115
2100
2095
2090
2085 2110
3010 3060
2080 2105
T
48 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Air outlet - Pack - Air-cooled 12
1 015 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring

1 020 1625 5950 00 1 Pipe
1 025 0211 1363 03 2 Screw
1 030 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 035 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 040 1089 0575 54 1 Press. transducer
1 055 1622 1799 09 1 Cable
1 080 1625 4044 00 1 Seal
2 080 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
2 085 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
2 090 0583 8120 81 1 Fitting pipe
2 095 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 100 0583 8120 74 1 Fitting pipe
2 105 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
2 110 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
2 115 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 120 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
2 125 0581 0000 43 1 Bulkhead coupling
1622 8551 91 1 EWD 330M
3 010 • 1 Drain
3 060 1622 1799 08 • 1 Cable
4 005 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
4 010 0852 0011 05 1 Ball valve
4 015 0581 0000 35 1 Coupling
4 020 0661 1000 38 1 Seal washer
4 025 0852 0010 55 1 Ball valve
2930 7117 52 49
Parts list
13
1 2 3 4 5
4010
1095
1065
1040
1020
1035
1030 1025
1015
1031
4015 4005
4020
2100 2125 4025

2095 2120
2115
2090
2085 2110
3010 3060
2105
2080
g or communicated to any other person or company.
9820 9786 58-01ed00
50 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Air outlet - Pack - Water-cooled 13
1 015 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring

1 020 1625 8279 00 1 Pipe
1 025 0147 1367 03 2 Screw
1 030 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 031 0261 2111 00 2 Nut
1 035 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 065 1622 1799 09 1 Cable
1 095 1625 4044 00 1 Seal
2 080 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
2 085 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
2 090 0583 8120 81 1 Fitting pipe
2 095 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 100 0583 8120 74 1 Fitting pipe
2 105 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
2 110 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
2 115 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 120 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
1622 8551 91 1 EWD 330M
3 010 • 1 Drain
3 060 1622 1799 08 • 1 Cable
4 005 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
4 010 0852 0011 05 1 Ball valve
4 015 0581 0000 35 1 Coupling
4 020 0661 1000 38 1 Seal washer
4 025 0852 0010 55 1 Ball valve
2930 7117 52 51
Parts list
14
1 2 3 4 5 6
1065 1075
1050
4010
1080
1060 1055
1150
1005
1020
1040
1010 1015 1030

1035 4005
1145 1140 4020 4015
1025
2120 4005
1120 1125 2125 4025
2115
1135 2110
1130
1045
2085
2090 2100 3010 3060 2095
1100 1110
3010 3060
1095 2105
2080
Tolerances, if not indic
ATLAS COPCO STAN
Name INST
Material NOT
Treatment Not A
9820 9786 39-01ed00
52 2012/10/08 tmulay , 2930

00.03 7117 52
00 9820978639 STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
Parts list
Air outlet - Full Feature - Air-cooled 14
1 005 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring

1 010 0211 1363 03 2 Screw
1 015 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 020 1625 5952 00 1 Hose
1 025 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 030 0147 1363 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 035 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 040 <<< >>> 1 Air dryer
1 045 1079 1472 06 4 Hexagon bolt
1 050 1 O-ring
0663 2104 75 ID 171
0663 2104 98 ID 255
0663 2104 98 ID 286
0147 1363 03 ID 255 Marine Air System
0147 1363 03 ID 255 Marine Air System Plus
0147 1363 03 ID 286 Marine Air System
0147 1363 03 ID 286 Marine Air System Plus
1 060 2 Washer
0301 2335 00 ID 171
0301 2344 00 ID 255
0301 2344 00 ID 286
1 065 1 Pipe
1625 8220 00 ID 171
1625 8217 00 ID 255
1625 8217 00 ID 286
1 075 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 095 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
1 100 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
1 110 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
1 120 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
1 125 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
1 130 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
1 135 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
1 145 1079 9926 02 1 Label
1 150 1625 4044 00 1 Seal
2 080 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
2 085 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
2 090 0583 8120 81 1 Fitting pipe
2 095 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 100 0583 8120 74 1 Fitting pipe
2 105 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
2 110 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
2 115 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 120 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
2930 7117 52 53
Parts list
14
1 2 3 4 5 6
1065 1075
1050
4010
1080
1060 1055
1150
1005
1020
1040
1010 1015 1030

1035 4005
1145 1140 4020 4015
1025
2120 4005
1120 1125 2125 4025
2115
1135 2110
1130
1045
2085
2090 2100 3010 3060 2095
1100 1110
3010 3060
1095 2105
2080
Tolerances, if not indic
ATLAS COPCO STAN
Name INST
Material NOT
Treatment Not A
9820 9786 39-01ed00
54 2012/10/08 tmulay , 2930

00.03 7117 52
00 9820978639 STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
Parts list
Air outlet - Full Feature - Air-cooled 14
2 EWD 330M
3 010 • 1 Drain
3 060 • 1 Cable
4 005 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
4 010 0852 0011 05 1 Ball valve
4 015 0581 0000 35 1 Coupling
4 020 0661 1000 38 1 Seal washer
4 025 0852 0010 55 2 Ball valve
2930 7117 52 55
Parts list
15
1 2 3 4 5 6
1065 1075
1050
4010
1080
1060 1055
1150
1010 1015 1005
1025 1040
1030 1035
4005
1145 1140 4020 4015
2120 4005
1125 2125 4025
2100 1120
1110 2115
2090
1100 1135 2110
1130
2105
2085 2095
3010 3060
3010 3060
1095
2080
opied, used for manufacturing or communicated to any other person or company.
his document is our properety and shall not without our permission be altered,
Tolerances, if no
ATLAS COPCO
Name IN
Material N
Treatment N
9820 9786 59-01ed00
0056 293000.00
7117 52
2012-07-03 tmulay ,
9820978659 STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
Parts list
Air outlet - Full Feature - Water-cooled 15
1 005 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring

1 010 0211 1363 03 2 Screw
1 015 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 020 1625 5952 00 1 Hose
1 025 0663 7138 00 1 O-ring
1 030 0147 1363 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 035 0301 2344 00 2 Washer
1 040 <<< >>> 1 Air dryer
1 045 1079 1472 06 4 Hexagon bolt
1 050 1 O-ring
0663 2104 75 ID 171
0663 2104 98 ID 255
0663 2104 98 ID 286
1 055 0147 1326 03 2 Hexagon bolt
1 060 2 Washer
0301 2335 00 ID 171
0301 2344 00 ID 255
0301 2344 00 ID 286
1 065 1 Pipe
1625 8220 00 ID 171
1625 8217 00 ID 255
1625 8217 00 ID 286
1 075 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 095 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
1 100 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
1 110 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
1 120 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
1 125 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
1 130 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
1 135 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
1 145 1079 9926 02 1 Label
1 150 1625 4044 00 1 Seal
2 080 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
2 085 0070 6002 06 AR Plastic tube
2 090 0583 8120 81 1 Fitting pipe
2 095 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 100 0583 8120 74 1 Fitting pipe
2 105 0070 6002 04 AR Plastic tube
2 110 0583 8100 66 1 Fitting
2 115 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
2 120 0583 8100 70 1 Fitting pipe
2930 7117 52 57
Parts list
15
1 2 3 4 5 6
1065 1075
1050
4010
1080
1060 1055
1150
1010 1015 1005
1025 1040
1030 1035
4005
1145 1140 4020 4015
2120 4005
1125 2125 4025
2100 1120
1110 2115
2090
1100 1135 2110
1130
2105
2085 2095
3010 3060
3010 3060
1095
2080
opied, used for manufacturing or communicated to any other person or company.
his document is our properety and shall not without our permission be altered,
Tolerances, if no
ATLAS COPCO
Name IN
Material N
Treatment N
9820 9786 59-01ed00
0058 293000.00
7117 52
2012-07-03 tmulay ,
9820978659 STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
Parts list
Air outlet - Full Feature - Water-cooled 15
2 EWD 330M
3 010 • 1 Drain
3 060 • 1 Cable
4 005 0070 6002 05 AR Plastic tube
4 010 0852 0011 05 1 Ball valve
4 015 0581 0000 35 1 Coupling
4 020 0661 1000 38 1 Seal washer
4 025 0852 0010 55 2 Ball valve
2930 7117 52 59
Parts list
16
1 2 3 4 5 6
4090
4200
4110
4230 4210
7050
4220
4070
3010 7060
2070 4080
2020 7100 4050 4100
4105
4150 6020
4060
7060 4120
4130
7130
4210
4160 4230
5040
4022 4220
5030 1020 5050 7110 7120 4200
7080 5010
2040
2060
2050 2030
5050
7150 5060
4140 4180 7030

7140 1010
7040
4030 7020
4190 4170
7010
7070
Tolerances, if n
ATLAS COPCO
Name I
9820 9786 54-01ed00 Material N
Treatment N
60 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Air outlet - Full Feature - Air dryer 1) 16
1 Air dryer
1624 9600 80 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 9600 81 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 9600 81 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1624 9601 80 ID 255 400V/50Hz
1624 9601 81 ID 255 460V/60Hz
1624 9601 81 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1624 9602 80 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1624 9602 81 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1624 9602 81 ID 286 690V/60Hz
1 010 1624 9506 80 • 1 Frame assy
6256 3700 00 •• 1 Grommet
0348 0111 06 •• 1 Connector
1079 9903 48 •• 1 Warning label
1079 9930 30 •• 1 Label
1 020 0348 0101 13 • 1 Cable tie
2 020 1617 0315 00 • 1 Ring
2 030 1617 0092 03 • 1 Ring
2 040 0147 1247 03 • 4 Hexagon bolt
2 050 0300 0274 64 • 4 Washer
2 060 0333 3220 00 • 4 Washer
2 070 1624 2451 00 • AR Insulation
3 010 • 1 Heat exchanger
1603 6401 00 ID 171
1603 6401 01 ID 255
1603 6401 02 ID 286
4 022 1089 9139 16 • 1 Switch
4 030 • 1 Capillary assy
1624 9617 05 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 9617 04 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 9617 04 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1624 9733 08 ID 255 400V/50Hz
1624 9733 05 ID 255 460V/60Hz
1624 9733 05 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1624 9733 06 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1624 9733 05 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1624 9733 05 ID 286 690V/60Hz
4 050 0348 0101 13 • 1 Cable tie
4 060 1624 2293 00 • 1 Filter dryer
4 070 0348 0110 03 • 1 Anchor plate
4 080 0226 3343 07 • 1 Screw
4 090 • 1 Condenser
1624 9500 00 ID 171
1624 9921 00 ID 255
1624 9921 00 ID 286
4 100 0226 3256 00 • 4 Screw
4 105 0300 0274 70 • 4 Washer
4 110 1617 2385 00 • 1 Rotation arrow
4 120 0348 0101 13 • 1 Cable tie
4 130 • Insulation
1624 2386 00 2 ID 171
1624 2386 00 2 ID 255
1624 9718 00 1 ID 286
4 140 1617 2361 00 • 1 Insulation
2930 7117 52 61
Parts list
16
1 2 3 4 5 6
4090
4200
4110
4230 4210
7050
4220
4070
3010 7060
2070 4080
2020 7100 4050 4100
4105
4150 6020
4060
7060 4120
4130
7130
4210
4160 4230
5040
4022 4220
5030 1020 5050 7110 7120 4200
7080 5010
2040
2060
2050 2030
5050
7150 5060
4140 4180 7030

7140 1010
7040
4030 7020
4190 4170
7010
7070
Tolerances, if n
ATLAS COPCO
Name I
9820 9786 54-01ed00 Material N
Treatment N
62 2930 7117 52
Parts list
4 150 1624 9614 00 • 1 Insulation thermal

4 160 • 1 Insulation thermal
1624 9711 00 ID 171
1624 9712 00 ID 255
1624 9712 00 ID 286
4 170 0348 0110 03 • 1 Anchor plate
4 180 • 1 Screw
0226 3343 07 ID 171
0226 3343 07 ID 255
4 190 0348 0101 13 • 1 Cable tie
4 200 • 2 Support
1624 9983 00 ID 255
1624 9983 00 ID 286
4 210 • 2 Hexagon bolt
0147 1249 03 ID 255
0147 1249 03 ID 286
4 220 • 2 Washer
0301 2321 00 ID 255
0301 2321 00 ID 286
4 230 • 2 Washer
0333 3120 00 ID 255
0333 3120 00 ID 286
• 1 Pipe assy
1624 9605 00 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 9605 00 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 9605 00 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1624 9728 00 ID 255 400V/50Hz
1624 9731 00 ID 255 460V/60Hz
1624 9731 00 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1624 9729 00 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1624 9732 00 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1624 9732 00 ID 286 690V/60Hz
5 010 1624 2486 02 •• 1 HGB valve
5 030 1617 0107 00 •• 1 Sleeve
5 040 1617 0314 00 •• 1 Nut
5 050 •• 1 Schraeder valve
1624 9352 00 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 255 400V/50Hz
1619 5563 07 ID 255 460V/60Hz
1619 5563 07 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1624 9352 00 ID 286 690V/60Hz
5 060 1624 9694 00 •• 1 Separator
6 020 1624 9517 00 • 1 Pipe assy
1624 9352 00 •• 1 Schraeder valve
7 010 • 1 Refr. compressor
1624 2615 08 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 2615 06 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 2615 06 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1617 4640 00 ID 255 400V/50Hz
2930 7117 52 63
Parts list
16
1 2 3 4 5 6
4090
4200
4110
4230 4210
7050
4220
4070
3010 7060
2070 4080
2020 7100 4050 4100
4105
4150 6020
4060
7060 4120
4130
7130
4210
4160 4230
5040
4022 4220
5030 1020 5050 7110 7120 4200
7080 5010
2040
2060
2050 2030
5050
7150 5060
4140 4180 7030

7140 1010
7040
4030 7020
4190 4170
7010
7070
Tolerances, if n
ATLAS COPCO
Name I
9820 9786 54-01ed00 Material N
Treatment N
64 2930 7117 52
Parts list
1617 4638 00 ID 255 460V/60Hz

1617 4638 00 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1617 4640 00 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1617 4638 00 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1617 4638 00 ID 286 690V/60Hz
7 020 1624 2698 00 • 4 Bushing
7 030 0147 1331 03 • 4 Hexagon bolt
7 040 0300 8019 00 • 4 Washer
7 050 • 1 Fan assy
1624 2390 80 ID 171 400V/50Hz
1624 2037 80 ID 171 460V/60Hz
1624 2037 80 ID 171 690V/60Hz
1624 9608 00 ID 255 400V/50Hz
1624 9609 00 ID 255 460V/60Hz
1624 9609 00 ID 255 690V/60Hz
1624 9608 00 ID 286 400V/50Hz
1624 9609 00 ID 286 460V/60Hz
1624 9609 00 ID 286 690V/60Hz
7 060 1088 1001 01 • 4 Warning mark
7 070 1624 1940 00 • 1 Wiring
7 080 1617 3077 90 • 1 Temp. sensor
7 090 1617 0128 00 • AR Heat conducting pasta
7 100 1624 9622 00 • 1 Press. switch
0147 1247 03 ID 171
0147 1326 03 ID 255
0147 1326 03 ID 286
7 120 • 4 Washer
0300 0274 64 ID 171
0300 8019 00 ID 255
0300 8019 00 ID 286
7 130 • 4 Washer
0333 3220 00 ID 171
0333 3227 00 ID 255
0333 3227 00 ID 286
7 140 0348 0101 13 • 4 Cable tie
7 150 0583 8100 71 • 1 Fitting pipe

1) Refrigerant R410A
2930 7117 52 65
Parts list
17
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label
1X3
F1
T1 F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1 1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
RACEWAY (50X75X400mm)
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
X240 X230 X220 X210 Fuse label
F7
1X3 1X3 F8 PE
K12
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
LAT Option heater

External contact M40 WH
M63 motor M63 motor
M50 dryer
X136a
X136b
1622 7302 00
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
2025
1015
1010
3100
3105
2030
2035 3065
1020
3075 3050
Tolerances, if not ind
ATLAS COPCO STA

3060
Name INS
3070 3045
Material NO
Treatment Not
9820 9786 42-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00.00 9820978642 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
66
tion
Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model Approved
Ed . Version 3D
2930 7117 52
Parts list
Cubicle - IEC - Marine Air System 17
1 Cubicle
1900 2299 01 GA 55 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 01 GA 55 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 02 GA 55 690V/60Hz
1900 2299 01 GA 75 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 01 GA 75 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 02 GA 75 690V/60Hz
1900 2299 01 GA 90 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 01 GA 90 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 02 GA 90 690V/60Hz
- 9820 6500 12 • 1 Assembly drawing
- 9820 6500 02 • 1 Service diagram
- 1622 3698 60 • 1 Wire harness
- 1613 8967 15 • 1 Earthing cable
F10-F11-F12
1089 0612 01 • 3 Fuse holder
F10-F11-F12 • 3 Fuse
1089 0612 61
1900 2299 01
F10-F11-F12 • 3 Fuse link
1089 9168 65 1900 2299 02
F15 • 1 Overload relay
1089 9446 54 1900 2299 01
1089 9424 15 1900 2299 02
1089 9446 71 • 1900 2299 01
1089 9446 66 • 1900 2299 02
K5 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
K15 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
K21 1089 9415 07 • 1 Contact block 1NO
K21 • 1 Contact block 2NO
1089 9415 55 • 1900 2299 02
K22 1089 9415 09 • 1 Contact block 1NO1NC
K23 • 1 Contact block 2NC
1089 9415 56 1900 2299 02
K22 • 1 Contactor
1089 9415 44 • 1900 2299 01
K21-K23 • 2 Contactor
1089 9415 61 • 1900 2299 01
K21-K22-K23 • 3 Contactor
1089 9415 44 • 1900 2299 02
1X0 0694 5281 34 • 3 Cable lug 1)
1X0:L123 1622 3042 00 • 3 Connection element 2)
1X0:L123 1089 9362 04 • 1 Terminal cover 4)
K23 1622 3042 00 • 3 Connection element 5)
M5 1089 9556 45 • 1 Grating
S3 1089 0362 51 • 1 Emergency stop button
S3 1089 9337 13 • 2 Contact block
S3 1089 0362 28 • 1 Collar
T1 • 1 Transformer
1089 9436 46 1900 2299 01
1089 9436 51 1900 2299 02
2930 7117 52 67
Parts list
17
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label
1X3
F1
T1 F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1 1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
F7
1X3 1X3 F8 PE
K12
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
LAT Option heater

M63 motor M63 motor
M50 dryer
X136a
X136b
1622 7302 00
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
2025
1015
1010
3100
3105
2030
2035 3065
1020
3075 3050
ATLAS COPCO STA

3060
Name INS
3070 3045
Material NO
Treatment Not
9820 9786 42-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00.00 9820978642 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
68
tion
Ed . Version 3D
2930 7117 52
Parts list
F1-F2 • 2 Fuse holder

1089 0612 01 1900 2299 01
1089 0612 05 1900 2299 02
F1-F2 • 2 Fuse
1089 0612 24 1900 2299 01
1089 0612 33 1900 2299 02
1X1:Y 1089 9427 48 • 1 Terminal
1X1:Y 1089 9427 49 • 1 Endplate
1X4-1X6-1X7 1088 0039 93 • 12 Terminal
1X4-1X6-1X7 1088 0039 95 • 6 Endplate
2x X104a-4x X104-4x X105-1x X150-1x X151-1x X106
1088 0037 99 • 13 Coding key
2X28 1088 0037 80 • 1 Connector female
X101:1-2-3 1089 9427 08 • 3 Terminal
X101:1-2-3 1089 9427 09 • 1 Endplate
X102a 1088 0031 65 • 1 Connector male
X102b 1088 0031 64 • 1 Connector male
X104A 1088 0039 05 • 1 Endplate
X104A 1088 0039 07 • 3 Terminal
X104-X105 1088 0039 11 • 2 Endplate
X104-X105 1088 0039 13 • 6 Terminal
X104-X106 1088 0039 25 • 2 Connector
X105 1088 0039 17 • 1 Connector
X106 1088 0039 02 • 1 Endplate
X106 1088 0039 04 • 2 Terminal
X136a-X136b 1088 0037 15 • 1 Terminal Gr/Ye
X136a-X136b 1088 0037 16 • 1 Terminal Grey
X136a-X136b 1088 0037 17 • 1 End and intermediate plate Orange
X150-X151 1088 0037 16 • 3 Terminal
X150-X151 1088 0037 17 • 1 Endplate
X151 1088 0039 26 • 1 Connector
X152 1089 9427 06 • 3 Terminal
X152 1089 9427 07 • 1 Endplate
X152:3 1089 9427 15 • 2 Coding key
- 1088 0851 20 • AR Raceway
- • AR Mounting rail
9139 5000 16 35x7.5
0090 1400 02 35x15
- • 1 Mounting Plate
1625 4002 00 • 1900 2299 01
- 1079 9925 69 • 1 Label
- • 1 Data label
- 1089 0577 58 • 9 End retainer
for hole options 0697 9809 24 • 1 Nut M40x1.5
for hole motor (left), for supply (bottom)
0697 9809 26 • 2 Nut M20x1.5
for hole options 0697 9810 29 • 1 Plug M40x1.5
2930 7117 52 69
Parts list
17
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label
1X3
F1
T1 F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1 1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
F7
1X3 1X3 F8 PE
K12
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
LAT Option heater

M63 motor M63 motor
M50 dryer
X136a
X136b
1622 7302 00
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
2025
1015
1010
3100
3105
2030
2035 3065
1020
3075 3050
ATLAS COPCO STA

3060
Name INS
3070 3045
Material NO
Treatment Not
9820 9786 42-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00.00 9820978642 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
70
tion
Ed . Version 3D
2930 7117 52
Parts list

0697 9810 31 • 2 Plug M63x1.5
for hole fan 0697 9809 21 • 1 Nut M20x1.5
WH 0697 9809 24 • 1 Nut M40x1.5
for hole fan 0698 5140 72 • 1 Cable gland M20x1.5
1625 5941 80 • 1 Cubicle box assembly 6)
1 010 •• 1 Cubicle
1 015 1625 7002 00 •• 1 Label
1 020 1202 6584 00 •• 1 Seal
2 025 1 Controller
1900 5200 12 Elektronikon® Mk5 Graphic
2 030 0147 1169 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 035 0301 2315 00 4 Washer
3 045 0697 9810 30 1 Plug M50x1.5
3 050 0697 9809 25 1 Nut M50x1.5
3 060 0697 9810 28 1 Plug M32x1.5
3 065 0697 9809 23 1 Nut M32x1.5
3 070 0697 9810 25 1 Plug M16x1.5
3 075 0697 9809 20 1 Lock nut M16x1.5
3 095 1 Nut M32x1.5
0697 9809 23 Air-cooled
3 100 1 Plug M20x1.5
0697 9810 26 Water-cooled
3 105 1 Lock nut M20x1.5
3 110 1 Nut M32x1.5
1900 2661 07 1 Dryer rail - Full Feature
- • 1 Mounting rail
0090 1400 02 35x15
- 1089 0577 58 • 2 End retainer
F7-F8-F9 1089 0612 01 • 3 Fuse holder
F7-F8-F9 1089 9168 65 • 3 Fuse link
K11 1089 9415 24 • 1 Contactor
K12 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
X104a (remove coding pin 3)
1088 0039 26 • 1 Connector
X152 (remove coding pin 3)
1089 9427 12 • 1 Connector
X210 - X230 - X240 1088 0039 04 • 10 Terminal/Connector
X210 - X230 - X240 1088 0039 02 • 3 Intermediate-end plate
X210:1-3 X220:1-2 X240:2-3-4
1088 0037 99 • 7 Coding key
1-4) For
1) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 44, 1089 9415 55
2) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 61
3) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 55
4) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 44, 1089 9415 55
5) On motorside of Contactor (K23) 1089 9415 61
6) Lined with:
2930 7117 52 71
Parts list
18
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label 1X3
F1
T1 T21
F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1
1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
F10
F11
F12
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
X240 X230 X220 X210
Fuse label
F7
1X3 1X3 K12 F8 PE
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
External contact
LAT HEATER
M40 WH
M50 dryer
X136a
1622 7302 00 X136b
M63 motor M63 motor
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
3100
1010
2025
1015
3105
2035 2030
1020
3065
3075 3050
Tolerances, if
ATLAS COPC
Name
3060
3070 Material
3045
Treatment
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9786 43-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00 9820978643 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
72 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Cubicle - IEC - Marine Air System Plus 18
1 Cubicle
1900 2299 03 GA 55 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 03 GA 55 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 05 GA 55 690V/60Hz
1900 2299 03 GA 75 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 03 GA 75 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 05 GA 75 690V/60Hz
1900 2299 03 GA 90 400V/50Hz
1900 2299 03 GA 90 460V/60Hz
1900 2299 05 GA 90 690V/60Hz
- 1613 8967 16 • 1 Earthing cable
- 1622 3698 61 • 1 Wire harness
F10-F11-F12 1089 0612 01 • 3 Fuse holder
F10-F11-F12 • 3 Fuse
1089 0612 61 1900 2299 03
F10-F11-F12 • 3 Fuse link
1089 9168 65 1900 2299 05
1089 9446 54 1900 2299 03
1089 9424 15 1900 2299 05
1089 9446 71 • 1900 2299 03
1089 9446 66 • 1900 2299 05
H96 1089 9337 11 • 1 Lamp socket + LED
K04‘ 1089 9511 15 • 1 Socket
K04‘ 1089 9511 51 • 1 Relay
K04‘ 1089 9511 57 • 1 Clip
K5 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
K15 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
K21 • 1 Contact block 2NO
1089 9415 55 • 1900 2299 05
K21 (ES100) 1089 9415 07 • 1 Contact block
K21 (Therm) 1089 9415 08 • 1 Contact block
1NC
K23 (P3) 1089 9415 08 • 1 Contact block
K23 • 1 Contact block
1089 9415 56 1900 2299 05
K22 • 1 Contactor
1089 9415 44 • 1900 2299 03
K21-K23 • 2 Contactor
1089 9415 61 • 1900 2299 03
K21-K22-K23 • 3 Contactor
1089 9415 44 • 1900 2299 05
1x0 0694 5281 34 • 3 Cable lug 1)
1X0:L123 1089 9362 04 • 1 Terminal cover 4)
K23 1622 3042 00 • 3 Connection element 5)
K34-K35 1089 9278 21 • 2 Thermistor relay
M5 1089 9556 45 • 1 Grating
2930 7117 52 73
Parts list
18
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label 1X3
F1
T1 T21
F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1
1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
F10
F11
F12
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
X240 X230 X220 X210
Fuse label
F7
1X3 1X3 K12 F8 PE
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
External contact
LAT HEATER
M40 WH
M50 dryer
X136a
1622 7302 00 X136b
M63 motor M63 motor
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
3100
1010
2025
1015
3105
2035 2030
1020
3065
3075 3050
Tolerances, if
ATLAS COPC
Name
3060
3070 Material
3045
Treatment
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9786 43-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00 9820978643 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
74 2930 7117 52
Parts list
P3 1089 9241 45 • 1 A-meter

P3 1089 9241 90 • 1 Joint
S3 1089 0362 28 • 1 Collar
S3 1089 0362 51 • 1 Emergency stop button
S3 1089 9337 13 • 2 Contact block
S96 1089 9337 90 • 1 Contact block
S96+H96 1089 0649 01 • 1 Switch
T1 • 1 Transformer
1089 9436 46 1900 2299 03
1089 9436 51 1900 2299 05
F1-F2 • 2 Fuse holder
1089 0612 01 • 1900 2299 03
1089 0612 05 • 1900 2299 05
F1-F2 • 2 Fuse
1089 0612 24 • 1900 2299 03
1089 0612 33 • 1900 2299 05
T21 1089 9272 45 • 1 Current transformer
1X1:Y 1089 9427 48 • 1 Terminal
1X1:Y 1089 9427 49 • 1 Endplate
1X4-1X6-1X7 1088 0039 93 • 12 Terminal
1X4-1X6-1X7 1088 0039 95 • 6 Endplate
1X8 (ES100) 1088 0039 93 • 2 Terminal
1X8 (Therm) 1088 0039 93 • 3 Terminal
1X8 (ES100) 1088 0039 95 • 1 Endplate
1X8 (Therm) 1088 0039 95 • 1 Endplate
2x X104a-4x X104-4x X105-1x X150-1x X151-1x X106
1088 0037 99 • 13 Coding key
X101:1-2-3 1089 9427 08 • 3 Terminal
X101:1-2-3 1089 9427 09 • 1 Endplate
X104A 1088 0039 05 • 1 Endplate
X104A 1088 0039 07 • 3 Terminal
X104 (ES100) 1088 0039 25 • 1 Connector
X104-X105 1088 0039 11 • 2 Endplate
X104-X105 1088 0039 13 • 6 Terminal
X104-X106 1088 0039 25 • 2 Connector
X105 1088 0039 17 • 1 Connector
X105 (Therm) 1088 0039 27 • 1 Connector
X106 1088 0039 02 • 1 Endplate
X106 1088 0039 04 • 2 Terminal
X136a-X136b 1088 0037 15 • 1 Terminal Gr/Ye
X136a-X136b 1088 0037 17 • 1 End and intermediate plate Orange
X150-X151 1088 0037 16 • 3 Terminal
X150-X151 1088 0037 17 • 1 Endplate
X151 1088 0039 26 • 1 Connector
2930 7117 52 75
Parts list
18
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label 1X3
F1
T1 T21
F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1
1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
F10
F11
F12
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
X240 X230 X220 X210
Fuse label
F7
1X3 1X3 K12 F8 PE
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
External contact
LAT HEATER
M40 WH
M50 dryer
X136a
1622 7302 00 X136b
M63 motor M63 motor
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
3100
1010
2025
1015
3105
2035 2030
1020
3065
3075 3050
Tolerances, if
ATLAS COPC
Name
3060
3070 Material
3045
Treatment
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9786 43-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00 9820978643 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
76 2930 7117 52
Parts list
X151 (Therm) 1088 0039 26 • 1 Connector

X152 1089 9427 06 • 3 Terminal
X152 1089 9427 07 • 1 Endplate
X152:3 1089 9427 15 • 2 Coding key
• 1 Main switch option
1900 2331 07 1900 2299 03
1900 2331 06 1900 2299 05
S10 1089 9445 20 •• 1 Main switch
- • 1 Mounting Plate
1625 4002 00 • 1900 2299 03
9139 5000 16 • 35x7.5
0090 1400 02 • 35x15
- 1088 0851 20 • AR Raceway
- 1079 9925 69 • 1 Label
- • 1 Data label
- 1089 0577 58 • 9 End retainer
for hole options 0697 9809 24 • 1 Nut M40x1.5
0697 9809 26 • 2 Nut M20x1.5
for hole options 0697 9810 29 • 1 Plug M40x1.5
0697 9810 31 • 2 Plug M63x1.5
for hole fan 0697 9809 21 • 1 Nut M20x1.5
WH 0697 9809 24 • 1 Nut M40x1.5
for hole fan 0698 5140 72 • 1 Cable gland M20x1.5
1625 5941 90 • 1 Cubicle box assembly 6)
1 010 •• 1 Cubicle
1 015 1625 7685 90 •• 1 Label
1 020 1202 6584 00 •• 1 Seal
2 025 1 Controller
1900 5200 12 Elektronikon® Mk5 Graphic
2 030 0147 1169 03 4 Hexagon bolt
2 035 0301 2315 00 4 Washer
3 045 0697 9810 30 1 Plug M50x1.5
3 050 0697 9809 25 1 Nut M50x1.5
3 060 0697 9810 28 1 Plug M32x1.5
3 065 0697 9809 23 1 Nut M32x1.5
3 070 0697 9810 25 1 Plug M16x1.5
3 075 0697 9809 20 1 Lock nut M16x1.5
3 095 1 Nut M32x1.5
0697 9809 23 Air-cooled
3 100 1 Plug M20x1.5
3 105 1 Lock nut M20x1.5
3 110 1 Nut M32x1.5
1900 2661 07 1 Dryer rail - Full Feature
- 1089 0577 58 • 2 End retainer
2930 7117 52 77
Parts list
18
1 2 3 4 5 6
1X8 X101 S10 PE

Fuse label 1X3
F1
T1 T21
F2
F3
K04’
K25
F3
F2
F1
K34
K35
F1/F2
RACEWAY (50X75X900)
E1
1X3 1X3
RACEWAY (50X75X230)
X150
1X1:Y
X151 1X7/1X6/1X4
K5 K15
X152
K23 K21
K22
X106
F10
F11
F12
X104A X105 X104
Q15
S3
F21
K11 F7 F8 F9
X240 X230 X220 X210
Fuse label
F7
1X3 1X3 K12 F8 PE
F9 1X3
X136A-X136B
External contact
LAT HEATER
M40 WH
M50 dryer
X136a
1622 7302 00 X136b
M63 motor M63 motor
COMBOX-E
AIR CONTACT
I/O 2
3100
1010
2025
1015
3105
2035 2030
1020
3065
3075 3050
Tolerances, if
ATLAS COPC
Name
3060
3070 Material
3045
Treatment
CONFIDENTIAL:
9820 9786 43-01ed00 2012-03-29 tmulay ,

00 9820978643 00.00
STATUS
Posi-
Ed
tion
78 2930 7117 52
Parts list
0090 1400 02 35x15
F7-F8-F9 1089 0612 01 • 3 Fuse holder
F7-F8-F9 1089 9168 65 • 3 Fuse link
K11 1089 9415 24 • 1 Contactor
K12 1089 9415 14 • 1 Contactor
X104a (remove coding pin 3)
1088 0039 26 • 1 Connector
X152 (remove coding pin 3)
1089 9427 12 • 1 Connector
X210 - X230 - X240 1088 0039 02 • 3 Intermediate-end plate
X210:1-3 X220:1-2 X240:2-3-4
1088 0037 99 • 7 Coding key

1-4) For
1) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 44
2) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 61
3) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 44
4) Contactor (K21) 1089 9415 44
5) On motorside of Contactor (K23) 1089 9415 61
6) Lined with:

2930 7117 52 79
Parts list
19 1 2 3 4 5 6
1025
6005
1130
1125
1140
1135
1045 4005
1050 1020
4030 3080
3010 3070
4035 4010
3090
3085
6010 3005
4025 1115
1120
1175 1070
1170 1065
4015
5010 1035 1010 1040 1150
1030 1010
1015
1010 1080
3060 1037
1036
1160 1055
1075 1060
1175
1155 1015 3045 5005
1165
3040
1015 2070 3065
2060
1105
1095 1100 1090
7070
7075 2060
1110
2070
2005
1145
1085 Tolerances
1090
ATLAS CO
Name
Material
Treatment
9820 9786 41-01ed00

2012-10-26 tmulay ,
00.01 9820978641 00.01
STAT
Ed80 Posi- Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model 2930Ed7117 523D
. Version Approv
tion
Parts list
Bodywork 19
1 010 1625 5913 00 3 Beam

1 015 0147 1963 08 6 Hexagon bolt
1 020 1625 4082 90 1 Panel 3)4)
1079 9926 02 • 1 Label
1 025 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 030 1625 5919 00 2 Beam
1 035 0147 1963 08 5 Hexagon bolt
1 036 1622 3632 00 4 Spacer
1 037 0211 1965 60 4 Screw
1 040 1625 4079 00 1 Baffle 5)
1 045 1625 4079 00 1 Support
1 050 0147 1963 08 2 Hexagon bolt
1 055 1625 5923 80 1 Baffle 2)
1619 2758 00 • AR Seal
1 060 0147 1963 08 6 Hexagon bolt
1 065 1625 5984 00 1 Plate
1 070 0129 3270 60 5 Blind rivet
1 075 1625 5988 00 1 Plate
1 080 0129 3270 60 5 Blind rivet
1 085 1625 5905 90 1 Panel 1)
1 090 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
1 095 1625 5922 00 1 Plate
1 100 0147 1963 08 1 Hexagon bolt
1 105 1625 5909 90 1 Door
1619 7705 00 • 2 Spring lock
1 110 1621 0607 00 3 Pin
1 115 1625 5926 80 1 Plate
1619 2758 00 • AR Seal
1 120 0129 3270 60 2 Blind rivet
1 125 0147 1963 08 7 Hexagon bolt
1 126 1619 5898 01 1 Hexagon bolt
1 130 1625 5903 90 1 Roof 2)
1 135 1625 5902 90 1 Panel 1)2)
1625 7646 00 • 1 Lock
1 140 1625 5901 90 1 Panel 1)2)
1625 7646 00 • 1 Lock
0690 1132 01 • 1 House mark
1 145 1625 5963 90 1 Panel 1)2)
1625 7646 00 • 1 Lock
1 150 1625 5964 90 1 Panel 1)2)
1625 7646 00 • 1 Lock
0690 1132 01 • 1 House mark
1 155 1622 7700 23 1 Support
1 160 0147 1360 03 1 Hexagon bolt
1 165 0291 1111 00 1 Lock nut
1 170 0384 9000 06 1 Spring gas
1 175 0357 1000 02 2 Stud
1625 5900 81 1 Frame
2 005 • 1 Frame
2 060 1079 9903 48 • 2 Decal
2 070 1079 9922 39 • 2 Decal
3 005 <<< >>> 1 Cubicle
3 010 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
3 040 1625 7676 00 1 Adapter
2930 7117 52 81
Parts list
19 1 2 3 4 5 6
1025
6005
1130
1125
1140
1135
1045 4005
1050 1020
4030 3080
3010 3070
4035 4010
3090
3085
6010 3005
4025 1115
1120
1175 1070
1170 1065
4015
5010 1035 1010 1040 1150
1030 1010
1015
1010 1080
3060 1037
1036
1160 1055
1075 1060
1175
1155 1015 3045 5005
1165
3040
1015 2070 3065
2060
1105
1095 1100 1090
7070
7075 2060
1110
2070
2005
1145
1085 Tolerances
1090
ATLAS CO
Name
Material
Treatment
9820 9786 41-01ed00

2012-10-26 tmulay ,
00.01 9820978641 00.01
STAT
Ed82 Posi- Modified from Date Intr./Appd. Parent 3D model 2930Ed7117 523D
. Version Approv
tion
Parts list
Bodywork 19
3 045 0697 9809 19 1 Lock nut

3 060 1089 9556 45 1 Fan
3 065 1089 9556 44 1 Fan
1089 9556 23 • 1 Filter
3 070 1089 0574 12 1 Temp. sensor
3 080 0989 4220 15 1 Grommet
3 085 1625 4005 80 1 Screen
3 090 0147 1208 03 3 Hexagon bolt
4 005 2 Data plate
4 010 1 Label
1622 4631 29 GA 55
1622 4631 30 GA 55 FF
1622 4631 31 GA 75
1622 4631 32 GA 75 FF
1622 4631 01 GA 90
1622 4631 02 GA 90 FF
4 015 1088 1001 01 1 Warning mark
4 025 1 Panel
4 030 0147 1963 08 4 Hexagon bolt
4 035 1622 7703 00 1 Handle
5 005 1089 9068 01 1 Key
5 010 1089 9154 02 1 Key
5 015 1088 1301 03 1 Cable strip
6 005 1625 5918 80 1 Baffle 1)
0989 4220 10 • 1 Grommet
6 010 1079 1472 06 4 Hexagon bolt
7 070 1 Transformer
1089 9610 04 690V/60Hz
0147 1963 08 690V/60Hz

1-5) Lined with:
1) Foam: 0395 6001 64 (AR) 20 x 2040 x 1650 (self-adhesive)

2930 7117 52 83
Parts list
20
1150
To Elektronikon 1120
1020
1015
1010
1035
1030
1025
1015
1005
1115
1040
1045 1055
1050
1608 2900 18-01ed00
84 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Standard option - UD 220+ filter 20
1 Standard option
8092 3657 51 UD220+
1 005 <<< >>> • 1 Filter
1 010 0211 1323 03 • 2 Screw
1 015 0663 2104 75 • 2 O-ring
1 020 1625 8219 00 • 1 Pipe
1 025 0266 2110 00 • 2 Nut
1 030 0301 2335 00 • 2 Plain washer
1 035 0211 1326 03 • 2 Cap screw
1 040 1617 7082 02 • 1 Coupling
1 045 0583 8100 69 • 1 Fitting pipe
1 050 0070 6002 05 • AR Plastic tube
1 055 0583 8100 70 • 1 Fitting pipe
1 115 1625 2500 00 • 1 Decal instruct.
1 120 1622 4660 90 • 1 Wiring
1 150 0147 1963 08 • 2 Screw
2930 7117 52 85
Parts list
21
1150
To Elektronikon 1120 1020

1015
1010
1035
1030
1025
1015
1005
1115
1040
1055
1045
1050
1608 2900 24-01ed00
86 2930 7117 52
1608 2900 24_01

Parts list
Standard option - UD 310+ filter 21
1 Standard option
8092 3657 69 UD 310+
1 005 <<< >>> • 1 Filter
1 010 0211 1360 03 • 2 Cap screw
1 015 0663 2104 98 • 2 O-ring
1 020 1625 8216 00 • 1 Pipe
1 025 0266 2111 00 • 2 Nut
1 030 0301 2344 00 • 2 Washer
1 035 0211 1363 03 • 2 Screw
1 040 1617 7082 02 • 1 Coupling
1 045 0583 8100 69 • 1 Fitting pipe
1 050 0070 6002 05 • AR Plastic tube
1 055 0583 8100 70 • 1 Fitting pipe
1 115 1625 2500 00 • 1 Decal
1 120 1622 4660 90 • 1 Wiring
1 150 0147 1963 08 • 2 Screw
2930 7117 52 87
Parts list
22
5010
3010
1050
1010
1020
2010
2020
3020
4020
6010
2030
88 2930 7117 52
Parts list
Standard option - UD+ filter - Parts 22
1 Filter
8102 2977 47 UD 220+
8102 2977 54 UD 310+
• 1 Element kit
2901 2072 08 UD 220+
2901 2072 09 UD 310+
1 010 •• 1 Filter element
1 020 •• 1 O-ring
0663 2110 31 UD 220+
0663 2111 60 UD 310+
1 050 •• 2 O-ring
0663 2109 65 UD 220+
0663 2116 69 UD 310+
• Drain valve kit
2901 0563 00 1 Automatic drain
2 010 •• 1 Drain valve
2 020 0663 2111 29 •• 1 O-ring
2 030 •• 1 Nut
3 010 • 1 Head
3 020 • 1 Bowl
4 010 1629 0267 00 • 1 Decal head
4 020 • 1 Decal bowl
1629 0266 05 UD 220+
1629 0266 06 UD 310+
5 010 1629 0298 04 • 1 Differential pressure gauge
6 010 0690 1104 01 • 1 House mark
2930 7117 52 89
Parts list
Notes:
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................
90 2930 7117 52
2920 7117 52 © 2015, Atlas Copco Airpower NV, Belgium. All rights reserved. Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation.
COMMITTED TO SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTIVITY
We stand by our responsibilities towards our customers,

towards the environment and the people around us. We
make performance stand the test of time. This is what we call -
Sustainable Productivity.
www.atlascopco.com
INSTRUCTION BOOK
HEATLESS ADSORPTION AIR DRYERS
CD 20+, CD 25+, CD 30+, CD 35+, CD 40+, CD 50+, CD 55+, CD 65+, CD 80+,
CD 85+, CD 105+, CD 125+, CD 150+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 195+, CD 225+,
CD 250+, CD 300+, CD 335+
Atlas Copco
Heatless adsorption air dryers
CD 20+, CD 25+, CD 30+, CD 35+, CD 40+, CD 50+,

CD 55+, CD 65+, CD 80+, CD 85+, CD 105+, CD 125+,
CD 150+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 250+,
CD 300+, CD 335+
CeraDes
Instruction book
Original instructions
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
drawings.
This instruction book is valid for CE as well as non-CE labelled machines. It meets the
requirements for instructions specified by the applicable European directives as
identified in the Declaration of Conformity.
2020 - 06
No. 2920 7196 80
www.atlascopco.com
Instruction book
Table of contents
1 Safety precautions..........................................................................................................4
1.1 SAFETY ICONS................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERAL...........................................................................................................4
1.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING INSTALLATION........................................................................................... 5
1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION.............................................................................................. 6
1.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR........................................................................... 7
1.6 DISMANTLING AND DISPOSAL.................................................................................................................8
2 General description........................................................................................................ 9
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 OPERATION.....................................................................................................................................10
3 Electric diagram............................................................................................................13
4 DC1 controller............................................................................................................... 14
4.1 CONTROL PANEL.............................................................................................................................. 14
4.2 MAIN SCREEN..................................................................................................................................15
4.3 SELECTION MENU............................................................................................................................ 16
4.4 ALARM SCREEN................................................................................................................................17
4.5 EDITING PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................... 18
5 Touch controller........................................................................................................... 22
5.1 CONTROLLER...................................................................................................................................22
5.2 CONTROL PANEL.............................................................................................................................. 24
5.3 ICONS USED.................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4 MAIN SCREEN..................................................................................................................................29
5.5 QUICK ACCESS SCREEN.....................................................................................................................30
5.6 MENU SCREEN.................................................................................................................................31
2 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
5.7 DATA MENU.....................................................................................................................................33
5.8 SERVICE MENU................................................................................................................................ 35
5.9 WEEK TIMER MENU...........................................................................................................................37
5.10 EVENT HISTORY MENU.......................................................................................................................38
5.11 MACHINE SETTINGS MENU.................................................................................................................. 39
5.12 CONTROLLER SETTINGS MENU.............................................................................................................43
5.13 ACCESS LEVEL.................................................................................................................................46
6 Installation.....................................................................................................................48
6.1 DIMENSION DRAWINGS.......................................................................................................................48
6.2 INSTALLATION PROPOSAL................................................................................................................... 48
7 Electrical connections..................................................................................................52
8 Operating instructions................................................................................................. 53
9 Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 55
9.1 MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................. 55
9.2 NOZZLE REPLACEMENT......................................................................................................................56
10 Problem solving............................................................................................................58
11 Technical data...............................................................................................................59
11.1 REFERENCE CONDITIONS................................................................................................................... 59
11.2 LIMITATIONS FOR OPERATION.............................................................................................................. 59
11.3 DRYER DATA................................................................................................................................... 59
12 Instructions for use...................................................................................................... 63
13 Guidelines for inspection.............................................................................................64
14 Pressure Equipment Directives...................................................................................65
15 Declaration of conformity............................................................................................ 66
2920 7196 80 3
Instruction book
1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety icons
Explanation
Danger to life
Warning
Important note
1.2 Safety precautions, general
General precautions
All responsibility for any damage or injury resulting from neglecting these precautions, or
non-observance of the normal caution and care required for installation, operation,
maintenance and repair, even if not expressly stated, will be disclaimed by the
manufacturer.
1. The dryers are designed for normal indoor use.

2. The operator must employ safe working practices and observe all related work safety
requirements and regulations.
3. If any of the following statements does not comply with the applicable legislation, the stricter
of the two shall apply.
4. Installation, operation, maintenance and repair work must only be performed by authorized,
trained, specialized personnel.
5. The dryer is not considered capable of producing air of breathing quality. To obtain air of
breathing quality, the compressed air must be adequately purified according to the
applicable legislation and standards.
6. Before any maintenance, repair work, adjustment or any other non-routine checks, stop the
dryer, press the emergency stop button, switch off the voltage and depressurize the dryer. In
addition, the power isolating switch must be opened and locked. For plug versions, remove
the plug from the wall socket and secure it.
7. Never play with compressed air. Do not apply the air to your skin or direct an air stream at
people. Never use the air to clean dirt from your clothes. When using the air to clean
equipment, do so with extreme caution and wear eye protection.
8. The owner is responsible for maintaining the dryer in safe operating condition. Parts and
accessories shall be replaced if unsuitable for safe operation.
9. It is not allowed to walk or stand on the dryer or its components.
4 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
1.3 Safety precautions during installation
Precautions during installation

1. The dryer must only be lifted using suitable equipment and in accordance with the applicable
safety regulations. Loose or pivoting parts must be securely fastened before lifting. It is
strictly forbidden to dwell or stay in the risk zone under a lifted load. Lifting acceleration and
deceleration must be kept within safe limits. Wear a safety helmet when working in the area
of overhead or lifting equipment.
2. Place the dryer where the ambient air is as cool and clean as possible. If necessary, install a
suction duct. Never obstruct the air inlet. Care must be taken to minimize the entry of
humidity in the inlet air.
3. Any blanking flanges, plugs, caps or desiccant bags must be removed before connecting the
pipes.
4. Air hoses must be of correct size and suitable for the working pressure. Never use frayed,
damaged or worn hoses. Distribution pipes and connections must be of the correct size and
suitable for the working pressure.
5. The aspirated air must be free of flammable fumes, vapors and particles, e.g. paint solvents,
that can lead to internal fire or explosion.
6. Arrange the air intake so that loose clothing worn by people cannot be sucked in.
7. Ensure that all piping is free to expand under heat and that it is not in contact with or close to
flammable materials.
8. No external force may be exerted on the air outlet valve. The connected pipe must be free of
strain.
9. If remote control is installed, the machine must bear a clear sign stating "Danger: This
machine is remotely controlled and may start without warning".
The operator has to make sure that the machine is stopped and that the isolating switch is
open and locked before any maintenance or repair. As a further safeguard, persons
switching on remotely controlled machines shall take adequate precautions to ensure that
there is no one checking or working on the machine. To this end, a suitable notice shall be
affixed to the starting equipment.
10. Air-cooled machines must be installed in such a way that an adequate flow of cooling air is
available and that the exhausted cooling air does not recirculate to the inlet.
11. The electrical connections must correspond to the applicable codes. The machines must be
earthed and protected against short circuits by fuses in all phases. A lockable power
isolating switch must be installed near the equipment.
12. On machines with automatic start-stop system or if the automatic restart function after
voltage failure is activated, a sign stating "This machine may start without warning" must be
affixed near the instrument panel.
13. Never remove or tamper with the safety devices, guards or insulation fitted on the machine.
atmospheric pressure must be protected by a pressure-relieving device or devices as
required.
14. Piping or other parts with a temperature in excess of 80˚C (176˚F) and which may be
accidentally touched by personnel during normal operation must be guarded or insulated.
Other high-temperature piping must be clearly marked.
15. For water-cooled machines, the cooling water system installed outside the machine has to
be protected by a safety device with set pressure according to the maximum cooling water
inlet pressure.
16. If no safety valve is present in the air net close to the desiccant dryer (e.g. safety valve of
compressor), full flow safety valves must be installed on the dryer vessels.
2920 7196 80 5
Instruction book
17. If the maximum pressure of the compressor is higher than the design pressure of the dryer,
a full flow safety valve must be installed between the compressor and the dryer in order to
blow off the excessive pressure. This is done in case the safety valve of the dryer is out of
order or blocked.
18. When unit is not permanently secured to the floor in the vertical position or mounted
horizontally, access to electrical equipment is feasible through the unit base. In this case,
additional barriers must be provided during installation. Tag with "Warning: High Voltage"
symbol
Also consult following safety precautions: Safety precautions during operation and Safety
precautions during maintenance or repair.
These precautions apply to machinery processing or consuming air or inert gas. Processing
of any other gas requires additional safety precautions typical to the application which are
not included herein.
Some precautions are general and cover several machine types and equipment; hence
some statements may not apply to your machine.
1.4 Safety precautions during operation
Precautions during operation

1. Always be careful when touching any piping or components of the dryer during operation.
On dryers using heat to regenerate the desiccant, some parts will become very hot.
2. Use only the correct type and size of hose end fittings and connections. When blowing
through a hose or air line, ensure that the open end is held securely. A free end will whip
and may cause injury. Make sure that a hose is fully depressurized before disconnecting it.
3. Persons switching on remotely controlled machines shall take adequate precautions to
ensure that there is no one checking or working on the machine. To this end, a suitable
notice shall be affixed to the remote start equipment.
4. Never operate the machine when there is a possibility of taking in flammable or toxic fumes,
vapors or particles.
5. Never operate the machine below or in excess of its limit ratings.
6. Keep all bodywork closed during operation. Bodywork should be opened for short periods
only, e.g. to carry out routine checks. Wear ear protectors when removing a panel.
7. People staying in environments or rooms where the sound pressure level reaches or
exceeds 90 dB(A) shall wear ear protectors.
8. Periodically check that:
• All guards are in place and securely fastened
• All hoses and/or pipes inside the machine are in good condition, secure and not
rubbing
• There are no leaks
• All fasteners are tight
• All electrical leads are secure and in good order
• Safety valves and other pressure relief devices are not obstructed by dirt or paint
• Air outlet valve and air net, i.e. pipes, couplings, manifolds, valves, hoses, etc. are in
good condition, free of wear or abuse
9. If warm cooling air from dryers is used in air heating systems, e.g. to warm up a working
area, take precautions against air pollution and possible contamination of the breathing air.
10. Do not remove any of, or tamper with, the sound dampening material.
11. Never remove or tamper with the safety devices, guards or insulations fitted on the machine.
6 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
atmospheric pressure shall be protected by a pressure relieving device or devices as

required.
12. Yearly inspect the air receiver. Minimum wall thickness as specified in the instruction book
must be respected. Local regulations remain applicable if they are more strict.
Also consult following safety precautions: Safety precautions during installation and Safety
precautions during maintenance or repair.
1.5 Safety precautions during maintenance or repair
Precautions during maintenance or repair

1. Always use the correct safety equipment (such as safety glasses, gloves, safety shoes,
etc.).
2. Use only the correct tools for maintenance and repair work.
3. Use only genuine spare parts.
4. All maintenance work shall only be undertaken when the machine has cooled down.
5. A warning sign bearing a legend such as "Work in progress - do not start" shall be attached
to the starting equipment.
6. Persons switching on remotely controlled machines shall take adequate precautions to
ensure that there is no one checking or working on the machine. To this end, a suitable
notice shall be affixed to the remote starting equipment.
7. Close the dryer air outlet valve before connecting or disconnecting a pipe.
8. Before removing any pressurized component, effectively isolate the machine from all
sources of pressure and relieve the entire system of pressure.
9. Never use flammable solvents or carbon tetrachloride for cleaning parts. Take safety
precautions against toxic vapors of cleaning liquids.
10. Scrupulously observe cleanliness during maintenance and repair. Keep dirt away by
covering the parts and exposed openings with a clean cloth, paper or tape.
11. Never weld on, or in any way modify, pressure vessels.
12. Whenever there is an indication or any suspicion that an internal part of a machine is
overheated, the machine shall be stopped. No inspection covers shall be opened before
enough cooling time has elapsed. This is done to avoid the risk of spontaneous ignition of
the oil vapor when air is admitted.
13. Never use a light source with open flame for inspecting the interior of a machine, pressure
vessel, etc.
14. Make sure that no tools, loose parts or rags are left in or on the machine.
15. All regulating and safety devices shall be maintained with due care to ensure that they
function properly. They may not be put out of operation.
16. Before clearing the machine for use after maintenance or overhaul, check that operating
pressures, temperatures and time settings are correct. Check that all control and shut-down
devices are fitted and that they function correctly.
17. Protect the motor, electrical and regulating components, etc. to prevent moisture from
entering them, e.g. when steam-cleaning.
2920 7196 80 7
Instruction book
18. Make sure that all sound-damping material and vibration dampers, e.g. damping material on
the bodywork, is in good condition. If damaged, replace with genuine material from the
manufacturer to prevent the sound pressure level from increasing.
19. Never use caustic solvents which can damage materials of the air net, e.g. polycarbonate
bowls.
20. The following safety precautions are stressed when handling desiccant:
• Check that the working area is adequately ventilated; if required, use breathing
protection.
Also consult following safety precautions: Safety precautions during installation and Safety
precautions during operation.
1.6 Dismantling and disposal
Dismantling
Once the end of life of the machine is reached, please follow next steps:
1. Stop the machine.
2. Check all safety precautions mentioned in the previous chapters to secure safe handling
(e.g. LOTO, cool-down, depressurize, discharge, ...).
3. Separate the harmful from the safe components (e.g. drain oil from oil containing parts).
4. Refer to the disposal topic mentioned below.
Disposal of electrical and electronic appliances (WEEE)

This equipment falls under the provisions of the European Directive 2012/19/EU on waste
electrical and electronic appliances (WEEE) and may not be disposed as unsorted waste.
The equipment is labelled in accordance with the European Directive 2012/19/EU with the
crossed-out wheelie bin symbol.
At the end of life-time of the electric and electronic equipment (EEE) it must be taken to separate
collection.
For more information check with your local waste authority, customer center or distributor.
Disposal of other used material

Used filters or any other used material (e.g. desiccant, lubricants, cleaning rags, machine parts,
etc.) must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly and safe manner, and in line with the
local recommendations and environmental legislation.
8 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
2 General description
2.1 General description
Introduction
The air dryers described in this book are heatless adsorption dryers, designed to remove
humidity from compressed air for industrial applications.
CD+ dryers are available in a version to reach a pressure dew point down to -20 °C (-4 °F) or
down to -40 ˚C (-40 ˚F) and are equipped with a DC1 electronic controller. An Elektronikon™
Touch controller, including a pressure dew point (PDP) sensor is available as option.
The dryers are designed for indoor use and at altitudes up to 2000 m (6560 ft).
CD 65+ with DC1 controller — General view
Main parts
An overview of the main parts of the dryer is given in the image below:
2920 7196 80 9
Instruction book
CD 65+ — Main parts
Reference Description Reference Description

1 DC1 controller 4 Silencer
2 Right tower 5 Air inlet
3 Left tower
A dust filter and a coalescing inlet filter are supplied loose (not shown in the images).
2.2 Operation
General
With its simple construction, the air dryer is both reliable and easy to service. A dryer module
basically consists of two towers, containing the adsorption material or desiccant. The ceramic
desiccant is able to adsorb large amounts of water vapor.
10 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Flow diagram
Reference Designation Reference Designation

AIR INLET Air inlet V4 Regeneration valve
AIR OUTLET Air outlet V5 Left check valve
A Left desiccant tower V6 Right check valve
B Right desiccant tower M1 Blow off silencer
V1 Left 3–2 valve (with solenoid valve) M2 Regeneration silencer
V2 Right 3–2 valve (with solenoid valve) N1 Nozzle
V3 Blow off valve
Depending on dryer size, the dryer may consist of a single dryer module (see flow diagram) or a
combination of several dryer modules in parallel.
Operation principle
The operation cycle of the dryer is repetitive and is controlled by a factory set timer in the
controller or by the pressure dew point (PDP) sensor, which is optionally available. While the
desiccant in one tower dries the compressed air, the desiccant in the second tower is being
regenerated. Regeneration of the desiccant is achieved by means of purge air from the drying
tower.
The compressed air entering the dryer is led to one of the towers by means of one of the two 3–2
valves. The position of the 3–2 valves is controlled by the solenoid valves. As the air flows
upwards through the tower, the desiccant adsorbs the water vapor and the compressed air is
dried. The dried air leaves the dryer via the outlet check valve.
A small portion of the dried air passes a nozzle, expands to atmospheric pressure and flows
downwards through the other tower, regenerating (drying) the desiccant. A nozzle for operation of
the dryer at 7 bar is installed as standard. Alternative nozzles for use at different operating
pressures may be delivered with the units. Contact your supplier. The regeneration air is released
via the corresponding solenoid valve and the silencer. The solenoid valves are controlled by the
timer.
2920 7196 80 11
Instruction book
After a preset period (or when triggered by the PDP sensor) the function of the towers is
reversed. The fully regenerated tower will now dry the air, while the desiccant in the other tower
will be regenerated.
By default, the regeneration timer will restart from the beginning of the cycle in case of a power
failure during operation or in case the dryer was switched off.
The working sequence of the controller is as follows:
Status Left tower Right tower V1 V2 V3 V4

0 Stopped Stopped 0 0 0 0
1 Adsorbing Adsorbing 0 0 0 0
2 Shifting Adsorbing 1 0 0 0
3 Depressurizing Adsorbing 1 0 1 0
4 Regenerating Adsorbing 1 0 1 1
5 Equalizing Adsorbing 1 0 0 0
6 Freeze (compressor Adsorbing 1 0 0 0
synchronization)
7 Standby Adsorbing 1 0 0 0
8 Adsorbing Adsorbing 0 0 0 0
9 Adsorbing Shifting 0 1 0 0
10 Adsorbing Depressurizing 0 1 1 0
11 Adsorbing Regenerating 0 1 1 1
12 Adsorbing Equalizing 0 1 0 0
13 Adsorbing Freeze (compressor 0 1 0 0
synchronization)
14 Adsorbing Standby 0 1 0 0
When the ON/OFF push-button is pressed during operation, the controller jumps automatically to
status 5 or 12 (equalization phase). After that, the Stop status (0) will be reached. The following
start command will restart the sequence from the state 2 or 9. The same happens when the
power is switched off.
12 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
3 Electric diagram
The complete electric diagram can be found in the electrical cabinet and in your technical
documentation.
Drawing number Controller type

9827 2940 00 DC1 controller
9827 2939 00 Touch controller
2920 7196 80 13
Instruction book
4 DC1 controller
4.1 Control panel
1 Display
2 ON/OFF button
3 LEFT button
4 ENTER button
5 RIGHT button
6 Alarm LED
7 Power On LED
Button functions
Press any button to light up the display.
Button Normal Alarm Selection Alarms Parameters Counters and

operation status menu browser editing service menu
ON/OFF Starts/stops the dryer
LEFT No action No action Moves the Displays the — Selects the No action
cursor previous alarm parameter
upwards cyclically — Decrements
cyclically the data value
With the PDP option available, you can press the left or right button to show a graph of the PDP.
RIGHT No action No action Moves the Displays the — Selects the No action
cursor next alarm parameter
downwards cyclically — Increments the
cyclically data value
With the PDP option available, you can press the left or right button to show a graph of the PDP.
14 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Button Normal Alarm Selection Alarms Parameters Counters and

operation status menu browser editing service menu
ENTER Displays the Cancels Selects the — Returns to — Starts the Returns to the
selection the pointed menu the selection parameter editing selection menu
menu displayed and activates menu — Selects the
alarm for it — Cancels the numerical data
one minute service alarm, if digits
(alarm pressed for 5 s — Confirms the
acknowled modified value
gment) — Pressed for at
least 2 s, returns
to the selection
menu
LED functions
LED Color Description

Power Green The controller is turned on.
ON
Alarm Blinking The controller is in alarm condition.
red
Fixed red The controller needs technical assistance.
4.2 Main screen
During normal operation the following image is displayed:
• In the upper right area, the current working phase countdown and the measured dew point
are displayed.
When the pressure dew point (PDP) sensor is not enabled, the dew point is not displayed.
When the PDP sensor is enabled but either not connected or defective, no dew point value
is displayed (four dashes substitute the measure).
• In the lower area, the current working phase of each vessel is displayed.
• In the upper left area of the screen, an animated icon is present:
2920 7196 80 15
Instruction book
Icon Description
Rotating arrow
Displayed when the dryer is in its working phases.
Stationary vertical bars

Displayed when the dryer is in the FREEZE status.
Stationary square
Displayed when the dryer is stopped.
The various working phases are:
Phase Text displayed on screen Translation

Stop STOPPED STOPPED
Shifting SHIFTING SHIFTING
Adsorbing ADSORBING ADSORBING
Pressure relief DEPRESS DEPRESS
Regeneration REGENERAT REGENERAT
Pressure equalize EQUALIZE EQUALIZE
Freeze FREEZE FREEZE
Standby STANDBY STANDBY
Blowing off BLOW OFF BLOW OFF
4.3 Selection Menu

When you press ENTER in the normal operation main screen (not during alarm!), you will see the
following selection menu:
Press LEFT or RIGHT to navigate to the required menu item and press ENTER to select.
Selection Translation Description

1 Alarms Alarms Alarms browser
2 Settings Settings Parameters list
3 Counters Counters Counters status
4 Service Service Service status
5 Exit Exit Back to the main display
Select item 5 (Exit) to return to the main screen or wait approximately 30 seconds.
16 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
4.4 Alarm screen
When there is an alarm, you will see the following image on your screen:
When one or more alarms are active, the alarm screen overrides the main screen.
In the upper right area, the current alarm number and the total active alarms number are
displayed.
In the lower area, the current alarm description is displayed.
If more than one alarm is active, the fault messages are shown every 2 seconds.
Pressing ENTER acknowledges the alarm currently being displayed.
If all the alarms have been cleared, you will return automatically to the main screen.
After one minute, if the acknowledged alarm is still active, the alarm display is shown again.
The icon in the upper left area blinks.
Possible alarm causes:
Module involved Cause Message on the How to clear the Alarm LED status
display alarm
PDP PDP above or equal PDP is not Verify if the PDP Blinking
(English:Pressure to the minimum connected sensor is correctly
Dew Point) sensor value of the PDP connected and if it
range is not damaged.
PDP lower than or PDP measure is Verify if the PDP Blinking
equal to the wrong sensor is correctly
minimum value of connected and if it
the PDP range is not damaged.
PDP sensor supply PDP supply is in Verify if the sensor Blinking
voltage < 20 V fault supply voltage is
correct.
PDP more than 10 PDP meas > the The alarm is Blinking
°C (18 °F) above setpoint automatically
the desired setpoint cleared when the
desired dew point is
reached.
2920 7196 80 17
Instruction book
Module involved Cause Message on the How to clear the Alarm LED status
display alarm
Service Running hours > Running hours > Perform the Blinking
programmed service hours X (X requested
service hours A, B = A, B or C) maintenance (A, B
or C or C). Next, enter
the Alarm menu,
select Service
Alarm, press the
ENTER button and
keep it pressed
during minimum 5 s.
24 V supply Supply voltage < 18 24 V supply is in Contact your Blinking
V fault supplier
Controller Controller hardware Internal error Reset all settings to Lit continuously
fault the default value.
Switch off the
controller and
switch it on again.
Call your supplier if
the fault persists.
When an alarm is active, relay K01 is closed (relay X15, contacts 9 en 10) . When all the alarms
are cleared, K01 is open.
Acknowledgement of the alarms does not affect the status of K01 or the status of the red LED.
See section Electric diagram.
4.5 Editing parameters

During parameters editing (see menu item Settings in Selection menu ), you will see a similar
image on your screen:
In the upper right area, the current parameter number and the total modifiable parameters
number are visualized.
In the lower area, the current parameter description and value are displayed.
Only the unprotected parameters can be displayed and modified! Example of settings that are
accessible to the end user are Automatic restart after voltage failure (ARAVF), language and the
display time-out.
Pressing ENTER for at least 2 seconds ends the editing procedure. The display will return to the
selection menu.
18 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Editor button functions
Button Function
LEFT • Selects the previous parameter
• Decrements the value
RIGHT • Selects the next parameter
• Increments the value
ENTER • Starts the parameter editing
• Selects the numerical data digits
• Confirms the modified value
• Pressing ENTER for at least 2 seconds ends the editing
procedure. The display will return to the selection menu.
How to modify a parameter
Step Button involved Action

1 RIGHT or LEFT To select the parameter to be modified
2 ENTER Starts the modification procedure
• If the parameters is a selection value (e.g. a language) or a boolean
value (On or Off), go to step 3
• If the parameters is a numerical value, press the ENTER button
repeatedly as required.
3 RIGHT or LEFT Modifies the selected parameter
• If the parameter is a selection value (e.g. a language), pressing
RIGHT increments and pressing LEFT decrements the selection
within the allowed range.
• If the parameter is a boolean value (On or Off), RIGHT forces the
data to ON, LEFT to OFF.
• If the parameters is a numerical value, RIGHT increments and LEFT
decrements the selected digit.
4 ENTER • For numerical data, ENTER moves the cursor to the upper digit (see
step 2). If the digit is the last one, ENTER closes the editing phase
• For selection or Boolean values, ENTER closes the editing phase.
Modifiable parameters
Following parameters can be modified without password:
Parameter Parameter name Description Default value Allowed range

number
1 ARAVF(Automatic Selects if the controller Off On or Off
restart after voltage will restart automatically
failure) or not in case of power
failure.
2 Language Selects the language of English English, French,
the displayed Spanish, Italian,
messages. Portuguese, German,
Russian
3 Display timeout 5 min 1 — 999 min
2920 7196 80 19
Instruction book
Parameter Parameter name Description Default value Allowed range

number
4 PDP control On: The dryer tries to Off On or Off
follow the set point.
Off: only display the
PDP. The dryer will run
at the lowest possible
dewpoint.
5 Dewpoint setpoint Fixes the target for the Based on the model Maximum value: -10 °C
PDP of dryer: (+14 °F)
• -20 °C (-4 °F) Minimum value:
• -40 °C (-40 °F) • -20 °C (-4 °F)
• -70 °C (-100 • -40 °C (-40 °F)
°F) • -70 °C (-100 °F)
based on the model of
dryer.
6 PDP temp in °F Selects the temperature Off On or Off
unit
All other parameters are protected by a password and need no modification.
PDP Sensor retrofit

PDP sensor retrofit kit number: 8092 2617 79
Press the Enter button for at least 2 seconds to return to the selection menu.
For controllers with software version 1.02.x and higher, use password: 4321. Please note that the
password has to be entered from the right to the left.
To edit the PDP parameters:
1. Go to parameter number 8: Enable PDP sensor
Set parameter: ‘ON’
2. Go to parameter number 4: PDP control
Choose preferred behaviour.
3. Go to parameter number 5
Modify and confirm preferred setpoint.
Service
After servicing, press ENTER for at least 5 seconds to confirm that the service has been
executed.
Controller retrofit
The same controller is used for different models of dryers.
For controllers with software version 1.02.x and higher, use password: 2344. Please note that the
password must be entered from the right to the left.
For dryers with Cerades desiccant the following parameters need to be checked when replacing
the controller:
• Go to parameter number 9: Min dewpoint and press Enter.
Set parameter to: -20 or -40 or -70
20 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
• Go to parameter number 10: Reg time T1 and press Enter

Set parameter to (sec): 29
• Go to parameter number 11: Eq time T2 and press Enter
• Go to parameter number 12: Depress time T3 and press Enter
• Go to parameter number 13: Valve delay T4 and press Enter
To edit the PDP parameters:
• Go to parameter number 8: Enable PDP sensor
Set parameter to ‘ON’ if PDP sensor is present
• Go to parameter number 4: PDP control
Choose the preferred behaviour.
• Go to parameter number 5
Modify and confirm the preferred setpoint.
2920 7196 80 21
Instruction book
5 Touch controller
5.1 Controller
The Elektronikon™ Touch controller
Introduction
The controller has the following functions:
• Controlling the unit
• Protecting the unit
• Monitoring components subject to service
• Automatic restart after voltage failure (ARAVF)
Automatic control of the unit

The controller can extend the adsorption time when the pressure dewpoint is better as expected.
When the dewpoint setting is reached the dryer will switch tower and start regenerating again.
A number of time based automatic start/stop commands may be programmed. Take into
account that a start command will be executed (if programmed and activated), even after
manually stopping the unit.
Protecting the unit

Shutdown
Several sensors are provided on the unit. If one of the measured signals exceeds the
programmed shutdown level, the unit will be stopped.
The unit will also be stopped in case of overload of the drive motor or fan motor.
22 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Before remedying, consult the Safety precautions.

Before resetting a warning or shutdown message, always solve the problem. Frequently
resetting these messages without remedying may damage the unit.
Shutdown warning
A shutdown warning level is a programmable level below the shutdown level.
If one of the measurements exceeds the programmed shutdown warning level, a message will
appear on the display and the general alarm LED will light up to warn the operator before the
shutdown level is reached.
The message disappears as soon as the warning condition disappears.
When the shutdown warning is shown, press stop button to stop the unit and wait until the unit
has stopped. Switch off the voltage, inspect the unit and remedy if necessary. The warning
message will disappear as soon as the warning condition disappears.
Service warning
A number of service operations are grouped as a Service Plan. Each Service Plan has a
programmed time interval. If the service timer exceeds a programmed value, this will be indicated
on the display to warn the operator to carry out the service actions belonging to that Service Plan.
When the service warning is shown, stop the unit, switch off the voltage and carry out the
required service actions. See section Preventive Maintenance.
Automatic restart after voltage failure (ARAVF)

The controller has a built-in function to automatically restart the unit when the voltage is restored
after voltage failure.
For units leaving the factory, this function is made inactive. If desired, the function can be
activated. Consult your supplier.
If the function is activated and provided the regulator was in the automatic operation
mode, the unit will automatically restart if the supply voltage to the module is restored.
The ARAVF label shall be glued near to the controller.
2920 7196 80 23
Instruction book
5.2 Control panel
Control panel
Parts and functions
Reference Designation Function

1 Touch screen Shows the unit operating condition and several icons
to navigate through the menu.
The screen can be operated by touch.
2 Warning sign Flashes in case of a shut-down and is lit in case of a
warning condition.
3 Service sign Lit when service is needed.
4 Operation sign Lit when the unit is running in automatic operation.
5 Voltage sign Indicates that power is switched on.
6 Stop button Stops the unit.
7 Start button Starts the unit. The operation sign (4) lights up. The
controller is operative.
24 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
5.3 Icons used
Menu icons
Menu Icon Menu Icon Menu Icon

Data Status
Inputs
Outputs
Counters
Aux. Equipment Converters

Parameters
Service Service Overview
Service Plan
Service History
Service
functions
Clean Screen
Week Timer Week
Remaining
Running Time
Event History Saved Data
2920 7196 80 25
Instruction book
Menu Icon Menu Icon Menu Icon

Machine Alarms
Settings
Regulation
Control
Parameters
Aux. Equipment Converter(s)

Parameters
Fan
Internal
SmartBox
Auto Restart
Controller Network Ethernet

Settings Settings Settings
CAN Settings
Localisation Language
Date/Time
Units
User Password
Help
Information
Status icons
Icon Description
Motor Stopped
26 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Motor Stopped Wait
Running Unloaded
Manual Unload
Running Unloaded Wait
Running Loaded
Failed to Load
Running Loaded Wait
Manual Stop
Machine Control Mode, Local
Machine Control Mode, Remote
Machine Control Mode, LAN
Automatic Restart After Voltage Failure
Week Timer Active
System icons
Icon Description
Basic User
Advanced User
Service User
Antenna 25%
2920 7196 80 27
Instruction book
Antenna 50%
Antenna 75%
Antenna 100%
Change between screens (indication)
Energy recovery
Dryer
Element
Drain(s)
Analogue Output
Menu
Reset
Auto Restart
Filter(s)
Cooler
Valve(s)
Power Meter
Input icons
Icon Description
Pressure
28 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Temperature
Special Protection
Open
Closed
This chapter gives a general survey of available icons. Not all icons mentioned in this
chapter are applicable to every machine.
5.4 Main screen
Function
The Main screen is the screen that is shown automatically when the voltage is switched on. It is
switched off automatically after a few minutes when there is no touch input.
Description

1 Home button The home button is always shown and can
be tapped to return to the main screen.
2 Screen information On the main screen, the screen information
bar shows the serial number of the machine.
When scrolling through menus, the name of
the current menu is shown.
3 Access level button The access level button is always shown and
can be tapped to change the current user
access level.
2920 7196 80 29
Instruction book

4 Alarm button The alarm button can be tapped to show the
current alarms. If an alarm occurs, the icon
on the button will be red.
5 Service button The service button can be tapped to show
the service information.
6 Status This icon shows the current status of the unit.
7 Page indicator Indicates which page you currently see. The
middle indication is the main screen, left is
the menu screen and at the right the quick
access screen.
Swipe left or right to go to another screen.
8, 9, 10, 11 These fields can contain a history chart, an Tap the field to view the type of
input or a counter value, depending on the measurement. This will be shown in the
type of the machine. screen information bar.
Examples of inputs:
• Ambient temp
• Outlet
• Dryer dewpoint
Examples of counters:
• Running hours
• Load relay
• Loaded hours
12 Menu button The menu button is always shown and can
be tapped to go to the menu.
5.5 Quick access screen
Function
The screen is used to directly access some frequently used functions.
Procedure
The Quick access screen can be viewed by swiping left, starting from the main screen.
Description
Through this screen, several important settings can be viewed and modified.
30 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Function Description
Setpoints Several setpoints can be modified by tapping this icon.
Control mode The control mode can be changed by tapping this icon.
• Local control via start/stop buttons
• Remote control via digital input(s)
• LAN control via the network.
When in Remote or LAN control, the start/stop buttons on the controller will not work.
Display language The display language of the controller can be changed by tapping this icon.
Manual unload (only When tapped, the machine will go in Manual unload mode until the icon is tapped
on fixed speed units) again.
Week timer Week timers can be set by tapping this icon.
Remaining running The Remaining running time can be set and modified by tapping this icon.
time
Internal SmartBox The reception quality of the internal antenna can be monitored.
Each bar represents 25% reception strength. If the four bars are filled, the reception
strength is 100%. If only one bar is filled, the reception strength is just 25%.
Auto restart Auto restart can be activated by tapping this icon.
5.6 Menu screen
Function
This screen is used to display the different menus where settings can be viewed or changed.
Procedure
The Menu screen can be viewed by tapping the Menu button or by swiping right, starting from the
main screen.
Description

(1) Data The data menu contains the status of the unit, information about the
Inputs, Outputs and Counters. The Auxiliary equipment can also be
viewed through this menu.
2920 7196 80 31
Instruction book

(2) Service The service menu contains the Service information. The ‘Clean
screen’ function can be used to clean the touchscreen.
(3) Week timer Multiple Week timers and a Remaining running time can be set
through this menu.
(4) Event history In case of an alarm, the Status information of the unit is saved and
can be viewed through this menu.
(5) Machine settings Alarms settings, Regulation settings and Control parameters can be
changed through this menu. Auxiliary equipment parameters can
also be changed.
The Auto restart function can be set through this menu. This function
is password protected.
(6) Controller settings Network settings, Localisation settings and a User password can be
set through this menu. There is also a Help page available and the
Controller information can be shown.
Menu structure
Operating the controller can be done by swiping through screens and tapping icons or menu
items.
This is the main menu structure. The structure can be different depending on the configuration of
the unit.
32 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
5.7 Data menu
Function
This screen is used to display the following submenus:
• Status
• Inputs
• Outputs
• Counters
• Aux. Equipment
These submenus can be entered by tapping the icons.
Procedure
To enter the Data menu screen:
1. Tap the Menu button
2. Tap the Data icon
Description
(1) Status menu
(2) Inputs menu
(3) Outputs menu
(4) Counters menu
(5) Auxiliary equipment menu
Status menu
Tap the Status icon to enter the Status menu.
This menu shows the current status of the unit.
2920 7196 80 33
Instruction book
If an alarm is active, it can be viewed by tapping the alarm message. To reset an alarm, tap the
reset button (1).
Before remedying, consult the Safety precautions.

Before resetting a warning or shutdown message, always solve the problem. Frequently
resetting these messages without remedying may damage the unit.
Inputs menu
Tap the Inputs icon to enter the Inputs menu.
This menu shows information about all the inputs.
Outputs menu
Tap the Outputs icon to enter the Outputs menu.
This menu shows information about all the outputs.
Voltage-free outputs may only be used to control or monitor functional systems.

They should NOT be used to control, switch or interrupt safety related circuits.
Check the maximum allowed load on the label.
Stop the unit and switch off the supply before connecting external equipment. Check the
Safety precautions.
Counters menu
Tap the Counters icon to enter the Counters menu.
34 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
This menu shows an overview of all actual hours and counters of the unit and controller.
Auxiliary equipment menu

Tap the Aux. Equipment icon to enter the Aux. equipment menu.
This menu shows an overview of all auxiliary equipment fitted.
5.8 Service menu
Function
• Service
• Service functions (Only visible as advanced user)
• Clean screen
Procedure
To enter the Service menu screen:
2. Tap the Service icon
2920 7196 80 35
Instruction book
Description
(1) Service
(2) Service functions (Only visible as advanced user)
(3) Clean screen
Service menu
Tap the Service icon to enter the Service menu.
This menu shows the remaining Running Hours until the next service.
A service overview can be viewed by tapping icon (1).
The service plan can be viewed by tapping icon (2). Through this menu, the service plan can be
modified:
1. Tap the desired service plan. A selection screen will pop up.
2. Change the Running Hours by tapping ‘–’ or ‘+’.
3. Confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping ‘X’.
The service history can be viewed by tapping icon (3).
When a service plan interval is reached, a message will appear on the screen. When service has
been performed, the service timer can be reset by tapping the reset button (4).
Service functions (Only visible as advanced user)

Tap the Service Functions icon to enter the Service Functions menu.
36 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Depending on the machine, this menu can have a different set of functions. Many of them are
password protected, as they are only accessible for authorized personnel.
Clean screen
Tap the Clean Screen icon to start the 15 seconds countdown to perform cleaning of the
touchscreen.
The touchscreen and the start and stop button become inactive for 15 seconds.
5.9 Week timer menu
Function
This screen is used to set up to 4 different week timers with each up to 8 settings per day.
The week timers can be activated through this screen.
A Remaining Running Time can be set from 5 up to 240 minutes.
Procedure
To enter the Week Timer menu screen:
2. Tap the Week Timer icon
2920 7196 80 37
Instruction book
Description

(1) Add or select week If less than 4 weeks are programmed, tap the ‘+’ button to add a
week.
(2) Remove week Tap to remove a programmed week timer.
(3) Activate week timer A selection screen pops up. The user can choose the correct week
by tapping ‘–’ or ‘+’ and can confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by
tapping ‘X’.
(4) Remaining running A selection screen pops up. The user can change the remaining time
time by tapping ‘–’ or ‘+’ and can confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by
tapping ‘X’.
(5) Add setting A selection screen pops up. The user can change the setting by
swiping up or down and confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping
‘X’.
5.10 Event history menu
Function
This screen is used to display the saved data in case of an alarm.
Procedure
To enter the Event history menu screen:
2. Tap the Event History icon
Description
38 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
(1) Saved Data
Saved data
Tap the Saved Data icon to enter the Saved Data menu.
Scroll through the items swiping up and down in this list. The event date and time is shown at the
right side of the screen.
Press on one of the items in the list for more information reflecting the status of the unit when the
shutdown occurred.
5.11 Machine settings menu
Function
• Alarms
• Regulation
• Control Parameters
Only visible if the machine has adaptable parameters.
• Aux. Equipment parameters
• Auto Restart
Procedure
To enter the Machine settings menu screen:
2. Tap the Machine Settings icon
2920 7196 80 39
Instruction book
Description
(1) Alarms menu
(2) Regulation menu
(3) Aux. Equipment Parameters menu
(4) Auto Restart menu
Alarms menu
Tap the Alarms icon to enter the Alarms menu.
A list of all alarms is shown.
When pressing on one of the items in this list, the warning and/or shutdown levels are shown for
this alarm.
Regulation menu
Tap the Regulation icon to enter the Regulation menu.
40 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Setpoints or pressure bands can be modified through this menu.

Modify a setting
When tapping a list item, a selection screen pops up. The user can modify the setting by tapping
‘–’ or ‘+’ and can confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping ‘X’.
Change a selection
When tapping a list item, a selection screen pops up. The user can change the selection by
swiping up or down and confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping ‘X’.
Control parameters menu

Tap the Control Parameters icon to enter the Control Parameters menu.
This menu shows information about the Control Parameters.

Modify a setting
Auxiliary equipment parameters menu

Tap the Aux. Equipment Parameters icon to enter the auxiliary equipment parameters menu.
2920 7196 80 41
Instruction book
This menu shows an overview of all the auxiliary equipment fitted.
Through this menu, the parameters of the auxiliary equipment can be changed.
Modify a setting
Auto restart menu

Tap the Auto restart icon to enter the Auto Restart menu.
Through this menu, the automatic restart can be activated. The activation is password protected.
The automatic restart settings can also be changed.
If you want automatic restart to be always on you need to change the setting from “Not Activated”
to “Infinity”. The state “Activated” only allows a restart when the power comes back on within the
amount of time set for “Maximum Power Down Time”.
Enter a password
When tapping a password protected item, a selection screen pops up. The user can enter the
password by swiping up or down to select the desired number. Once the 4 digits are entered, the
user can confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping ‘X’.
Modify a setting
When clicking a list item, a selection screen pops up. The user can modify the setting by tapping
42 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
5.12 Controller settings menu
Function
• Network Settings
• Localisation
• User Password
• Help
• Information
Procedure
To enter the Controller Settings menu screen:
2. Tap the Controller Settings icon
Description
(1) Network Settings menu
(2) Localisation menu
(3) User Password menu
(4) Help menu
(5) Information menu
Network settings menu

Tap the Network Settings icon to enter the Network Settings menu.
2920 7196 80 43
Instruction book
Ethernet Settings
The list of Ethernet Settings is shown. When ethernet is turned off, the settings can be modified.
CAN Settings
The list of CAN Settings is shown. When CAN is turned off, the settings can be modified.
Modify a setting
Change a selection
Localisation menu
Tap the Localisation icon to enter the Localisation menu.
Language
The language setting of the controller can be modified through this menu.
Date/Time
The date and time settings of the controller can be modified through this menu.
Units
The units displayed can be modified through this menu.
Display Timeout
The amount of time until the display turns off after the last interaction.
Modify a setting
Change a selection
44 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
User password menu

Tap the User Password icon to enter the User Password menu.
The user password can be activated or deactivated through this menu. Enter and confirm a user
password to activate, repeat to deactivate.
Enter a password
When tapping a password protected item, a selection screen pops up. The user can enter the
password by swiping up or down to select the desired number. Once the 4 digits are entered, the
user can confirm by tapping ‘V’ or decline by tapping ‘X’.
Help menu
Tap the Help icon to enter the Help menu.
This menu can show a link to the web page of your supplier, a helpdesk phone number or other
helpful information.
Information menu
Tap the Information icon to enter the Information menu.
This menu shows information about the controller.
2920 7196 80 45
Instruction book
5.13 Access level
Function
Through this pop-up screen the access level settings can be viewed or changed.
Procedure
The Access Level screen can be viewed or changed by tapping the Access Level button at the
upper right corner of the screen.
Description

(1) User A basic set of parameters is visualized, no password required.
(2) Service A basic set of parameters can be modified, no password required.
(3) Full This access level is not accessible to end users.
(4) Decline Tap to decline the selected user level.
(5) Confirm Tap to confirm the selected user level.
Service access level
Tap the Service access level icon (1) and confirm (2).
46 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
The screen information bar (1) now shows the current status of the unit instead of the machine
serial number.
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value is now shown in the Internal SmartBox
menu. See Quick access screen.
In the service menu, an extra menu item is now available. See Service menu.
2920 7196 80 47
Instruction book
6 Installation
6.1 Dimension drawings

The dimension drawings can be found in your technical documentation.
Drawing number Model

9829 5298 00 CD 20 – 335+
Text on drawing Description

INLET Dryer inlet connection
OUTLET Dryer outlet connection
L (for dismantling) Minimal free space to be foreseen for service
purposes
6.2 Installation proposal
General
The dryer is intended for indoor use and should be placed at least under a roof (protected
against sun, wind and rain). The minimum ambient temperature mentioned on the data
plate must be respected. See section Limitations for operation.
Install the dryer on a solid, level floor, suitable for taking its weight.
Make sure to leave enough space (minimum 800 mm (2.6 ft)) around and above the dryer
for servicing purposes. Consult the Dimension drawings.
Provide enough space under the filter elements so that the filter cartridges can be replaced
without having to disassemble the piping.
Make sure that all pipes, filters, valves, etc. are clean and that they are installed correctly
with or without bypass system.
Make sure that the piping is installed stress free.
For more information concerning air nets, cooling systems, etc. refer to the compressor
installation manual.
Instructions
To ensure correct operation, the dryer must be fitted properly into the compressed air circuit,
consisting of the compressor, the dryer and the application.
• Water separator (3) : A high-efficiency water separator removes 90 % of the free water in
the compressed air. If not mounted in the compressor, a water separator needs to be
installed between the compressor and the air receiver or the dryer inlet filter (whichever
comes first).
• It is recommended to install a general purpose inlet filter upstream of the dryer to remove
liquid oil.
A high-efficiency filter (4) (delivered with the dryer (5)) removes particles from the
compressed air down to 0.01 micron and removes the remaining oil (maximum oil carry-over
of 0.01 ppm).
48 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
On the inlet filter a drain tube must be installed. The drain tubes (8) to the drain collector
must not dip into the water.
Install an oil/water separator to drain pure condensate water. Consult your supplier.
• Should oil vapor and odors be undesirable, a carbon filter can be installed downstream the
outlet dust filter.
• It is advisable to install bypass pipes with ball valves over the filters in order to isolate the
filters during service operations without disturbing the compressed air delivery.
• It is recommended to install a ball valve (7) after the dryer. This valve should be closed at
startup to ensure pressure is built up. The valve can be left open when the pressure remains
in the dryer.
• If the maximum pressure of the compressor is higher than the design pressure of the dryer,
a full flow safety valve must be installed between the compressor and the dryer in order to
blow off the excessive pressure.
Refer to the images below for the references used.
Never overload the dryer as a too high air speed may damage the desiccant. It is
recommended to install the air dryer upstream of the air receiver to prevent overload
(e.g. after extending the dry air circuit). Consult your supplier if in doubt. See section
Operating instructions for the correct operation procedure.
Depending on whether compressor synchronization contact (connector X2 on the controller) is

used (see also section Operation), there are two possibilities for dryers equipped with the DC1
controller:
Installation in case X2 is not connected
If the freeze contact X2 is not used, the correct order of installation is compressor - air
receiver - dryer.
The entire compressed air flow from the compressor is stored in an air receiver. Only the
air that needs to be dried passes the dryer.
In case the air receiver is installed upstream the dryer and the load/unload contact of the
compressor is connected to X2, the dryer may get overloaded by the air receiver's air
volume when it is in freeze mode.
An external contact may only be connected to the X2 contact of the dryer when the
air receiver is placed downstream of the dryer.
2920 7196 80 49
Instruction book
Installation in case X2 is connected
The entire flow from the compressor passes the dryer. The dry air is stored in the air
receiver downstream of the dryer.
With X2 connected, the dryer will stop the purge air flow at the end of the cycle. (< 2
minutes) and it will restart when the air compressor resumes to deliver compressed air.
When the air receiver is installed upstream the dryer, the load/unload contact of the
compressor must not be connected to X2. The dryer could get overloaded by the air
receiver's air volume when it is in freeze mode.
50 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
2920 7196 80 51
Instruction book
7 Electrical connections
General
The electrical wiring must comply with the local regulations. The air dryer must be
earthed and protected by fuses against short-circuiting. Consult the electric
diagram delivered with the dryer.
Before switching on the main power supply, check the voltage requirements in the
technical specifications or on the dryer’s data plate.
52 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
8 Operating instructions
Safety
Always observe all relevant safety instructions.
Initial start-up
To start up the dryer for the first time or after a long period of standstill, proceed as follows:
1. If installed, open the bypass valves of the dryer.
2. Close the air supply towards the pressure dew point (PDP) sensor.
3. Close off the air supply from the compressor towards the dryer by closing the external inlet
valve (if installed).
4. If installed, close the outlet valve.
5. Start the compressor and wait for pressure.
6. Slowly open the inlet valve.
7. Check the connections of the dryer for air leaks and remedy if necessary.
8. Switch the dryer on by pushing the Start button on the controller.
9. Let the dryer operate for several hours with the external outlet valve closed.
10. Gradually open the external outlet valve.
11. If applicable, close the bypass valves of the dryer.
12. Open the air supply towards the pressure dew point (PDP) sensor.
If the application allows air that is not completely dry, the valve towards the dry air
consumer may be opened even before the optimal Pressure Dew Point (PDP) is
reached. In this case, however, it will take more time for the desiccant to dry the air
completely.
At initial start-up, and especially when the dryer is loaded from the beginning, it can take
a long time before the dew point is reached.
It is therefore recommended to operate the dryer for a number of days with the outlet
valve closed.
Normal start
If the dryer has not been used for more than 3 months, refer to section Initial startup. In all other
cases, proceed as follows:
1. Cut off the air supply from the compressor towards the dryer by closing the external inlet
valve.
2. Close the air supply towards the PDP sensor.
3. If installed, close the external outlet valve between the dryer and the dry air consumer.
4. Start the compressor and slowly open the external inlet valve.
5. Switch on the dryer.
6. Gradually open the air outlet valve.
7. If applicable, close the bypass valves of the dryer.
8. Open the air supply towards the PDP sensor.
2920 7196 80 53
Instruction book
Close the external inlet valve in case the compressor needs to be restarted. The high
air speed in the startup phase of the compressor may damage the desiccant.
During operation
The LEDs for PDP warning and PDP alarm are only functional if the dryer is equipped
with a PDP sensor!
Stopping
To stop the dryer, proceed as follows:
1. If installed and if necessary, open the bypass valves of the dryer so that the application will
still receive compressed air.
2. Close the external inlet valve between the compressor and the dryer and the external outlet
valve between the dryer and the dry air consumer.
3. Let the dryer operate for a period without consumption, to depressurize the vessels.
4. Switch off the dryer.
If the dryer is stopped for a longer period, keep the external inlet and outlet valve
closed to avoid moisture from entering the dryer.
Under no circumstances shall compressed air be allowed to flow through the dryer
when the electrical power is switched off. This will result in terminal failure of the
desiccant material and regeneration will no longer be possible.
54 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
9 Maintenance
9.1 Maintenance
General recommendations and precautions

Before carrying out any maintenance or corrective activity, read the following recommendations
and safety precautions and proceed accordingly.
• Stop the dryer by pushing the Stop button on the controller.
• Disconnect all pressure sources and vent the internal pressure of the system before
dismantling any pressurized component.
• Use genuine Atlas Copco spare parts only. Consult the Spare Parts List for part numbers.
For preventive maintenance, dedicated service kits are available.
• Check for correct operation after maintenance.
Filters and valves installed between the compressor, the dryer and the air consumer
may need other maintenance activities than those mentioned below (e.g. draining the
filters and replacing the filter elements). Refer to the appropriate manual for more
information.
Preventive maintenance schedule
Frequency Service plan Activity

Daily Check the display panel for information and service messages.
Every 6 months or A • Check for damaged wiring or loose connections.
every 4000 hours • Check for air leaks.
of operation (1) • Replace the inlet filter cartridge.
Every year or B • Service plan A.
every 8000 hours • Calibrate/replace pressure dewpoint (PDP) sensor.
of operation (1)
Every 2 years or C • Service plan B.
every 16000 hours • Replace the silencers.
(1) • Replace the blow off valve.
• Replace the angle seat valve (if installed).
• Replace the angle seat valve controlling solenoid (if installed).
Always replace all O-rings, seals and nylon washers that come free
when executing the scheduled maintenance.
Every 7 years or Replace the desiccant.
every 56000 hours Always replace all O-rings, seals and nylon washers that come free
(1) when executing the scheduled maintenance.
(1) whichever comes first

In normal working conditions, the lifetime of the desiccant is approximately 7 years.
It is recommended to have the desiccant replaced by a qualified Atlas Copco service technician.
Reset the service timer after a maintenance intervention.
All spare parts required for scheduled maintenance can be found in the Spare Parts List. Consult
this list for part number information.
2920 7196 80 55
Instruction book
9.2 Nozzle replacement
Procedure
1. Open the top panel to access the nozzles.
The nozzles are located on the top of the upper manifold.
2. Release the push-fits on the elbow fittings and pull and bend out the assembly of the nozzle,
straight couplings and tubes.
3. Select the new nozzle according to the working pressure. See recommendation table below.
4. Place the assembly back in the elbow fittings.
5. Put all of the spare nozzles back in the bag inside the unit in case of future operating
changes.
Recommendation table
Model PDP Bar (g)

°C °F 5.5 7.0 8.5 10.0 13.0
CD 20+ -40 -40 .10 .08 .06 .05 .03
CD 30+ -40 -40 .16 .13 .11 .09 .06
CD 40+ -40 -40 .20 .17 .15 .13 .10
CD 55+ -40 -40 .24 .21 .18 .15 .12
CD 65+ -40 -40 .28 .24 .21 .18 .15
CD 85+ -40 -40 .35 .31 .27 .24 .20
CD 105+ -40 -40 .25 .21 .18 .16 .12
CD 125+ -40 -40 .28 .24 .21 .18 .14
CD 170+ -40 -40 .35 .31 .27 .24 .20
CD 190+ -40 -40 .28 .24 .21 .18 .15
CD 250+ -40 -40 .37 .32 .28 .25 .20
CD 335+ -40 -40 .37 .32 .28 .25 .20
Recommendation table
Model PDP Bar (g)

°C °F 5.5 7.0 8.5 10.0 13.0
CD 25+ -20 -4 .13 .10 .08 .06 .04
CD 35+ -20 -4 .18 .15 .13 .11 .08
CD 50+ -20 -4 .24 .20 .17 .15 .12
CD 65+ -20 -4 .30 .25 .22 .20 .16
CD 80+ -20 -4 .34 .29 .26 .23 .19
CD 105+ -20 -4 .41 .35 .31 .28 .23
CD 125+ -20 -4 .29 .25 .21 .19 .15
CD 150+ -20 -4 .33 .28 .25 .22 .18
CD 195+ -20 -4 .39 .34 .30 .27 .22
CD 225+ -20 -4 .33 .28 .25 .22 .18
56 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
Model PDP Bar (g)

°C °F 5.5 7.0 8.5 10.0 13.0
CD 300+ -20 -4 .40 .34 .30 .27 .23
2920 7196 80 57
Instruction book
10 Problem solving
Overview
Fault Cause Remedy

Pressure dew point too The dryer has not had the time to Close the valve installed between the
high regenerate completely. dryer and the application (if permitted)
LED PDP warning/PDP and have the desiccant regenerated.
alarm is lit. The silencers are clogged. Replace the silencers.
The drain is not working correctly. Check the drain valve of the filter.
The air flow through the dryer is too Check for correct application.
high.
The outlet pressure is too low. Check whether the compressor provides
enough air for the application.
The inlet temperature is too high. Check the compressor aftercooler.
Free water in the dryer. Check the water separator and the drain
valve of the filters upstream of the dryer.
The dryer produces a lot Check the silencer and its fixation to Replace the silencer if necessary or
of noise. the unit. correct its fixation.
Insufficient air leaves the Too much purge air escapes. Check the condition of the solenoid valve
dryer. and replace it if necessary.
Check if the correct nozzle is installed
(standard nozzle supplied is for 7 bar,
alternative nozzles are available for other
operating pressures).
58 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
11 Technical data
11.1 Reference conditions

Condition Unit Value
Compressed air effective inlet pressure barg 7
psig 101.5
Compressed air inlet temperature ˚C 35
˚F 95
Relative humidity of the air at inlet % 100
Pressure dew point (PDP —20 °C version) °C -20
°F -4
Pressure dew point (PDP —40 °C version) ˚C -40
˚F -40
11.2 Limitations for operation

Limitation Unit Value
Maximum compressed air effective inlet pressure barg 14
Maximum compressed air effective inlet pressure psig 203
Minimum compressed air effective inlet pressure barg 4
Minimum compressed air effective inlet pressure psig 58
Maximum ambient air temperature ˚C 45
Maximum ambient air temperature ˚F 113
Minimum ambient air temperature ˚C 1
Minimum ambient air temperature ˚F 34
Maximum compressed air inlet temperature ˚C 70
Maximum compressed air inlet temperature ˚F 158
Minimum compressed air inlet temperature ˚C 2
Minimum compressed air inlet temperature ˚F 36
Minimum volume flow at inlet See Dryer data.
11.3 Dryer data
PDP -20 °C
CD 25+ CD 35+ CD 50+ CD 65+ CD 80+ CD 105+

Volume flow at dryer inlet l/s 24 36 48 65 78 102
Volume flow at dryer inlet cfm 51 76 102 138 165 216
Pressure drop at maximum flow bar 0.08 0.08 0.125 0.17 0.245 0.33
2920 7196 80 59
Instruction book
CD 25+ CD 35+ CD 50+ CD 65+ CD 80+ CD 105+

Pressure drop at maximum flow psi 1.2 1.2 1.8 2.5 3.6 4.8
Time to half a cycle s 42 42 42 42 42 42
Regeneration time s 30 30 30 30 30 30
Pressurization time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
Average regeneration air % 16 16 16 16 16 16
consumption
Desiccant type CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes
Desiccant amount per vessel kg 3.6 5.4 7.2 9 10.8 14.4
Desiccant amount per vessel lb 7.9 11.9 15.8 19.8 23.8 31.7
Inlet filter 1 UD25+ UD45+ UD60+ UD60+ UD100+ UD100+
Outlet filter 1 not part not part not part not part not part not part
of of of of of of
product product product product product product
Maximum air outlet temperature °C 80 80 80 80 80 80
Maximum air outlet temperature °F 176 176 176 176 176 176
Minimum volume flow at inlet l/s 6 9 12 16.25 19.5 25.5
Minimum volume flow at inlet cfm 13 19 25 34 41 54
CD 125+ CD 150+ CD 195+ CD 225+ CD 300+

Volume flow at dryer inlet l/s 125 150 195 225 295
Volume flow at dryer inlet cfm 265 318 413 477 625
Pressure drop at maximum flow bar 0.12 0.18 0.28 0.2 0.33
Pressure drop at maximum flow psi 1.7 2.6 4.1 2.9 4.8
Time to half a cycle s 42 42 42 42 42
Regeneration time s 30 30 30 30 30
Pressurization time s 10 10 10 10 10
Average regeneration air % 16 16 16 16 17
consumption
Desiccant type CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes CeraDes
Desiccant amount per vessel kg 9 10.8 14.4 10.8 14.4
Desiccant amount per vessel lb 19.8 23.8 31.7 23.8 31.7
Inlet filter 1 UD140+ UD180+ UD180+ UD310+ UD310+
Outlet filter 1 not part of not part of not part of not part of not part of
product product product product product
Maximum air outlet temperature °C 80 80 80 80 80
Maximum air outlet temperature °F 176 176 176 176 176
Minimum volume flow at inlet l/s 31.25 37.5 48.75 56.25 73.75
Minimum volume flow at inlet cfm 66 79 103 119 156
60 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
PDP -40 °C
CD 20+ CD 30+ CD 40+ CD 55+ CD 65+ CD 85+

Volume flow at dryer inlet l/s 21 31.5 42 52.5 63 84
consumption
Desiccant amount per vessel kg 3.6 5.4 7.2 9 10.8 14.4
of of of of of of
Minimum volume flow at inlet l/s 5.25 7.875 10.5 13.125 15.75 21
CD 105+ CD 125+ CD 170+ CD 190+ CD 250+ CD 335+

Volume flow at dryer inlet l/s 105 126 168 189 252 325
consumption
Desiccant amount per vessel kg 9 10.8 14.4 10.8 14.4 14.4
of of of of of of
Minimum volume flow at inlet l/s 26.25 31.5 42 47.25 63 82.5
2920 7196 80 61
Instruction book
CD 105+ CD 125+ CD 170+ CD 190+ CD 250+ CD 335+

62 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
12 Instructions for use
Instructions
Description
1 The dryers can contain pressurized air. This can be potentially dangerous if the
equipment is misused.
2 The towers of the dryer consist of an extruded profile, which must only be used as a
compressed air vessel and must be operated within the limits specified. See section
Pressure Equipment Directives, table A.
3 No alterations shall be made to the vessels by welding, drilling or other mechanical
methods without the written permission of the manufacturer.
4 The design pressure and temperature of this pressure bearing part must be clearly
indicated on the data label.
5 If installed, the safety valve must correspond with pressure surges of 1.1 times the
maximum allowable operating pressure. This should guarantee that the pressure will not
permanently exceed the maximum allowable operating pressure of the vessel.
6 Original bolts have to be used after opening for inspection. The maximum torque has to
be taken into consideration (see table below).
Maximum bolt torque
Thread size Tightening torque Allowed deviation

(Nm) (Nm)
M3 1 0.3
M4 2.4 0.6
M5 5 1.2
M6 8 2.1
M8 20 5
M10 41 10
M12 73 18
M14 115 29
M16 185 46
M18 238 60
M20 335 84
2920 7196 80 63
Instruction book
13 Guidelines for inspection
Guidelines
On the Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer, the harmonized and/or other
The Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer is part of the documentation that
is supplied with this air dryer.
Local legal requirements and/or use outside the limits and/or conditions as specified by Atlas
Copco may require other inspection periods as mentioned below.
64 2920 7196 80
Instruction book
14 Pressure Equipment Directives
Components Subject to Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU

Parts of article 4.3 of 2014/68/EU are subject to Sound Engineering Practice (SEP).
Parts of category I according to 2014/68/EU are integrated into the machine and fall under the
exclusion of article I, section 2-(f)-(i).
The table below contains the necessary information for the inspection of all category I pressure
equipment according to Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU.
Tube drawing Design Design PED Tube wall Tube Tube

p.n. pressure temperature category thickness diameter internal
bar(e) °C mm mm volume
l
1627 6307 91 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 9.8
1627 6307 92 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 10.5
1627 6307 93 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 13.6
1627 6307 94 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 16.8
1627 6307 95 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 19.5
1627 6307 96 14 -10 to +66 I 5 150 24.7
Recommendation of the manufacturer for inspection intervals

Following actions are to be executed by authorized service personnel only, unless stated
otherwise in the applicable legislation. The stated time interval takes the start-up day of the unit
as reference.
• Every 6 months: inspect the vessel material on the outside (exposed) for traces of strong
corrosion. Consult the service department of your supplier if necessary.
• Every 7 years: when replacing the desiccant, following inspections are to be carried out:
• Inspection of outside and inside of the material for excessive and local corrosion,
• Inspection of outside and inside of the material for cracks, leaks, damage.
Consult the service department of your supplier if necessary.
• Hydrostatic test according to the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU when
required by local regulations. Consult the service department of your supplier if necessary.
• Additional visual inspection is necessary when number of cycles is exceeded:
• Minimum expected life time with real working pressure < 10 bar: 3 million cyles.
• Minimum expected life time with real working pressure between 10< x<14 bar: 1.6
million cyles.
2920 7196 80 65
Instruction book
15 Declaration of conformity
Typical example of a Declaration of Conformity document
(1): Contact address:

Atlas Copco Airpower n.v.
P.O. Box 100
B-2610 Wilrijk (Antwerp)
Belgium
(2): Applicable directives
(3): Standards used
On the Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer, the harmonized and/or other
The Declaration of Conformity / Declaration by the Manufacturer is part of the documentation that
is supplied with this device.
66 2920 7196 80
No. 2920 7196 80 / 2020 - 06 - Printed in Belgium Atlas Copco Airpower NV. All rights reserved. Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation.
COMMITTED TO SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTIVITY
We stand by our responsibilities towards our customers, towards the
environment and the people around us. We make performance stand
the test of time. This is what we call — Sustainable Productivity.
www.atlascopco.com
Atlas Copco
Air treatment
CD190+
MIN 20 added
Serial Number: API152214
Parts List
Atlas Copco
Air treatment
CD190+
MIN 20 added
Serial Number: API152214
Parts List
Edition: 3
Copyright, Atlas Copco Airpower n.v., Antwerp, Belgium.

Any unauthorized use or copying of the contents or any part thereof is
prohibited. This applies in particular to trademarks, model denominations,
part numbers and drawings.
Use only authorized parts. Any damage or malfunction caused by the use
of unauthorized parts is not covered by Warranty or Product Liability.
06/11/2020
www.atlascopco.com
Table of Contents
Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 2
1 Service Kits ........................................................................................................................... 16
2 Service Kits Pressure dew point -40°C.................................................................................. 18
3 Base Frame Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD 190+, CD 250+)
- pressure dew point -40°C.........................................................................................................20
4 Air system............................................................................................................................... 22
4.1 Block Valve Assembly .................................................................................................. 22
4.2 Tower............................................................................................................................. 24
4.3 Nozzle Pressure dew point -40°C................................................................................. 26
4.4 Inlet/Outlet Piping G thread........................................................................................... 28
5 Filters CD 150+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 195+.....................................................................30
6 Plugs ......................................................................................................................................32
7 Blow-Off Assembly 3/4" - CD 125+, CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure
dew point -20°C, 'CD 125+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) - pressure dew point
-40°C............................................................................................................................................34
8 Blow-Off Assembly 2" - (CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C,
(CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) - pressure dew point -40°C...................................... 36
9 Pilot Air Connections Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD 190+,
CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C........................................................................................38
10 Loose - Nozzles Pressure dew point -40°C......................................................................... 40
11 Electrical................................................................................................................................42
11.1 Electrical components DC1 CONTROLLER................................................................42
12 Canopy Assembly Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD 190+, CD
250+) - pressure dew point -40°C.............................................................................................. 44
13 Markings .............................................................................................................................. 46
14 Standard Options..................................................................................................................48
14.1 PDP Sensor................................................................................................................. 48
CD190+, S/N. API152214 1

Instructions
EN - English
1 ORDERING PARTS
Always specify the part number, the name and quantity of the required items, as well as the type and serial number of the
machine.
2 COLUMN INFORMATION
Ref - Reference number: links a specific part from the list to the drawing. Only parts with a reference number are shown in the
drawing. Parts in the drawing without a reference number are simply there to illustrate the assembly.
Part number - Part number to be used when ordering spare parts.
When no part number is specified, the component is not available as a spare part.
Parts which are contained in a kit will have the kit number mentioned on the line below. For complete content of the kit see
chapter “1 - Service kits”.
A part number preceded by a black dot is comprised in the assembly right above.
Remarks: Additional information to the part number right above.
Substituted by: The part number right above has been replaced by another part number due to an update or revision.
Qty - Quantity: Indicates the number of parts in relation to the corresponding reference number. „AR“ means „As required“:
quantity or number to be determined.
Name - Part name: Translations of the English names can be found in document “Glossary of part names”.
Validity - Defines the timeframe and type/version of the machines the part is valid for. Clarification of the codes used in the
validity pattern can be found in the legend at the bottom of the page. A validity pattern mentioned in the chapter title applies to
the whole chapter. A plus sign in the pattern is to be interpreted as ‘and’, a comma as ‘or’. Parentheses group the validity codes,
similarly to mathematical parentheses, see following example:
‘PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)’ is valid for machines with 8 bar working pressure
and 50Hz frequency and 500V supply voltage, or 8 bar working pressure and 60Hz frequency and 575V supply voltage.
EL – Reference to the drawing or the component inside the electric cubicle.
R. – Remarks: Extra information about the part. Explanation can be found at the bottom of the page.
BG - български
1 ПОРЪЧКА НА ЧАСТИ
Винаги цитирайте номера на частта, наименованието и количеството на необходимите изделия, както и типа и
серийния номер на машината.
2 ИНФОРМАЦИЯ В КОЛОНИТЕ
Ref - Референтен номер: свързва дадена част от списъка с чертежа. На чертежа са показани само части с референтен
номер.
Частите на чертежа без референтен номер са там, единствено за да се покаже възелът.
Part number - Номер на частта, който да се използва при поръчката на резервни части.
Ако не е посочен номер на частта, компонентът не се предлага като резервна част.
Частите, които се съдържат в даден комплект, ще включват номер на комплекта на долния ред. За пълното съдържание
на комплекта вижте глава „1 – Service kits“.
Номер на част, пред който има черна точка, се съдържа във възела непосредствено по-горе.
Remarks: Допълнителна информация за частта – непосредствено по-горе.
Substituted by: Номерът на частта непосредствено по-горе е заменен от друг номер на частта поради актуализация или
ревизия.
Qty - Количество: Посочва броя на частите във връзка със съответния референтен номер. „AR“ означава „Според
нуждата“: количеството или броят ще бъдат определени допълнително.
Name - Име на частта: превод на английските имена можете да откриете в документа „Glossary of part names“.
Validity - Определя периода и типа/версията на машините, за които частта е валидна. Обяснение на елементите от
кода, използвани в кода за валидността, можете да откриете в легендата в долната част на страницата. Кодът за
валидността, посочен в заглавието на главата, се отнася за цялата глава. Знакът плюс в кода се приема за „и“, а
запетаята – за „или“. Скобите групират елементите на кодовете за валидност подобно на математическите скоби, вижте
следния пример:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ е валидно за машини с работно налягане
8 bar, честота 50 Hz и захранващо напрежение 500 V или работно налягане 8 bar, честота 60 Hz и захранващо
напрежение 575 V.
EL – Референция към чертежа или компонента в електрическата кутия.
R.. – Забележки: допълнителна информация относно частта. Обяснения можете да намерите в долната част на
страницата.
2 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
BR - Brasileiro
1 ENCOMENDANDO PEÇAS
Sempre especifique o número da peça, o nome e a quantidade dos itens necessários, assim como o tipo e o número de série
da máquina.
Páginas marcadas com o símbolo Serviço - “ “ contêm peças do(s) Kit(s) de serviço. Para conhecer o conteúdo completo do kit,
consulte o capítulo “1 - Service kits” (1 - Kits de
serviço).
2 INFORMAÇÕES SOBRE AS COLUNAS
Ref. - Número de referência: indica onde está uma peça específica listada no desenho. Somente peças com número de
referência são mostradas no desenho. As peças no desenho que
não têm um número de referência destinam-se simplesmente a ilustrar o conjunto.
Part number - Número da peça: se nenhum número de peça estiver especificado, o componente não está disponível como
peça sobressalente. Uma linha mostrada em negrito é um
conjunto. Uma peça cujo número seja seguido por um ponto preto faz parte do conjunto impresso em negrito imediatamente
acima dela.
O símbolo “<<< >>>” direciona para outra lista com o mesmo título, como “Name” (Nome).
Quando o número de peça específico é colocado abaixo da linha “Ref.”/”Name” (Ref. / Nome), é preciso escolher o tipo/versão
da máquina.
Qty - Quantidade: indica o número de peças e os números de referência correspondentes. “AR” significa “As
required” (Conforme solicitado): a quantidade ou o número a ser
determinado.
Name - Nome da peça: as traduções dos nomes em inglês podem ser encontradas no documento “Glossary of part
names” (Glossário de nomes de peças).
Remarks - Observações - Informações extras sobre a peça.
Uma série de letras pode indicar que uma determinada peça é certificada pelo órgão autorizado específico, de acordo com os
códigos ou as regras da lista.
As medidas são fornecidas em milímetros.
CS - čeština
1 OBJEDNÁNÍ DÍLŮ
Vždy uveďte číslo dílu, název a množství požadovaných položek a také typ a sériové číslo stroje.
2 INFORMACE VE SLOUPCÍCH
Ref – Referenční číslo: Propojuje konkrétní díl ze seznamu s výkresem. Pouze díly s referenčním číslem jsou zobrazeny na
výkresu. Díly bez referenčního čísla, které jsou na výkresu uvedeny, slouží pouze jako ilustrace.
Part number – Číslo dílu se používá pro objednávání náhradních dílů.
Pokud není uvedeno žádné číslo dílu, komponenta není k dispozici jako náhradní díl.
Díly obsažené v sadě mají na následujícím řádku uvedeno číslo sady. Úplný obsah sady viz kapitolu „1 – Service kits“.
Díl s číslem, před kterým je černý puntík, je obsažen v sestavě přímo nad ním.
Remarks: Další informace k číslu dílu přímo nad ním.
Substituted by: Číslo dílu přímo nad ním bylo nahrazeno jiným číslem dílu v důsledku aktualizace nebo revize.
Qty – Množství: Indikuje počet dílů pro odpovídající referenční číslo. „AR“ znamená „As required“ (Podle potřeby): množství
nebo počet bude určen.
Name – Název dílu: Překlady anglických názvů naleznete v dokumentu „Glossary of part names“.
Validity – Definuje časový rámec a typ/verzi strojů, na které se daný díl vztahuje. Objasnění kódů použitých ve vzorci platnosti
naleznete v legendě na konci stránky. Vzorec platnosti uvedený v názvu kapitoly se vztahuje na celou kapitolu. Znaménko plus
ve vzorci se interpretuje jako „a“ a čárka jako „nebo“. Závorky seskupují kódy platnosti, obdobně jako matematické závorky, viz
následující příklad:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ platí pro stroje s provozním tlakem 8 bar,
frekvencí 50 Hz a napájecím napětím 500 V nebo pro stroje s provozním tlakem 8 bar, frekvencí 60 Hz a napájecím napětím
575 V.
EL – Reference na výkres nebo komponentě uvnitř elektrického rozvaděče.
R. – Poznámky: Doplňující informace o dílu. Vysvětlení naleznete na konci stránky.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 3

Instructions
DA - Dansk
1 BESTILLING AF DELE
Angiv altid styknummeret, navnet på og antallet af de ønskede varer samt typen og serienummeret for maskinen.
2 OPLYSNINGER TIL KOLONNERNE
Ref - Referencenummer: Knytter en bestemt del fra listen til tegningen. Kun dele med et referencenummer vises på tegningen.
Dele på tegningen uden et referencenummer er blot medtaget for at vise samlingen.
Part number - Styknummer, der skal bruges ved bestilling af reservedele.
Hvis der ikke er angivet et styknummer, fås komponenten ikke som reservedel.
Dele, der er indeholdt i et sæt, har sætnummeret stående på linjen nedenfor. Se kapitel "1 – Service kits" for at få vist hele
indholdet af sættet.
Et styknummer med en sort prik foran indgår i samlingen lige ovenfor.
Remarks: Der findes yderligere oplysninger til styknummeret lige ovenfor.
Substituted by: Styknummeret lige ovenfor er blevet erstattet af et andet styknummer i forbindelse med en opdatering eller en
revidering.
Qty - Antal: Angiver antallet af dele, der hører til det tilsvarende referencenummer. "AR" står for "As required": Antallet eller
nummeret skal fastsættes.
Name - Navn på del: Oversættelser af de engelske navne kan findes i dokumentet "Glossary of part names".
Validity - Angiver tidshorisont og maskintype/-version, som delen gælder for. Forklaringer til koderne, der anvendes i modellen
for gyldigheden, kan findes i teksten nederst på siden. En model for gyldigheden, der er nævnt i kapitlets titel, gælder for
hele kapitlet. Et plustegn i modellen skal fortolkes som et "og", og et komma som et "eller". Parenteser inddeler koderne, der
beskriver gyldigheden, på samme måde som parenteser i matematik. Se følgende eksempel:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ gælder for maskiner med et arbejdstryk på 8 bar,
en frekvens på 50 Hz og en forsyningsspænding på 500 V eller for maskiner med et arbejdstryk på 8 bar, en frekvens på 60 Hz
og en forsyningsspænding på 575 V.
EL – Refererer til tegningen eller komponenten inde i elskabet.
R. - Bemærkninger: Yderligere oplysninger om delen. Forklaringer kan findes nederst på siden.
DE - Deutsch
1 TEILE BESTELLEN
Geben Sie immer genau die Teilenummer, den Namen und die Anzahl des gewünschten Artikels und den Typ und die
Seriennummer der Maschine an.
2 SPALTENINFORMATION
Ref - Referenznummer: Verknüpft ein spezifisches Teil der Liste mit der Zeichnung. Es werden nur Referenznummern in der
Zeichnung gezeigt. In der Zeichnung dargestellte Teile ohne Referenznummer sind einfach nur zu Illustrationszwecken der
Baugruppe abgebildet.
Part number - Die Teilenummer wird bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteilen angegeben.
Ist keine Teilenummer angegeben, ist die Komponente nicht als Ersatzteil verfügbar.
Bei Teilen, die zu einem Set gehören, wird die Setnummer unten auf der Linie angegeben. Zum kompletten Inhalt des Sets
siehe Kapitel „1 – Service kits“.
Eine mit einem schwarzen Punkt versehene Teilenummer ist in dem direkt darüber stehenden Set enthalten.
Remarks: Zusätzliche Informationen zur Teilenummer stehen direkt darüber.
Substituted by: Die direkt darüber stehende Teilenummer wurde aufgrund einer Aktualisierung oder Überarbeitung durch eine
andere Teilenummer ersetzt.
Qty - Anzahl: Gibt die Anzahl der Teile im Verhältnis zur entsprechenden Referenznummer an. „AR“ steht für „Nach Bedarf“:
Anzahl oder Nummer muss noch angegeben werden.
Name - Teilename: Übersetzungen der englischen Bezeichnungen finden Sie im Dokument „Glossary of part names“.
Validity - Gibt den Zeitrahmen und den Typ/die Version der Maschine vor, für die die Teile gültig sind. Eine Erläuterung
der Codes, die für das Gültigkeitsmuster angewandt werden, finden Sie am Fuß der Seite. Ein im Kapiteltitel genanntes
Gültigkeitsmuster bezieht sich auf das gesamte Kapitel. Ein Pluszeichen im Muster steht für „und“, ein Komma für „oder“.
Klammern fassen die Codes in Gruppen zusammen, ähnlich wie bei mathematischen Klammern. Siehe dazu folgendes
Beispiel:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ ist für Maschinen gültig mit 8 bar-
Betriebsdruck, 50 Hz-Frequenz und 500 V-Versorgungsspannung oder 8 bar-Betriebsdruck, 60 Hz-Frequenz und 575 V-
Versorgungsspannung.
EL – Referenz zu der Zeichnung oder dem Bauteil im Inneren des Schaltkastens.
R. – Anmerkungen: Zusatzinformationen zum Teil. Erklärungen finden Sie am Fuß der Seite.
4 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
EL - ελληνικά
1 ΠΑΡΑΓΓΕΛΙΑ ΑΝΤΑΛΛΑΚΤΙΚΩΝ
Πρέπει πάντα να προσδιορίζετε τον κωδικό εξαρτήματος, την ονομασία και την ποσότητα των απαιτούμενων ειδών, καθώς και
τον τύπο και τον αριθμό σειράς του μηχανήματος.
2 ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΕΣ ΓΙΑ ΤΙΣ ΣΤΗΛΕΣ
Ref - Κωδικός αναφοράς: συσχετίζει ένα συγκεκριμένο εξάρτημα από τη λίστα με το σχέδιο. Μόνο εξαρτήματα που έχουν κωδικό
αναφοράς εμφανίζονται στο σχέδιο. Τα εξαρτήματα στο σχέδιο που δεν έχουν κωδικό αναφοράς, υπάρχουν απλώς για την
εικονογράφηση του συγκροτήματος.
Part number - Κωδικός εξαρτήματος, ο οποίος χρησιμοποιείται κατά την παραγγελία ανταλλακτικών.
Όταν δεν αναφέρεται κάποιος κωδικός εξαρτήματος, το εξάρτημα δεν διατίθεται ως ανταλλακτικό.
Για τα εξαρτήματα που περιέχονται σε κιτ, ο αριθμός του κιτ θα αναφέρεται στην παρακάτω γραμμή. Για το πλήρες περιεχόμενο
του κιτ, βλ. κεφάλαιο "1 – Service kits".
Όταν μπροστά από τον κωδικό εξαρτήματος υπάρχει μια μαύρη κουκίδα, το εξάρτημα περιέχεται στο συγκρότημα που βρίσκεται
ακριβώς από πάνω.
Remarks (Παρατηρήσεις): Πρόσθετες πληροφορίες για τον κωδικό εξαρτήματος ακριβώς από πάνω.
Substituted by (Έχει αντικατασταθεί από): Ο πιο πάνω κωδικός εξαρτήματος έχει αντικατασταθεί από άλλο κωδικό εξαρτήματος
λόγω ενημέρωσης ή αναθεώρησης.
Qty - Ποσότητα: Δείχνει τον αριθμό των εξαρτημάτων σε σχέση με τον αντίστοιχο κωδικό αναφοράς. Το "AR" σημαίνει "As
required" (Αναλόγως των απαιτήσεων): η ποσότητα ή ο αριθμός θα πρέπει να προσδιοριστούν.
Name - Ονομασία εξαρτήματος: Μεταφράσεις των ονομασιών από τα αγγλικά μπορείτε να βρείτε στο έγγραφο "Glossary of part
names".
Validity - Καθορίζει το χρονικό πλαίσιο και τον τύπο/την έκδοση των μηχανημάτων στα οποία μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί το
εξάρτημα. Στο υπόμνημα, στο κάτω μέρος της σελίδας, μπορείτε να βρείτε μια αποσαφήνιση των κωδικών που χρησιμοποιούνται
στο υπόδειγμα ισχύος παραγγελίας. Εάν αναφέρεται ένα υπόδειγμα ισχύος παραγγελίας στον τίτλο του κεφαλαίου, αυτό
ισχύει για ολόκληρο το κεφάλαιο. Ένα σύμβολο "συν" στο υπόδειγμα θα πρέπει να ερμηνεύεται ως "και", ένα κόμμα ως "ή".
Οι παρενθέσεις ομαδοποιούν τους κωδικούς ισχύος παραγγελίας, όπως οι παρενθέσεις στους μαθηματικούς τύπους. Δείτε το
ακόλουθο παράδειγμα:
Το ‘PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)’ ισχύει για μηχανήματα με πίεση λειτουργίας 8
bar, συχνότητα 50 Hz και τάση τροφοδοσίας 500 V ή με πίεση λειτουργίας 8 bar, συχνότητα 60 Hz και τάση τροφοδοσίας 575 V.
EL – Κωδ. αναφοράς για το σχέδιο ή το εξάρτημα στο εσωτερικό του ηλεκτρικού πίνακα.
R. – Παρατηρήσεις: Πρόσθετες πληροφορίες σχετικά με το εξάρτημα. Επεξήγηση παρέχεται στο κάτω μέρος της σελίδας.
ES - Español
1 PEDIDO DE PIEZAS
Especifique siempre el número de referencia, el nombre y la cantidad de los elementos que necesita, además del tipo y número
de serie de la máquina.
2 INFORMACIÓN DE LAS COLUMNAS
Ref - Número de referencia: enlaza una pieza concreta de la lista con el solo. Solo se muestran piezas con número de
referencia en el plano. Las piezas del plano que no tienen números de referencia solo se muestran para ilustrar el conjunto.
Part number - Designación que se debe utilizar para pedir piezas de repuesto.
Si no se especifica una designación, esto quiere decir que el componente no está disponible como pieza de repuesto.
Las piezas que forman parte de un kit tendrán el número de kit en la línea inferior. Para consultar el contenido completo del kit,
consulte el capítulo "1 – Service kits".
Una designación precedida por un punto negro forma parte del conjunto inmediatamente superior.
Remarks: información adicional de la designación inmediatamente superior.
Substituted by: la designación inmediatamente superior se ha sustituido por otra debido a una actualización o revisión.
Qty - Cantidad: indica el número de piezas en relación con el número de referencia correspondiente. "AR" significa "Según
necesidad": cantidad o número a determinar.
Name - Nombre de la pieza: las traducciones de los nombres en inglés pueden encontrarse en el documento “ Glossary of part
names”
Validity - Define el periodo y tipo/versión de las máquinas en las que se puede utilizar la pieza. Puede encontrar una
explicación de los códigos utilizados en el patrón de validez en la leyenda de la parte inferior de la página. Un patrón de validez
mencionado en el título del capítulo es aplicable a todo el capítulo. Un signo '+' en el patrón debe interpretarse como una 'y'
y una coma debe interpretarse como una 'o'. Los paréntesis agrupan los códigos de validez de manera similar a su uso en
matemáticas; véase el siguiente ejemplo:
'PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)' es válido para máquinas con una presión de
trabajo de 8 bar, una frecuencia de 50 Hz y un voltaje de alimentación de 500 V o de 8 bar, una frecuencia de 60 Hz y un
voltaje de alimentación de 575 V.
EL – Referencia al plano o el componente del interior del armario eléctrico.
R. – Notas: información adicional sobre la pieza; se puede encontrar la explicación en la parte inferior de la página.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 5

Instructions
ET - Eesti
1 OSADE TELLIMINE
Täpsustage alati osa number, soovitud ühikute nimi ja kogus, aga ka masina tüüp ja seerianumber.
2 TEABE TULP
Ref - Viitenumber: seostab loendis nimetatud konkreetse osa joonisega. Joonisel on näidatud ainult viitenumbriga osad.
Joonisel ilma viitenumbrita esitatud osadel on koostu kuvamisel illustreeriv tähendus.
Part number - Osa number, mida varuosade tellimisel kasutada.
Kui osa numbrit ei ole täpsustatud, ei ole vastav osa varuosana saadaval.
Komplekti kuuluvate osade puhul on alloleval real nimetatud komplekti number. Komplekti tervikliku kirjelduse leiate peatükist
„1- Service kits”.
Kui osa numbri ees on must punkt, sisaldub osa ülaltoodud koostus.
Remarks: osa numbri kohal kuvatav lisateave.
Substituted by: ülaltoodud osa number on uuenduse või kontrolli tulemusena asendatud teise osa numbriga.
Qty - Kogus: osutab asjaomase viitenumbriga seotud osade arvule. „AR” tähendab „vastavalt vajadusele”: kogus või arv tuleb
kindlaks määrata.
Name - Osa nimi: inglisekeelsete nimede tõlked leiate dokumendist „Glossary of part names”.
Validity - Määratleb ajavahemiku ja masina tüübi/versiooni, mille puhul osa kasutatakse. Kasutusmustris kasutatud koodide
selgituse leiate iga lehekülje allosas olevast legendist. Peatüki pealkirjas nimetatud kasutusmuster kohaldub tervele peatükile.
Mustris kasutatud plussmärki tuleb tõlgendada sõnana „ja”, komana või sõnana „või”. Sarnaselt ümarsulgude matemaatikas
kasutamisele rühmitavad ümarsulud kehtivuskoodide rühmad; vt järgmist näidet:
‘PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)’ kehtib masinate puhul, mille töörõhk on 8 bar ja
sagedus 50 Hz ja toitepinge 500 V, või siis masinate puhul, mille töörõhk on 8 bar ja sagedus 60 Hz ja toitepinge 575V.
EL – Viide joonisele või elektrikapis olevale osale.
R. - Märkused: lisateave osa kohta. Selgituse leiate lehekülje allosast.
FI - Suomalainen
1 OSIEN TILAAMINEN
Määritä aina osanumero, haluttujen tuotteiden nimi ja määrä sekä koneen tyyppi ja sarjanumero.
2 SARAKETIEDOT
Ref - Viitenumero: Yhdistää jonkin tietyn luettelossa mainitun osan piirrokseen. Piirroksessa näkyvät vain ne osat, joilla on
viitenumero. Ne osat, joilla ei ole viitenumeroa, ovat piirroksessa vain kokoonpanoa kuvaamassa.
Part number - Osanumero, jota on käytettävä varaosia tilattaessa.
Jos osanumeroa ei ole määritetty, komponentti ei ole saatavana varaosana.
Sarjan mukana tulevilla osilla on sarjanumero, joka on merkitty alla olevalle viivalle. Lue tiedot sarjan täydellisestä sisällöstä
luvusta 1 – Service kits.
Osanumero, jota edeltää musta piste, sisältyy edellä olevaan kokoonpanoon.
Remarks: lisätietoja edellä olevaan osanumeroon.
Substituted by: edellä oleva osanumero on korvattu toisella osanumerolla päivityksen tai korjauksen takia.
Qty - Määrä: Osoittaa viitenumeroon liittyvien osien määrän. AR (As required) tarkoittaa määritettävää määrää.
Name - Osan nimi: englanninkielisten nimien käännökset on kerrottu asiakirjassa ”Glossary of part names”.
Validity - Määrittää sen ajanjakson ja koneiden tyypin tai version, joita osa koskee. Määrityskaavassa käytetyt koodit on selitetty
sivun alalaidan kuvatekstissä. Luvun otsikossa mainittu määrityskaava koskee koko lukua. Kaavassa oleva plusmerkki tarkoittaa
ja-sanaa ja pilkku tai-sanaa. Sulkeet ryhmittävät määrityskoodit matemaattisten sulkeiden tavalla, esimerkiksi näin:
PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V) koskee koneita, joiden työskentelypaine on 8
baaria, taajuus 50 hertsiä ja verkkojännite 500 volttia tai joiden työskentelypaine on 8 baaria, taajuus 60 hertsiä ja verkkojännite
575 volttia.
EL – Viittaus piirrokseen tai sähkökotelon sisällä olevaan komponenttiin.
R. – Huomautukset: Lisätietoja osasta. Selitys on sivun alalaidassa.
6 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
FR - Français
1 COMMANDER DES PIÈCES
Toujours spécifier le numéro de pièce, la désignation et la quantité des articles souhaités ainsi que le type et le numéro de série
de la machine.
2 COLONNE INFORMATIONS
Ref - Référence : associe une pièce donnée de la liste au schéma. Seules les pièces avec une référence sont illustrées sur le
schéma. Les pièces représentées sur le schéma sans référence servent uniquement à illustrer l'ensemble.
Part number - Numéros de pièce à utiliser lors de la commande de pièces de rechange.
Si aucun numéro de pièce n'est indiqué, le composant n'est pas disponible en tant que pièce de rechange.
Pour les pièces contenues dans un kit, le numéro de kit est mentionné à la ligne ci-dessous. Pour voir le contenu du kit en
détail, consulter le chapitre « 1 – Service Kits ».
Un numéro de pièce précédé d'un point noir est compris dans l'ensemble ci-dessus.
Remarks : informations supplémentaires sur le numéro de pièce ci-dessus.
Substituted by : le numéro de pièce ci-dessus a été remplacé par un autre numéro de pièce suite à une mise à jour ou une
révision.
Qty - Quantité : indique le nombre de pièces en fonction du numéro de pièce correspondant. « AR » signifie « As
required » (autant que nécessaire) : quantité ou nombre à définir.
Name - Désignation de la pièce : les traductions des désignations anglaises sont disponibles dans le document « Glossary of
part names ».
Validity - Définit le délai et le type/version de machines pour lesquels les pièces sont valides. Pour plus de détails sur les codes
utilisés dans le modèle de validité, voir la légende en bas de page. Un modèle de validité mentionné dans le titre du chapitre
s'applique à l'ensemble du chapitre. Le signe plus utilisé dans le modèle se comprend comme un « et », une virgule comme un
« ou». Les parenthèses regroupent les codes de validité, comme en mathématiques, voir l'exemple suivant :
« PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V) » est valide pour des machines avec une
pression de service de 8 bar et une fréquence de 50 Hz et une tension d'alimentation de 500 V ou une pression de service de
8 bar et une fréquence de 60 Hz et une tension d'alimentation de 575 V.
EL – Référence sur le schéma ou le composant à l'intérieur de l'armoire électrique.
R. – Remarque : informations supplémentaires sur la pièce. Pour plus de détails, voir le bas de page.
HU - Magyar
1 ALKATRÉSZRENDELÉS
Mindig adja meg a cikkszámot, a kért elemek nevét és mennyiségét, valamint a típust és a gyári számot.
2 A TÁBLÁZAT OSZLOPAI
Ref - Hivatkozási szám: a felsorolt alkatrészt a megfelelő ábrához társítja. A rajzon csak hivatkozási számmal ellátott
alkatrészek láthatók. Az ábrán a hivatkozási számmal nem rendelkező alkatrészek csak az összeszerelés módját illusztrálják.
Part number - A pótalkatrészek rendelésénél használandó cikkszám.
Ha nincs megadva cikkszám, az adott alkatrész nem kapható pótalkatrészként.
Azokra az alkatrészekre, amelyek egy készlet részeként kaphatók, a készlet cikkszáma vonatkozik, amely az alsó sorban
szerepel. A készlet teljes tartalmát lásd: „1 – Service Kits” című fejezet.
Ha egy cikkszámot pont előz meg, az illető alkatrész a közvetlenül felette lévő sorban szereplő egység részét képezi.
Remarks: További információk a közvetlenül felette lévő sorban szereplő cikkszámra vonatkozóan.
Substituted by: A közvetlenül felette lévő sorban szereplő cikkszámot frissítés vagy új változat következtében új cikkszám
váltotta fel.
Qty - Mennyiség: az adott hivatkozási számhoz kapcsolódó alkatrészek számát jelöli. Az „AR” jelentése „As required” (igény
szerint): itt megadhatja a mennyiséget vagy a számot.
Name - Az alkatrész neve: az angol nyelvű elnevezések fordítása az „Glossary of part names” c. dokumentumban található.
Validity - Azt az időkeretet, továbbá azokat a géptípusokat/-verziókat adja meg, amelyekhez az alkatrész használható. Az
érvényességi formulában használt kódok magyarázata a lap alján olvasható. A fejezetcímben szereplő érvényességi formula
az egész fejezetre érvényes. A formulában szereplő plusz (+) jel jelentése: „és”, a vessző (,) jelentése: „vagy”. A zárójelek a
matematikában használt zárójelekhez hasonlóan csoportosítják az érvényességi kódokat; lásd a következő példát:
A „PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)” 8 bar üzemi nyomású, 50 Hz frekvenciájú és
500 V tápfeszültségű, vagy 8 bar üzemi nyomású, 60 Hz frekvenciájú és 575 V tápfeszültségű berendezéseket jelöl.
EL – Hivatkozás az elektromos szekrényen belüli ábrára vagy alkatrészre.
R. – Megjegyzések: Az alkatrésszel kapcsolatos további információk. A magyarázat a lap alján található.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 7

Instructions
IT - Italiano
1 ORDINE DEI RICAMBI
Specificare sempre il numero categorico, il nome e la quantità degli articoli richiesti, oltre al tipo e al numero di serie della
macchina.
2 COLONNA DELLE INFORMAZIONI
Ref - Numero di riferimento: associa un ricambio specifico dalla lista all'illustrazione. Nell'illustrazione sono mostrati solo ricambi
dotati di numero di riferimento. I ricambi presenti nell'illustrazione privi di numero di riferimento sono riportati semplicemente per
illustrare il montaggio.
Part number - Numero categorico da utilizzare per l'ordine di parti di ricambio.
Quando non è specificato alcun numero categorico, il componente non è disponibile come parte di ricambio.
I ricambi contenuti in un kit avranno il numero di kit riportato nella riga sottostante. Per il contenuto completo del kit vedere il
capitolo "1 – Service kits".
Un numero categorico preceduto da un punto nero fa parte del gruppo immediatamente precedente.
Remarks: le informazioni aggiuntive relative al numero categorico sono riportate in alto.
Substituted by: il numero categorico immediatamente precedente è stato sostituito da un altro numero categorico a causa di un
aggiornamento o di una revisione.
Qty - Quantità: indica il numero di ricambi corrispondenti al numero di riferimento. "AR" significa "As required" (Secondo
necessità): quantità o numero da definire.
Name - Nome parte: la traduzione dei termini dall'inglese è reperibile nel documento "Glossary of part names".
Validity - Definisce i tempi e il tipo/versione di macchine per le quali il ricambio è valido. La legenda in fondo alla pagina riporta
una spiegazione dei codici utilizzati nello schema di validità. Uno schema di validità menzionato nel titolo del capitolo si applica
all'intero capitolo. Un segno più nello schema deve essere interpretato come "e", una virgola come "o". Tra le parentesi sono
raggruppati i codici di validità, al pari delle parentesi matematiche, vedere il seguente esempio:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" è valido per le macchine con pressione di
esercizio di 8 bar e 50Hz di frequenza e una tensione di alimentazione di 500 V, o con pressione di esercizio di 8 bar, frequenza
di 60Hz e tensione di alimentazione di 575 V.
EL – Riferimento all'illustrazione o al componente all'interno dell'armadio elettrico.
R. – Note: informazioni aggiuntive sulla spiegazione dei ricambi sono reperibili in fondo alla pagina.
JA - 日本の
1 部品の注文
部品番号、注文するアイテムの名称および数量、機器のタイプおよびシリアル番号を必ず指定してください。
サービスマーク“ ”のついたページにはサービスキットの部品が記載されています。キットの内容物について
は、第1章「サービスキット」を参照してください。
2 各列の説明
Ref. - 参照番号：リストの部品が図のどこにあるかを示します。参照番号がある部品のみが図に示されていま
す。参照番号がない部品はアセンブリを表現するため便宜上表記されています。
Part number - 部品番号：部品番号が示されていない部品は、スペア部品としては提供されていません。太字の行
はアセンブリを示します。番号の後に黒い点が付いている部品は、すぐ上にある太字のアセンブリを構成してい
ます。
“<<< >>>”は、“Name”と同じタイトルの別のリストを示します。
“Ref.”または”Name”行の下に、特定の部品の部品番号が記載されている場合は、機器のタイプ/バージョンに
応じて部品を選択してください。
Qty - 数量：参照番号に対応する部品の数量を示します。 „AR“は「必要に応じて」を意味し、必要に応じて数
量または番号を指定します。
Name - 部品名：英語に対応する各言語の名称は「Glossary of part names」（部品名称対応表）に記載されてい
ます。
Remarks - 部品に関する追加情報です。
一連の文字列は特定の部品が指定認定団体によって承認されていることを示し、リストのコードまたは規定に準拠
しています。
測定値はミリメートル単位で示されています。
8 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
LT - Lietuvos
1 DALIŲ UŽSAKYMAS
Visada nurodykite pageidaujamos prekės dalies numerį, pavadinimą ir kiekį. Taip pat nurodykite įrenginio tipą ir serijos numerį.
2 INFORMACIJA STULPELIUOSE
Ref - Nuorodos numeris: susieja konkrečią dalį iš sąrašo su brėžiniu. Brėžinyje rodomos tik nuorodos numerį turinčios dalys.
Brėžinyje parodytos dalys be nuorodos numerio yra tiesiog įrenginio iliustracija.
Part number - Dalies numeris, naudojamas užsakant atsargines dalis.
Jei dalies numeris nenurodytas, komponentas negalimas kaip atsarginė dalis.
Rinkinyje esančios dalys turi rinkinio numerį, minimą apatinėje eilutė. Visą rinkinio turinį gali pamatyti skyriuje „1 – Service kits“.
Jei prieš dalies numerį yra juodas taškas, jis yra viršuje pateiktame įrenginyje.
Remarks: papildoma dalies numerio informacija pateikta dešinėje pusėje viršuje.
Substituted by: dešinėje viršuje nurodytas dalies numeris buvo pakeistas kitu dalies numerio, nes vyko atnaujinimas arba
revizija.
Qty - Kiekis: pateikiamas dalių, kurioms priskiriamas atitinkamas nuorodos numeris, skaičius. „AR“ reiškia „Priklausomai nuo
poreikio“: kiekis arba skaičius bus nustatytas to prireikus.
Name - Dalies pavadinimas: anglų kalba pateiktų pavadinimų vertimus rasite dokumente „Glossary of part names“.
Validity - Apibūdinamas laikotarpis ir įrenginio tipas / versija, kurioms dalis tinka. Tinkamumo šablone naudojami kodai paaiškinti
puslapio apačioje esančioje legendoje. Tinkamumo šablonas skyriaus pavadinimas taikomas visam skyriui. Pliuso ženklas
šablone reiškia „ir“, o kablelis – „arba“. Skliaustais grupuojami tinkamumo kodai (kaip ir matematiniai veiksmai), žr. pavyzdį:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ tinka įrenginiams, kurių darbinis slėgis yra 8 barai,
dažnis yra 50 Hz, o maitinimo įtampa yra 500 V, arba darbinis slėgis yra 8 barai, dažnis yra 60 Hz, o maitinimo įtampa yra 575
V.
EL – Nuoroda į brėžinį arba komponentą elektros modulio viduje.
R. – Pastabos: papildoma informacija apie dalį. Paaiškinimus galite rasti puslapio apačioje.
LV - Latvijas
1. DETAĻU PASŪTĪŠANA
Vienmēr norādiet detaļas numuru, nosaukumu un vajadzīgo daudzumu, kā arī iekārtas tipu un sērijas numuru.
2. KOLONNAS INFORMĀCIJA
Ref – Atsauces numurs: saista konkrētu sarakstā esošo detaļu ar rasējumu. Rasējumā tiek parādītas tikai detaļas ar atsauces
numuru. Detaļas rasējumā bez atsauces numura paredzētas vienīgi tam, lai attēlotu attiecīgo mezglu.
Part number – Detaļas numurs, kas jāizmanto, pasūtot rezerves daļas.
Ja detaļas numurs nav norādīts, attiecīgais komponents nav pieejams kā rezerves daļa.
Komplektā iekļautām detaļām nākamajā rindā būs norādīts komplekta numurs. Komplekta pilnīgs saturs aprakstīts nodaļā “1 –
Service kits”.
Ja pirms detaļas numura ir melns punkts, tā ir iekļauta iepriekš attēlotajā mezglā.
Remarks: papildinformācija par iepriekšējo detaļas numuru.
Substituted by: iepriekšējais detaļas numurs ir aizstāts ar citu detaļas numuru atjaunināšanas vai pārskatīšanas dēļ.
Qty – Daudzums: apzīmē detaļu skaitu attiecīgajam atsauces numuram. “AR” nozīmē “pēc nepieciešamības”: jānosaka
daudzums vai numurs.
Name – Detaļas nosaukums: angļu valodas nosaukumu tulkojumi ir atrodami dokumentā “Glossary of part names”.
Validity – Nosaka iekārtu derīguma periodu un tipu/versiju. Derīguma norādē iekļauto kodu skaidrojums ir norādīts eksplikācijā
lappuses apakšdaļā. Nodaļas virsrakstā minētā derīguma norāde attiecas uz visu nodaļu. Pluszīme norādē jāinterpretē kā “un”,
bet komats kā “vai”. Iekavas grupē derīguma kodus līdzīgi kā iekavas matemātikā, piemēram:
“PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)” ir derīgs iekārtām ar 8 bāru darba spiedienu,
50 Hz frekvenci un 500 V barošanas spriegumu vai iekārtām ar 8 bāru darba spiedienu, 60 Hz frekvenci un 575 V barošanas
spriegumu.
EL – Atsauce uz rasējumu vai elektrosadales skapja komponentu.
R. – Piezīmes: papildinformācija par detaļu. Skaidrojums atrodams lappuses apakšdaļā.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 9

Instructions
NL - Nederlands
1 BESTELLEN VAN ONDERDELEN
Vermeld altijd het onderdeelnummer, de benaming en de hoeveelheid van de gewenste onderdelen, alsmede het type en het
serienummer van de machine.
2 KOLOMINFORMATIE
Ref. - Referentienummer: koppelt een specifiek onderdeel in de lijst aan de desbetreffende tekening. Alleen onderdelen met een
referentienummer zijn in de tekening afgebeeld. Onderdelen zonder referentienummer die op de tekening voorkomen, worden
slechts getoond om het geheel te illustreren.
Part number - Onderdeelnummer dat wordt gebruikt voor het bestellen van reserveonderdelen.
Indien geen onderdeelnummer is aangegeven, is de betreffende component niet als reserveonderdeel verkrijgbaar.
Van onderdelen uit een kit wordt het kitnummer op de regel eronder vermeld. Voor de volledige inhoud van de kit, zie paragraaf
"1 - Service kits".
Een onderdeel waarvan het nummer gevolgd wordt door een zwart rondje, maakt deel uit van het vet afgedrukte samenstel
direct erboven.
Remarks: aanvullende informatie voor het onderdeelnummer direct erboven.
Substituted by: het nummer direct erboven is vervangen door een ander onderdeelnummer als gevolg van een update of
herziening.
Qty - Hoeveelheid: geeft het aantal onderdelen aan met betrekking tot met het overeenkomstige referentienummer. "AR"
betekent "As required": de hoeveelheid of het aantal moet nader worden bepaald.
Name - Naam van het onderdeel: vertalingen van de Engelse benamingen zijn te vinden in het document "Glossary of part
names".
Validity - Bepaalt het tijdsframe en type/versie van de machines waarvoor het onderdeel geldig is. Verklaring van de codes die
in het geldigheidspatroon zijn gebruikt, vindt u in de legenda onder aan de pagina. Een geldigheidspatroon vermeld in de titel
van het hoofdstuk is van toepassing op het hele hoofdstuk. Een plusteken in het patroon staat voor 'en' en een komma voor 'of'.
Haakjes groeperen de geldigheidscodes, vergelijkbaar met die in de wiskunde, zie het volgende voorbeeld:
"PRESS:8 BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V, FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" is geldig voor machines met een werkdruk van 8
bar, 50Hz-frequentie en 500V-voedingsspanning of een werkdruk van 8 bar, 60Hz-frequentie en 575V-voedingsspanning.
EL – Referentie van de tekening of het onderdeel in de elektrische aansluitkast.
R. - Opmerkingen: extra informatie over het onderdeel. Uitleg vindt u onder aan de pagina.
NO - Norsk
1 BESTILLE DELER
Spesifiser alltid delenummeret, navnet og antallet til den nødvendige artikkelen, samt typen og serienummeret til maskinen.
2 KOLONNEINFORMASJON
Ref – Referansenummer: knytter en spesifikk del fra listen til tegningen. Kun delene med et referansenummer vises i tegningen.
Delene i tegningen som vises uten et referansenummer, er kun tatt med for å illustrere monteringen.
Part number – Delenummer skal brukes ved bestilling av reservedeler.
Når det er ikke er spesifisert et delenummer, er ikke komponenten tilgjengelig som en reservedel.
Deler som inngår i et sett, har settnummeret nevnt på linjen nedenfor. Du finner fullstendig oversikt over innholdet i settet i
kapittel 1 – Service kits.
Et delenummer med en svart prikk foran er en del av settet rett ovenfor.
Remarks: ytterligere informasjon om delenummeret rett ovenfor.
Substituted by: Delenummeret rett ovenfor har blitt erstattet av et annet delenummeret på grunn av en oppdatering eller
revisjon.
Qty – Antall: angir antall deler av det tilhørende referansenummeret. AR betyr Etter behov: Antallet er ikke bestemt.
Name – Delenavn: Du finner oversettelser av de engelske navnene i dokumentet «Glossary of part names».
Validity – Definerer tidsrommet og maskintypen/-versjonen som delen er gyldig for. Du finner en oversikt over kodene som
brukes i gyldighetsmønsteret, i forklaringen nederst på siden. Et gyldighetsmønster som nevnes i kapitteltittelen, gjelder for
hele kapittelet. Et pluss-tegn i mønsteret skal tolkes som "og", mens et komma skal tolkes som "eller". Parenteser deler inn
gyldighetskodene, omtrent på samme måte som matematiske parenteser. Se følgende eksempel:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" er gyldig for maskiner med arbeidstrykk på 8 bar,
frekvens på 50 Hz og forsyningsspenning på 500 V; eller arbeidstrykk på 8 bar, frekvens på 60 Hz og forsyningsspenning på
575V.
EL – Referanse til tegningen eller komponentene inne i koplingsskapet.
R. – Kommentarer: Ekstra informasjon om delen. Du finner en forklaring nederst på siden.
10 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
PL - Polski
1 ZAMAWIANIE CZĘŚCI
Podczas zamawiania produktów należy zawsze podawać następujące informacje: numer części, nazwę i liczbę produktów, a
także typ i numer seryjny urządzenia.
2 OBJAŚNIENIE NAZW KOLUMN
Ref. — numer referencyjny: informuje, na którym rysunku można znaleźć konkretną część z listy. Na rysunku zamieszczone są
wyłącznie części opatrzone numerem referencyjnym. Części bez przypisanego numeru referencyjnego zostały zamieszczone
na rysunku wyłącznie w celu prawidłowego zilustrowania montażu.
Part number — numer części stosowany podczas zamawiania części zamiennych.
W przypadku braku numeru części danej pozycji nie można zamówić jako części zamiennej.
Jeśli dana część jest elementem zestawu, w kolejnym wierszu znajduje się numer zestawu. Informacje na temat pełnej
zawartości zestawu można znaleźć w rozdziale „1 – Service kits”.
Jeśli numer części poprzedza czarna kropka, dana część jest elementem zestawu opisanego powyżej.
Remarks: dodatkowe informacje na temat numeru części zamieszczonego powyżej.
Substituted by: numer części zamieszczony powyżej został zastąpiony innym numerem części na skutek modernizacji lub
aktualizacji.
Qty — ilość: oznacza liczbę części w odniesieniu do danego numeru referencyjnego. Symbol „AR” oznacza „zależnie od
wymagań”: liczba lub numer do ustalenia.
Name — nazwa części: tłumaczenia nazw angielskich znajdują się w dokumencie „Glossary of part names”.
Validity — wskazuje ramy czasowe oraz typ/wersję urządzenia, do którego przeznaczona jest część. Kody wykorzystywane we
wzorze przydatności zostały objaśnione w legendzie u dołu strony. Wzór przydatności wspomniany w tytule rozdziału dotyczy
całego rozdziału. Znak dodawania we wzorze należy interpretować jako słowo „i”, natomiast przecinek — jako słowo „lub”.
Nawiasy pełnią tu funkcję podobną do nawiasów w matematyce — grupują kody przydatności — jak w poniższym przykładzie:
kod „PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)” dotyczy maszyn o ciśnieniu roboczym 8 bar,
częstotliwości 50 Hz i napięciu zasilania 500 V lub o ciśnieniu roboczym 8 bar, częstotliwości 60 HZ i napięciu zasilania 575 V.
EL — odnośnik do rysunku lub podzespołu wewnątrz szafki rozdzielczej.
R. — uwagi: dodatkowe informacje na temat części. Wyjaśnienie znajduje się u dołu strony.
PT - Português
1 ENCOMENDA DE PEÇAS
Especifique sempre a referência da peça, o nome e a quantidade de itens pretendidos, bem como o tipo e o número de série
da máquina.
2 INFORMAÇÕES DAS COLUNAS
Ref - Número de referência: associa uma peça específica da lista ao desenho. Neste último, são apresentadas apenas
as peças com um número de referência. As peças apresentadas no desenho sem um número de referência destinam-se
simplesmente a ilustrar o processo de montagem.
Part number - Referência da peça a utilizar no caso de encomenda de peças sobresselentes.
Se não for especificada uma referência da peça, significa que o componente não se encontra disponível como uma peça
sobresselente.
As peças incluídas num kit terão o número do kit mencionado na linha abaixo. Para obter informações sobre o conteúdo
completo do kit, consulte o capítulo "1 – Service kits".
Uma referência da peça precedida de um ponto preto está incluída no processo de montagem imediatamente acima
mencionado.
Remarks: encontra informações adicionais sobre a referência da peça imediatamente acima.
Substituted by: a referência da peça imediatamente acima foi substituída por outra referência devido a uma actualização ou
revisão.
Qty - Quantidade: indica o número de peças em relação ao número de referência correspondente. "AR" (As required) significa
"Como exigido": quantidade ou número a determinar.
Name - Nome da peça: encontra as traduções dos nomes em inglês no documento "Glossary of part names".
Validity - Define o período de tempo e o tipo/versão de máquinas para que a peça é válida. Encontra a explicação sobre os
códigos utilizados no padrão de validade na legenda situada no final da página. Um padrão de validade mencionado no título
do capítulo aplica-se a todo o capítulo. Um sinal de adição no padrão deve ser interpretado como "e", ao passo que uma
vírgula deve ser interpretada como "ou". Os parênteses agrupam os códigos de validade, da mesma forma que os parênteses
utilizados em operações matemáticas; veja o seguinte exemplo:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" é válido para máquinas com uma pressão de
trabalho de 8 bar, uma frequência de 50 Hz e uma tensão de alimentação de 500 V ou uma pressão de trabalho de 8 bar, uma
frequência de 60 Hz e uma tensão de alimentação de 575 V.
EL – Referência ao desenho ou ao componente dentro do compartimento eléctrico.
R. – Observações: informações adicionais sobre a peça. Encontra a explicação no final da página.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 11

Instructions
RO - român
1 COMANDAREA PIESELOR
Indicaţi întotdeauna numărul de catalog, numele şi cantitatea articolelor solicitate, precum şi tipul şi numărul de serie al maşinii.
2 INFORMAŢIILE DIN COLOANE
Ref. - Numărul de referinţă: face legătura între o piesă din listă şi una din schemă. Numai piesele care au un număr de referinţă
apar în schemă. Piesele din schemă care nu au un număr de referinţă sunt incluse doar pentru a clarifica modul de asamblare.
Part number - Numărul de catalog este utilizat pentru comandarea pieselor de schimb.
Atunci când nu este specificat un număr de catalog, componenta nu este disponibilă ca piesă de schimb.
Pentru piesele incluse în kituri, numărul kitului este menţionat pe rândul următor. Pentru conţinutul complet al kitului, consultaţi
capitolul „1 – Service kits”.
Un număr de catalog precedat de un punct negru este inclus în ansamblul aflat chiar deasupra acestuia.
Remarks: Informaţii suplimentare privind numărul de catalog de mai sus.
Substituted by: Numărul de catalog de mai sus a fost înlocuit de un alt număr de catalog din cauza unei actualizări sau a unei
revizuiri.
Qty - Cantitate: indică numărul de piese care au numărul de referinţă corespunzător. „AR” este abrevierea pentru „As required”:
cantitatea şi numărul vor fi determinate conform necesităţilor.
Name - Numele piesei: traducerile numelor din engleză se află în documentul „Glossary of part names”.
Validity - Defineşte perioada de valabilitate şi tipul/versiunea utilajelor cu care piesa este compatibilă. Clarificarea codurilor
utilizate în modelul de valabilitate poate fi găsită în legenda din partea de jos a paginii. Un model de valabilitate menţionat în
titlul unui capitol se aplică întregului capitol. Un semn plus care apare într-un model va fi interpretat drept „şi”, virgulă ori „sau”.
Codurile de valabilitate sunt grupate cu ajutorul unor paranteze având o funcţie similară parantezelor matematice, a se vedea
exemplul de mai jos:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)” indică valabilitatea pentru utilajele cu presiune de
lucru de 8 bari, frecvenţă de 50 Hz şi tensiune de alimentare de 500 V sau presiune de lucru de 8 bari, frecvenţă de 60 Hz şi
tensiune de alimentare de 575 V.
EL – Referire la schemă sau la componenta din cofretul electric.
R. – Observaţii: informaţii suplimentare privind piesa. Explicaţiile pot fi găsite în partea de jos a paginii.
RU - русский
1 ЗАКАЗ ДЕТАЛЕЙ
Всегда указывайте номер по каталогу, наименование и количество требуемых позиций, а также тип и серийный номер
машины.
2 ИНФОРМАЦИЯ
Ref - Ссылочный номер: соотносит деталь из списка со схемой. На схеме показаны только детали со ссылочным
номером. Детали без ссылочного номера приведены на схемах только для демонстрации всего узла в сборе.
Part number - Номер детали, указываемый при заказе запасных частей.
Если номер детали не указан, то компонент недоступен в качестве отдельной запасной части.
Для деталей, входящих в состав комплекта, будут приведены номера этих комплектов, упомянутых строчкой ниже.
Чтобы узнать полный состав комплекта см. раздел “1 – Service kits”.
Деталь, перед номером которой стоит черная точка, входит в состав изображенного выше узла.
Remarks: дополнительная информация о номере приведенной выше детали.
Substituted by: номер изображенной выше детали был заменен другим номером по причине обновления или
переработки.
Qty - Количество: указывает количество деталей относительно соответствующего ссылочного номера. „AR“ значит „As
required“: количество или номер будут определены.
Name - Наименование детали: перевод англоязычных наименований можно найти в документе “Glossary of part
names”(Словарь наименований деталей).
Validity - Определяет временные рамки и тип/версию машины, в которой используется деталь. Пояснение кодов,
используемых в данной графе, можно найти в списке обозначений внизу страницы. Информация о совместимости,
упомянутая в данной главе, актуальна для всей главы. Знак плюса в примечании о совместимости следует принимать
за ‘и’, запятые — за ‘или’. Скобки группируют коды совместимости по принципу, схожему с математическим. См. пример:
‘PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)’ применима в машинах с рабочим давлением
8 бар, частотой 50 Гц и напряжением источника питания 500 В или рабочим давлением 8 бар, частотой 60 Гц и
напряжением источника питания 575 В.
EL – Ссылка на схему или компонент электрического шкафа.
R. – Примечания: дополнительная информация о детали. Пояснения приведены внизу страницы.
12 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
SK - slovenský
1 OBJEDNÁVANIE DIELOV
Vždy uveďte číslo dielu, názov a množstvo požadovaných položiek, ako aj typ a výrobné číslo zariadenia.
2 INFORMÁCIE V STĹPCOCH
Ref – Referenčné číslo: spája konkrétny diel v zozname s nákresom. Na nákrese sú zobrazené len diely s referenčným číslom.
Diely v nákrese bez referenčného čísla slúžia len na znázornenie zostavy.
Part number – Číslo dielu, ktoré treba použiť pri objednávaní náhradných dielov.
Ak nie je uvedené žiadne číslo dielu, daný komponent nie je k dispozícii ako náhradný diel.
Diely, ktoré sú súčasťou súpravy, majú v riadku nižšie uvedené číslo súpravy. Zoznam všetkých dielov v súprave nájdete
v kapitole „1 – Service kits“.
Číslo dielu, pred ktorým sa nachádza čierna bodka, je súčasťou zostavy uvedenej nad ním.
Remarks: Ďalšie informácie o čísle dielu vyššie.
Substituded by: Číslo dielu uvedené vyššie bolo nahradené iným dielom kvôli inovácii alebo revízii.
Qty – Množstvo: Indikuje počet dielov v súvislosti s príslušným referenčným číslom. „AR“ znamená „As required“: množstvo
alebo počet sa musí určiť.
Name – Názov dielu: Preklady anglických názvov nájdete v dokumente „Glossary of part names“(Slovník názvov dielov).
Validity – Definuje časový rámec a typ/verziu zariadení, pre ktoré možno daný diel použiť. Informácie o význame kódov
použitých v reťazci označujúcom platnosť nájdete v legende v spodnej časti strany. Reťazec označujúci platnosť uvedený
v názve kapitoly sa vzťahuje na celú kapitolu. Znamienko plus v tomto reťazci znamená „a“ a čiarka znamená „alebo“. Zátvorky
slúžia na zoskupenie kódov označujúcich platnosť podobne ako v matematických vzorcoch. Pozrite si nasledujúci príklad:
„PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)“ – platí pre zariadenia s pracovným tlakom
8 barov, frekvenciou 50 Hz a napájacím napätím 500 V alebo pracovným tlakom 8 barov, frekvenciou 60 Hz a napájacím
napätím 575 V.
EL – Odkaz na nákres komponentu v elektrickej skrini.
R. – Poznámky: Ďalšie informácie o danom diele. Vysvetlenie nájdete v spodnej časti stránky.
SL - slovenščina
1 NAROČANJE DELOV
Vedno navedite številko dela, ime in količino zahtevanih predmetov ter tip in serijsko številko stroja.
2 INFORMACIJE O STOLPCU
Ref - Referenčna številka: povezuje določen navedeni del z risbo. Na risbi so prikazani samo deli z referenčno številko. Deli na
risbi, ki nimajo referenčne številke, so namenjeni samo prikazu sklopa.
Part number - Številko dela uporabite pri naročanju nadomestnih delov.
- Če številka dela ni navedena, komponenta ni na voljo kot nadomestni del.
Za dele, ki so del kompleta, bo v spodnji vrstici navedena tudi številka kompleta. Celotno vsebino kompleta si oglejte v poglavju
"1 – Service kits".
Številka dela, pred katero je črna pika, spada v sklop tik zgoraj.
Remarks: dodatne informacije o številki dela tik zgoraj.
Substituted by: številka dela tik zgoraj je zamenjana z drugo številko dela, zaradi posodobitve ali revizije.
Qty Količina: določa število delov v povezavi z ustrezno referenčno številko. Kratica "AR" pomeni "As required" (kot je
zahtevano): količina ali število za določitev.
Name - Ime dela: prevodi angleških imen se nahajajo v dokumentu "Glossary of part names".
Validity - Določa časovni razpon in tip/različico stroja, ki veljata za del. Razlago kod, ki se uporabljajo v vzorcu veljavnosti,
najdete v legendi na dnu strani. Vzorec veljavnosti, ki je naveden v naslovu poglavja, velja za celotno poglavje. Znak plus
v vzorcu lahko pomeni besedo "in", vejico ali besedo "ali". Oklepaji združujejo kode veljavnosti, podobno kot oklepaji pri
matematiki; glejte spodnji primer:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" velja za stroje z delovnim tlakom 8 barov in
frekvenco 50 Hz ter napajalno napetostjo 500 V, ali z delovnim tlakom 8 barov, frekvenco 60 Hz in napajalno napetostjo 575 V.
EL – Referenca za risbo ali komponenta znotraj električne omarice.
R. – Opombe: dodatne informacije o delu. Razlago lahko najdete na dnu strani.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 13

Instructions
SV - Svenska
1 BESTÄLLA DELAR
Ange alltid reservdelsnummer, namn och antal delar som önskas, samt typbeteckning och tillverkningsnummer på maskinen.
2 SPALTINFORMATION
Ref. – Referensnummer: kopplar ihop en viss reservdel i förteckningen med ritningen. Endast reservdelar med referensnummer
visas i ritningen. Reservdelar som saknar referensnummer i ritningen finns med för att illustrera själva monteringen.
Part number – Reservdelsnummer som används vid beställning av reservdelar.
Om reservdelsnummer saknas finns komponenten inte som reservdel.
Delar som tillhör en sats har satsnumret angivet på raden nedanför. Se kapitel ”1 – Service kits” för satsens kompletta innehåll.
Ett reservdelsnummer som föregås av en svart punkt finns med i enheten direkt ovanför.
Remarks: Ytterligare information om reservdelsnumret direkt ovanför.
Substituted by: Reservdelsnumret direkt ovanför har ersatts med ett annat reservdelsnummer på grund av en uppdatering eller
revision.
Qty – Antal: Anger hur många delar som är kopplade till motsvarande referensnummer. "AR" betyder "As required" (som
erfordras): Antal eller nummer bestäms senare.
Name - Reservdelsbeteckningar: Översättningar av de engelska beteckningarna återfinns i dokumentet "Glossary of part
names" (Ordlista med reservdelsbeteckningar).
Validity – Definierar tidsramen och typ/version av maskin som reservdelen passar för. En förklaring av koderna som används
i giltighetsmönstret finns i symbolförklaringen längst ner på sidan. Ett giltighetsmönster som nämns i ett kapitel gäller för hela
kapitlet. Ett plustecken i mönstret ska tolkas som "och" och ett komma som "eller". Parenteser grupperar giltighetskoderna i
likhet med parenteser inom matematiken. Se följande exempel:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" gäller maskiner med 8 bar arbetstryck, 50 Hz
frekvens och 500 V matningsspänning, eller 8 bar arbetstryck, 60 Hz frekvens och 575 V matningsspänning.
EL – Referens till ritningen eller komponenten inuti elskåpet.
R. – Anmärkningar: Extra information om reservdelen. En förklaring finns längst ner på sidan.
TR - Türk
1 PARÇA SİPARİŞİ
Her zaman gereken parçaların parça numarası, adı ve miktarının yanı sıra makinenin tipini ve seri numarasını da belirtin.
2 SÜTUN BİLGİLERİ
Ref - Referans numarası: Listenin belirli bir bölümünü çizime bağlar. Yalnızca referans numarası olan parçalar çizimde gösterilir.
Çizimde referans numarası olmayan parçalar yalnızca mekanizmanın tamamını göstermek için konulmuştur.
Part number - Yedek parça siparişi verirken kullanılacak parça numarası.
Parça numarası belirtilmediğinde, bu bileşen bir yedek parça olarak bulunmaz.
Bir kite dahil olan parçalar, alttaki satırda bulunan kit numarasına sahiptir. Kitin tüm içeriğini görmek için bkz. bölüm "1 – Service
kits".
Önünde siyah nokta olan parça numaraları, hemen yukarıdaki mekanizmada bulunur.
Remarks: Hemen yukarıdaki parça numarası ile ilgili ek bilgiler.
Substituted by: Bir güncelleme veya revizyon nedeniyle hemen yukarıdaki parça numarası yerine başka bir parça numarası
gelmiştir.
Qty - Miktar: İlgili referans numarasıyla ilgili parça sayısını gösterir. "AR" kısaltması "As required" (miktarı veya sayısı
belirlenecek) anlamına gelir.
Name - Parça adı: İngilizce adların tercümeleri "Glossary of part names”(Parça adları sözlüğü) adlı belgede bulunabilir.
Validity - Parçanın geçerli olduğu zaman aralığını ve makine tiplerini/modellerini belirler. Geçerlilik düzeninde kullanılan kodların
açıklamaları sayfanın alt kısmında bulunabilir. Bölüm başlığında bahsedilen bir geçerlilik düzeni, tüm bölüm için geçerlidir.
Düzende bir artı işareti olması "ve", virgül işareti olması "veya" olarak anlaşılabilir. Geçerlilik kodları, matematikte kullanılan
parantezlere benzer şekilde, parantezler ile gruplara ayrılır. Aşağıdaki örneğe bakabilirsiniz:
"PRESS:8BAR + (FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V , FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V)" düzeni 8 bar çalışma basıncı olan, 50 Hz
frekanslı, 500 V besleme gerilimli makineler veya 8 bar çalışma basıncı, 60 Hz frekanslı ve 575 V besleme gerilimli makineler
için geçerlidir.
EL – Elektrik panosu içindeki çizim veya parçaya referans anlamına gelir.
R. – Notlar: Parça hakkında ek bilgiler. Açıklamalar sayfanın alt kısmında bulunabilir.
14 CD190+, S/N. API152214

Instructions
ZH - 中国的
1订购零件
一定要注明零件号码、所需物品的名称和数量，以及型号和机器的序列号。
2列信息
Ref-参考号码：将列表中的特定部件链接到图纸上。只有具有参考号码的部件才能如图所示。图纸中没有参考编号的部件只是简
单地用于说明组装件。
Part number-订购备件时使用的零件号码。
当没有指定零件号码时，该零件不能作为备用零件使用。
组件包中包含的零件，将在该零件下面一行中提及组件包的编号。组件包的完整内容
请看第一章“1 -Service kits”。
前面有一个黑点的零件号包含在上面的组件中。
Remarks（备注）：零件号码的额外信息显示在右上。
Substituted by（取代）：由于更新或修改，上面的零件号已被另一个零件号替换。
Qty-表示与相应参考号码相关的部件数量。“AR”是指依据需求，数量待定。
Name-部件名称:英文名称的翻译可在文件“部件名称术语表”中找到。
Validity-定义了该部件对机器有效的时间框架和类型/版本。在有效性栏中缩写名称的澄清可以在页面底部的说明中找到。在章节
标题中提到的有效性栏适用于该整个章节。句式中的加号可以解释为“与”，逗号可以解释为“或”。
括号将有效性代码分组，类似于数学括号，参见下面的示例:
' PRESS:8BAR +(FREQ:50HZ+MOVOL:500V，FREQ:60HZ+MOVOL:575V) '适用于8 bar工作压力和频率50Hz及电压500V，或
8bar工作压力和频率60Hz及电压575V的机器。
EL -指图纸中或电气柜内的元件的备注。
R. -备注:关于零件的额外信息。解释可以在这页的底部找到。
CD190+, S/N. API152214 15

1 - Service Kits
16 CD190+, S/N. API152214

1 - Service Kits
CD190+, S/N. API152214 17

2 - Service Kits Pressure dew point -40°C
18 CD190+, S/N. API152214

2 - Service Kits Pressure dew point -40°C
Ref Part Number Qty Name
SERVICE KIT A - 6 MONTHS - 4000 HOURS

2901 3004 08 1 KIT INLET FILTER
SERVICE KIT B - 2 YEARS - 16000 HOURS
1617 6164 01 3 SILENCER ¾”
1606 9368 00 1 SILENCER 2”
 Substituted by: 1617 6164 09 - SILENCER 2INCH 12BAR (quantity: 1)
1089 0641 11 3 SOLENOID VALVE 230V ¾”
1089 0580 61 1 SOLENOID VALVE 230V 1/8”
1617 6272 04 1 ANGLE SEAT VALVE
SERVICE KIT C - 7 YEARS - 56000 HOURS
1616 9445 84 6 CERADES LARGE
 Substituted by: 1616 9445 94 - DRYER CZX-150-4-stack spare (quantity: 1)
1616 9445 82 6 CERADES SMALL
 Substituted by: 1616 9445 92 - DRYER CZX-150-2-stack spare (quantity: 1)
1837 0039 86 3 BOLT + O-RING KIT
CD190+, S/N. API152214 19

3 - Base Frame Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD 190+,
CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
20 CD190+, S/N. API152214

3 - Base Frame Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD 190+,
CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
1010 1629 2014 00 1 FRAME
CD190+, S/N. API152214 21

4.1 - Block Valve Assembly
22 CD190+, S/N. API152214

4.1 - Block Valve Assembly
1010 1629 2036 81 3 MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

2070 1624 0750 00 2 STRAINER
2080 1627 0102 01 2 SPRING
2090 1629 2141 62 2 DIFFUSER STRAINER
2100 0324 1800 68 12 SPACING SCREW
2110 1624 0750 01 2 STRAINER
2120 0211 1104 72 6 SCREW
2130 0663 2121 21 2 O-RING
2140 0211 1964 92 16 SCREW
2150 0301 2364 00 16 WASHER
 Substituted by: 0300 0276 19 - WASHER M12 T2MM D20MM (quantity: 1)
1629 2035 80 3 MANIFOLD
3010 
2 MANIFOLD

1629 2140 00 2 ADAPT PLATE TO PILOT VALVE

1629 2140 01 1 SPOOL KIT RIGHT

1629 2140 02 1 SPOOL KIT LEFT

1629 2140 03 2 SPRING
3140 
1629 2035 20 2 SOLENOID VALVE
 Substituted by: 1629 2141 92 - VALVE SOLENOID 230V (quantity: 1)
Remarks:
Only 1 set is illustrated, quantity of items depends on type of CD dryer.
CD190+, S/N. API152214 23

4.2 - Tower
24 CD190+, S/N. API152214

4.2 - Tower
Ref Part Number Qty Name R.
1010 1627 6307 95 AR EXTRUSION ASSEMBLY

2010 - AR DESICCANT
 Remarks: Refer to chapter Service Kits
CD190+, S/N. API152214 25

4.3 - Nozzle Pressure dew point -40°C
26 CD190+, S/N. API152214

4.3 - Nozzle Pressure dew point -40°C
1010 1629 2010 24 1 NOZZLE

1020 0583 8100 68 2 FITTING PIPE
1030 0070 6002 15 AR TUBE
CD190+, S/N. API152214 27

4.4 - Inlet/Outlet Piping G thread
28 CD190+, S/N. API152214

4.4 - Inlet/Outlet Piping G thread
1010 1629 3103 00 1 HOSE ASSEMBLY

1030 1629 2141 54 1 OUTLET PIPE
1040 0663 2121 20 2 O-RING
CD190+, S/N. API152214 29

5 - Filters CD 150+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 195+
30 CD190+, S/N. API152214

5 - Filters CD 150+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 195+
1010 8102 2977 39 1 FILTER UD180+

1040 0266 2110 00 2 NUT
1050 0301 2335 00 2 WASHER
1070 0147 1323 03 2 BOLT
Remarks:
Number of towers as shown on the drawing might be different
CD190+, S/N. API152214 31

6 - Plugs
32 CD190+, S/N. API152214

6 - Plugs
1030 1629 3089 00 3 PLUG

1040 0663 2121 20 3 O-RING
1050 1629 3088 00 2 PLUG
Remarks:
Number of towers shown on the drawing might be different depending on size of model
CD190+, S/N. API152214 33

7 - Blow-Off Assembly 3/4" - CD 125+, CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+)
- pressure dew point -20°C, 'CD 125+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) -
pressure dew point -40°C
34 CD190+, S/N. API152214

7 - Blow-Off Assembly 3/4" - CD 125+, CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+)
- pressure dew point -20°C, 'CD 125+, CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) -
pressure dew point -40°C
1010 1617 6164 01 1 SILENCER

1020 0586 2155 00 1 NIPPLE
1030 1089 0641 11 1 VALVE SOLENOID
1040 0605 8305 03 1 REDUCER
1050 0603 4105 03 1 NIPPLE
Remarks:
CD190+, S/N. API152214 35

8 - Blow-Off Assembly 2" - (CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew
point -20°C, (CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) - pressure dew point -40°C
36 CD190+, S/N. API152214

8 - Blow-Off Assembly 2" - (CD 150+, CD 195+, CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew
point -20°C, (CD 170+, CD 190+, CD 250+, CD 335+) - pressure dew point -40°C
1010 0551 3610 00 1 PIPE

1020 1606 9368 00 1 SILENCER
 Substituted by: 1617 6164 09 - SILENCER 2INCH 12BAR (quantity: 1)
1025 0607 5157 03 1 BUSHING
1030 1617 6272 04 1 VALVE ANGLE SEAT
1040 0586 2158 00 1 COUPLING
1070 1089 0580 61 1 VALVE SOLENOID
1080 1629 3090 02 1 REDUCER G2 G1.5 NO GROOVE
1090 0663 2121 20 1 O-RING
Remarks:
CD190+, S/N. API152214 37

9 - Pilot Air Connections Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C,
(CD 190+, CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
38 CD190+, S/N. API152214

9 - Pilot Air Connections Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C,
(CD 190+, CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
1010 0070 6002 04 AR TUBE

1020 0583 8140 80 1 PIPE FITTING
1030 0583 8120 73 3 ELBOW
1040 0686 3718 14 9 PLUG
1070 0583 8140 67 4 PIPE FITTING
CD190+, S/N. API152214 39

10 - Loose - Nozzles Pressure dew point -40°C
40 CD190+, S/N. API152214

10 - Loose - Nozzles Pressure dew point -40°C
1020 1629 2010 34 1 NOZZLE

1030 1629 2010 28 1 NOZZLE
1040 1629 2010 21 1 NOZZLE
1050 1629 2010 18 1 NOZZLE
1060 1629 2010 15 1 NOZZLE
CD190+, S/N. API152214 41

11.1 - Electrical components DC1 CONTROLLER
42 CD190+, S/N. API152214

11.1 - Electrical components DC1 CONTROLLER
1010 1900 6012 00 1 DC1 CONTROLLER

1629 2141 43 1 WIRE TRIPLEX 3 SIDE
1040 9090 0239 00 2 PRESSURE GAUGE
1046 0583 8120 73 2 ELBOW
1050 0070 6002 38 4 TUBE
 Substituted by: 0070 6002 43 - TUBE ID4 OD6 TRANSPARENT (quantity: 1)
1070 1629 2030 80 1 CUBICLE ASSEMBLY

1629 2030 00 1 CUBICLE BOX IP65
0333 3220 00 2 WASHER
0301 2321 00 2 WASHER
0266 1108 00 2 NUT M6
 Substituted by: 0266 2108 00 - NUT M6 (quantity: 1)
1629 3117 01 1 WIRE EARTH
0698 5140 73 1 CABLE GLAND
0698 5148 12 1 MULTIPLE SEALING
0698 5148 11 3 PLUG
0697 9809 22 1 LOCK NUT
CD190+, S/N. API152214 43

12 - Canopy Assembly Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD
190+, CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
44 CD190+, S/N. API152214

12 - Canopy Assembly Triplex - (CD 225+, CD 300+) - pressure dew point -20°C, (CD
190+, CD 250+) - pressure dew point -40°C
1005 1089 9068 01 1 KEY DOOR

1070 1629 2026 00 1 BACK PANEL
1080 1629 2052 00 1 PLATE
1090 0147 1247 03 15 BOLT
1100 0301 2321 00 15 WASHER
1110 0216 1100 72 6 SCREW
1629 2033 81 1 DOOR ASSEMBLY
2010 
1 DOOR
2020 
1513 0431 00 1 DOOR LOCK
1629 2020 81 1 PANEL ASSEMBLY
3010 
1 PANEL
3020 
1079 2903 03 2 PANEL PIN
3030 
0291 1185 28 2 LOCK NUT
3040 
0216 1957 25 8 SCREW
3050 
1629 2093 00 1 PLATE
4010 
1 PANEL
4020 
1079 2903 03 2 PANEL PIN
4030 
0291 1185 28 2 LOCK NUT
4040 
1629 2139 00 1 COVER
4050 
0216 1957 25 8 SCREW
5010 
1 PANEL
5020 
1079 2903 03 2 PANEL PIN
5030 
0291 1185 28 2 LOCK NUT
5040 
0216 1957 25 10 SCREW
5050 
1629 2102 00 1 PLATE
1629 2028 81 1 ROOF ASSEMBLY
6010 
1 ROOF
6020 
1079 2903 01 2 PANEL CLIP
1629 2103 81 1 ROOF ASSEMBLY
7010 
1 ROOF
7020 
1079 2903 01 6 PANEL CLIP
7030 
1079 2903 03 2 PANEL PIN
7040 
0291 1185 28 2 LOCK NUT
CD190+, S/N. API152214 45

13 - Markings
46 CD190+, S/N. API152214

13 - Markings
1010 1629 2057 29 1 DECAL CD190+

1030 1617 9587 00 1 OUTLET LABEL
1040 1617 9588 00 1 INLET LABEL
1050 1 DATA PLATE
2010 2204 2199 00 1 DECAL
CD190+, S/N. API152214 47

14.1 - PDP Sensor
48 CD190+, S/N. API152214

14.1 - PDP Sensor
8092 2617 79 1 PDP SENSOR RETROFIT KIT

1060 1617 6537 00 1 WIRING
1110 0301 2335 00 6 WASHER
1120 0147 1328 03 3 BOLT
1130 1629 2085 00 1 BRACKET PDP SENSOR
1140 1617 9655 80 1 SENSOR HOUSING ASSY
1150 9740 2021 11 1 NIPPLE
1160 8204 0941 09 1 NEEDLE VALVE
 Substituted by: 1621 7443 00 - VALVE (quantity: 1)
1170 0582 2000 22 1 BICONICAL FITING
1180 1617 9471 00 1 PIPE
1190 0147 1242 03 2 BOLT
 Substituted by: 0147 1243 03 - HEX. BOLT M6X10X8.8 (quantity: 1)
1200 0301 2321 00 2 WASHER
1210 9090 1508 00 1 STRAIGHT COUPLING
1220 1624 8966 81 1 PDP SENSOR
1230 0583 8120 73 1 ELBOW
1240 0070 6002 38 AR TUBE
1250 0852 0012 00 1 BALL VALVE MINI
1260 0070 6002 38 AR TUBE
CD190+, S/N. API152214 49

In order to be First in Mind—
First in Choice® for all your quality
compressed air needs, Atlas Copco
delivers the products and services
that help to increase your business’
efficiency and profitability.
Atlas Copco's pursuit of innovation

never ceases, driven by our need
for reliability and efficiency. Always
working with you, we are committed to
providing you the customized quality
air solution that is the driving force
behind your business.
06/11/2020
www.atlascopco.com

Atlas Copco FD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atlas Copco FD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atlas Copco FD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atlas Copco

Service Air Compressor and Dryer

Shipyard: Yantai CIMC Raffles Offshore Ltd.

Atlas Copco Contact Information

&DSDFLW\ PK f

requirements of the List of Prohibited Substances

Motor Lifting Eye

DIN flanges are available as optional kit EWD WSD G 1/8" F

299(2x) 370(2x) 295(2x) 305(2x)

890(2x) 895(2x) OSCi outlet

DIN flanges are available as optional kit

0551000195 ( 1:1 ) (ISO 7-R 1 1/2)(2x) Ambient sensor

Drain UD+/DD filter

590 1000 0633331100 ( 1 : 2 )

(P145) All options are shown in dotted lines G

Tolerances, if not indicated, according to:

* DOOR FULLY OPEN ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLASS

Name Confidentiality Class

Drawn by INEvak Blank nr. Replaces - API

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

04 POWER CIRCUIT DRYER

10 EXPANSION MODULE I02 TT51: Temp. sensor cooling water IN (watercooled )

19 LEGEND Freeze protection : See service diagram 9820 3558 00

Treatment Not Applicable ACDE

CUSTOMER'S INSTALLATION ALL VOLTAGES (50 AND 60 HZ)

DRYER (A1) VARIANTS

MAS GA55-90 (2012)

MAS GA55-90 (2012)

REMOTE PRESS. SENSING

REMOTE PRESS.SET SELECTION

MAS GA55-90 (2012)

OPTION OPTION OPTION

REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP [I] OPTION ES100 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS

CANOPY M1 02 MAIN MOTOR ALL VOLTAGES (50 AND 60HZ)

DRYER PSHH90 04 PRESSURE SWITCH

CONTROL PANEL T1 05 TRANSFORMER CONTROL CIRCUIT

LOCATION TAGNAME SHEET DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL K15 06 CONTACTOR FAN MOTOR

CONTROL PANEL K34 07 THERMISTOR RELAY MOTOR TEMP. SHUTDOWN

LOCATION TAGNAME SHEET DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

CANOPY TT51 12 TEMPERATURE SENSOR COOLING WATER IN

[L] supply connection in function contactors size

[M] Optional phase sequence relay replace by NO-contact of

contact from K34.

requirements of the List of Prohibited Substances

- All dimensions in millimeters, unless otherwise stated

ATLAS COPCO STANDARD CLASS

Name DIMENS. DRWG CD 20-335+ Confidentiality

Material See Drawing Public

Treatment Not Applicable INV G

Scale 1 : 15 Family A2 Compare Drawing owner

Drawn by AIR41892 Blank nr. Replaces API

MAIN POWER SUPPLY [B]

Tolerances,if not indicated,according to:

MAIN POWER SUPPLY [B] Confidentiality Class

Treatment Not Applicable ACD

Drawn by INEAPY Blank nr. Replaces API G

Version Drwg Designation Sheet ( ) 01 01

requirements of the List of Prohibited Substances

For DD+, PD+, UD+ and QD+

&DSDFLW\ PK f